Copy

Copying Instructions


 

 
Loading Documents in the ADF

 
     
  1. Fan the document stack and even the edges.
 
     
  1. Neatly place the documents face up in the document feeder tray.
 
     
  1. Adjust the slide guides to the width of the documents.

The document is ready for scanning.

  • Do not add or remove documents while they are being scanned.
  • When scanning is complete, remove the documents from the document delivery tray to avoid paper jams.
  • Avoid using ADF to scan the same document more than 30 times. When scanned repeatedly, documents can become folded or torn, which may cause paper jams.
  • If the feeder rollers are soiled from scanning a document written in pencil, clean them. (See "Cleaning the Machine.")

 

 
Basic Copying Method

Follow this procedure to make a copy.


 
     
  1. Load the document in the ADF.

For documents you can copy, see "Document Requirements."

 
     
  1. Press [Copy].

If using the LASER CLASS 810, you can switch to the Copy mode by pressing [Copy/Fax].

  • You want to adjust the image quality and density:
    See "Scan Settings."
  • To copy using paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray or the optional paper cassette:
    Press [Paper Select], and select the paper type.
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).

  • You enter a wrong number:
    Press [Clear], and enter a new number.
 
     
  1. Press [Start].
  • You want to cancel copying:
    Press [Stop] on the operation panel.
    When the <STOP KEY PRESSED> message appears, press [OK].
    When the<CANCEL?>message appears, press [] to select <YES>.
  • If <ORIGINAL SIZE> is displayed after you press [Start]:
    Press [] or [] to specify the original size.

 

 
Scan Settings

Before pressing [Start] to begin copying, you can adjust the settings to better suit the document to be scanned. These settings return to the default values if the Auto Clear function is activated or if you press [Reset].


Image Quality

Density

 

 
Image Quality

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Copy].

If using the LASER CLASS 810, you can switch to the Copy mode by pressing [Copy/Fax].

 
     
  1. Press [Image Quality] repeatedly to select the document type.
<Photo>: For documents that contain fine text or photos.
<Text/Photo>: For documents that contain text and photos.
<Text>: For text documents.

 

 
Density

Return to Overview

You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the document manually.


 
     
  1. Press [Copy].

If using the LASER CLASS 810, you can switch to the Copy mode by pressing [Copy/Fax].

 
     
  1. Press [Density] repeatedly to select the density mode.
<Darker>: to make light documents darker.
<Standard>: Suitable for copying regular originals.
<Lighter>: to make dark documents lighter.
  • To cancel all settings, press [Reset].
  • When you switch the mode by pressing the mode keys such as [Fax/Send], all settings will be also canceled. If you want to keep the settings, set the density as following;
    [Additional Functions] → <COPY SETTINGS> → <STANDARD SETTINGS> → <DENSITY> (See "Setting Menu.")

 

 
Auto Zoom

You can set to automatically enlarge/reduce the original according to a specified paper size when copying. The zoom ratio can be set from 50% to 145%.


Remark
  • When this setting is enabled, if you are using the LASER CLASS 810, you must specify the original size when copying.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COPY SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <AUTO ZOOM>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Collate Copy

You can set to copy documents collated into sets arranged in page order. This feature can be used together with "Two-Sided Copying."


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COPY SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If you want to use the Collate Copying function together with "Two-Sided Copying," proceed to step 3 of "1 to 2-Sided Copying," "2 to 2-Sided Copying," or "2 to 1-Sided Copying."

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COL.>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Two-Sided Copying

Two-sided copying enables you to make two-sided copies from one-sided or two-sided documents, or make one-sided copies from two-sided documents. This feature can be used together with "Collate Copy."


Remark
  • Paper used to make two-sided copies must conform to the following specifications:
    Paper size: LGL, LTR, and A4
    Paper weight: 17 to 24 lb (64 to 90 g/m²)
  • The illustrations are the results of the output for the following circumstances.
    If using the LASER CLASS 830i: If the orientation of an image in a document is set vertically.
    If using the LASER CLASS 810: If the orientation of an image in a document is set horizontally.

1 to 2-Sided Copying


2 to 2-Sided Copying


2 to 1-Sided Copying


 

 
1 to 2-Sided Copying

Return to Overview

You can make two-sided copies from one-sided documents.


 
     
  1. Set documents.
 
     
  1. Press [Copy].

If using the LASER CLASS 810, you can switch to the Copy mode by pressing [Copy/Fax].

 
     
  1. Press [2-Sided] repeatedly to select <1> 2-SIDED>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <BOOKTYPE> or <CALENDARTYPE>, then press [OK].
  • If using the LASER CLASS 830i:
When images in documents are set vertically as illustrated on the right, the following are the resulting outputs.

<BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the document have the same top-bottom orientations.
<CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides of the document have opposite top-bottom orientations.
  • When images on 11x17 landscape documents are orientated horizontally, select <BOOK TYPE> if the images on the front and back sides of the copy have opposite orientations. Select <CALENDAR TYPE> if images on the front and back sides of a copy have the same orientations.
  • If using the LASER CLASS 810:
When images in documents are set horizontally as illustrated on the right, the following are the resulting outputs.

<BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the copy have the same top-bottom orientations.
<CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides of the copy have opposite top-bottom orientations.
  • For landscape originals, such as LTRR documents, with an image set vertically, the front and back sides of the copy will have opposite top-bottom orientations when <BOOK TYPE> is selected. When <CALENDAR TYPE> is selected, the front and back sides of the copy will have the same top-bottom orientations.
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
 
     
  1. Press [Start].
  • To cancel all settings, press [Stop].
  • When you switch the mode by pressing the mode keys such as [Fax/Send], all settings will be also canceled. If you want to keep the settings as the default, see "Setting Menu."
  • You can skip step 4. In this case, the machine makes <BOOK TYPE> copies.

 

 
2 to 2-Sided Copying

Return to Overview

You can make two-sided copies from two-sided documents.


 
     
  1. Set documents.
 
     
  1. Press [Copy].

If using the LASER CLASS 810, you can switch to the Copy mode by pressing [Copy/Fax].

 
     
  1. Press [2-Sided] repeatedly to select <2> 2-SIDED>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use [] or [] to select <BOOKTYPE> or <CALENDARTYPE> (for the documents), then press [OK].
<BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the document have the same top-bottom orientation.
<CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides of the document have opposite top-bottom orientations.
 
     
  1. Use [] or [] to select <BOOK TYPE> or<CALENDAR TYPE> (for the copies), then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
 
     
  1. Press [Start].

To cancel all settings, press [Stop].


 

 
2 to 1-Sided Copying

Return to Overview

You can make one-sided copies from two-sided documents.


 
     
  1. Set documents.
 
     
  1. Press [Copy].

If using the LASER CLASS 810, you can switch to the Copy mode by pressing [Copy/Fax].

 
     
  1. Press [2-Sided] repeatedly to select <2> 1-SIDED>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use [] or [] to select <BOOKTYPE> or <CALENDARTYPE>, then press [OK].
  • If using the LASER CLASS 830i:
When images in documents are set vertically as illustrated on the right, select the desired output.

<BOOK TYPE>: Select if images on the back side of a document have the same top-bottom orientations as the front side of the document.
<CALENDAR TYPE>: Select if images on the front and back sides of a document have opposite top-bottom orientations.
  • When images on 11x17 landscape documents are orientated horizontally, select <BOOK TYPE> if the images on the front and back sides of the document have opposite orientations. Select <CALENDAR TYPE> if images on the front and back sides of a document have the same orientations.
  • If using the LASER CLASS 810:
When images in documents are set horizontally as illustrated on the right, select the desired output.

<BOOK TYPE>: Select if images on the back side of a document have the same top-bottom orientations as the front side of the document.
<CALENDAR TYPE>: Select if images on the front and back sides of a document have opposite top-bottom orientations.
  • For landscape documents, such as LTRR documents, with an image set vertically, the images on the front and back sides of the document will have opposite top-bottom orientations when <BOOK TYPE> is selected. When <CALENDAR TYPE> is selected, the front and back sides of the document will have the same top-bottom orientations.
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
 
     
  1. Press [Start].

To cancel all settings, press [Stop].


 

 
Canceling Copy Jobs

Cancel an ongoing job as follows.


 
     
  1. Press [Stop].
 
     
  1. When the <STOP KEY PRESSED> message appears, press [OK].

Ex.

When the <CANCEL?> message appears, press [] to select <YES>.
Ex.


 

 
Checking and Deleting Copy Jobs

System monitor enables you to monitor the status of the copy jobs currently being processed.


 
     
  1. Press [System Monitor] repeatedly to select <COPY STATUS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to scroll through the job list, and check the status of the copy jobs.

If you want to delete the job, go to step 3. Otherwise, press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired job, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CANCEL>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] to select <YES>.

If you do not want to cancel the job, press [] to select <NO>.

 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Reserved Copy

You can make copy settings and scan documents even if the machine is currently printing. The scanned documents are processed after the current job is complete.


 
     
  1. Set documents.
 
     
  1. Press [Copy].

If using the LASER CLASS 810, you can switch to the Copy mode by pressing [Copy/Fax].

 
     
  1. Set the desired copy mode and quantity (1 to 99), then press [Start].

You can reserve up to 5 copy jobs, with different settings for each job.


 

 
Send/Receive

Sending, Receiving, and Fax Instructions

Some functions may not be available, depending on whether the optional network printer kit is attached. (A network printer kit is standard-equipped for the LASER CLASS 830i.)

Some functions are not available even if the optional network printer kit is installed when using the LASER CLASS 810.



 

 
Loading Documents in the ADF

 
     
  1. Fan the document stack and even the edges.
 
     
  1. Neatly place the documents face up in the document feeder tray.
 
     
  1. Adjust the slide guides to the width of the documents.

The document is ready for scanning.

  • Do not add or remove documents while they are being scanned.
  • When scanning is complete, remove the documents from the document delivery tray to avoid paper jams.
  • Avoid using ADF to scan the same document more than 30 times. When scanned repeatedly, documents can become folded or torn, which may cause paper jams.
  • If the feeder rollers are soiled from scanning a document written in pencil, clean them. (See "Cleaning the Machine.")

 

 
Basic Sending Method

Follow this procedure to send faxes, e-mails and I-faxes, or to send documents to a file server (For the LASER CLASS 810, only the Fax mode is available). For network connection, see "Set the Machine for Network Usage."


 
     
  1. Load the document in the ADF.

For documents you can send, see "Document Requirements."

 
     
  1. Press [Fax/Send] repeatedly to select the sending method, then press [OK].

If using the LASER CLASS 810, you can switch to the Fax mode by pressing [Copy/Fax].

  • When sending color images, always specify the sending method before specifying the destination.
  • You want to send document to a file server:
    You can specify the file server addresses only with one-touch keys, coded dial codes, or [Address Book] key. See "Specifying Destinations."
  • You want to adjust the image quality and density
    See "Scan Settings."
 
     
  1. Specify the fax number or e-mail address with the numeric keys.

You can also specify the fax number or e-mail or I-fax addresses with one-touch keys, coded dial codes, or [Address Book] key. (See "Specifying Destinations.")

Ex.

  • You enter a wrong number when specifying a fax number:
    Go back to the wrong digit with []
  • You enter a wrong character when specifying an e-mail address:
    Go back to the wrong character with [], then press [Clear]. Or press and hold [Clear] to delete the entire entry.
 
     
  1. Press [Start].
  • You want to cancel sending:
    Press [Stop] on the operation panel.
    When the <STOP KEY PRESSED> message appears, press [OK].
    When the <CANCEL?> message appears, select <YES> with [].
  • If <ORIGINAL SIZE> is displayed afteryou press [Start]:
    Press [] or [] to specify the original size.

 

 
Scan Settings

You can adjust the image quality (Fax) and density of the document you send. The higher image quality you set, the better the output will be, but the longer the transmission will take.

When you send e-mail, I-fax or send documents to a file server, you can optionally set the file format, if multiple images are sent as separate files or a single file, resolution, and original type according to the type of document you are sending (LASER CLASS 830i Only). (See "Send Settings (E-mail/I-Fax/File server) (LASER CLASS 830i Only).")


Image Quality (Fax)

Density

Send Settings (E-mail/I-Fax/File server) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

 

 
Image Quality (FAX)

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Fax/Send] to select <FAX>, then press [OK].

If using the LASER CLASS 810, you can switch to the Fax mode by pressing [Copy/Fax].

 
     
  1. Press [Image Quality] repeatedly to select the resolution, then press [OK].
<Ultra Fine>: for documents that contain fine print and images (the resolution is eight times that of <Standard>). (400 x 400 dpi)
<Super Fine>: for documents that contain fine print and images (the resolution is four times that of <Standard>). (200 x 400 dpi)
<Photo>: for documents that contain photographs (the resolution is twice that of <Standard>). (200 x 200 dpi)
<Fine>: for fine-print documents (the resolution is twice that of <Standard>). (200 x 200 dpi)
<Standard>: for most text-only documents. (200 x 100 dpi)

 

 
Density

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Fax/Send] repeatedly to select the sending method, then press [OK].

If using the LASER CLASS 810, you can switch to the Fax mode by pressing [Copy/Fax].

 
     
  1. Press [Density] repeatedly to select the density.
<Darker>: to make light documents darker.
<Standard>: Suitable for copying regular originals.
<Lighter>: to make dark documents lighter.
  • These settings return to the default values after all documents are scanned. If you want to keep the settings, set the density as following;
    [Additional Functions] → <TX/RX SETTINGS> → <TX/RX COMMON SET.> → <TX SETTINGS> → <SCANNING DENSITY> (See "Setting Menu.")

 

 
Send Settings (E-mail/I-Fax/File server) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview

You can optionally set the file format, if multiple images are sent as separate files or a single file, resolution, and original type after specifying the e-mail or file server address.


 
     
  1. Set documents.
 
     
  1. Press [Fax/Send] repeatedly to select the sending method, then press [OK].

To send documents to a file server, select any sending method.

  • If you want to send color images to a file server or attached to an e-mail message, select <E-MAIL: COLOR> as a sending method.
  • When sending color images, always specify the sending method before specifying the destination.
 
       
  1. Specify the destination.

For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations."

  • You can specify the file server addresses only with one-touch keys, coded dial codes, or [Address Book].
 
     
  1. Press [OK] repeatedly until <FILE FORMAT> is displayed.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the file format, then press [OK].
E-mail (B&W): <PDF>, <TIFF (B&W)>
E-mail (Color): <JPEG>, <PDF (COMPACT)>
File server (B&W): <PDF>, <TIFF (B&W)>
File server (Color): <JPEG>, <PDF (COMPACT)>
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF> for <DIVIDE INTO PAGES>, then press [OK].
<OFF>: Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them.
<ON>: Separates multiple images and send them as separate files.
  • If you have selected <JPEG> in step 5, this setting is not available.
    <DIVIDE INTO PAGES> is automatically set to <ON> when sending documents in JPEG format.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the resolution, then press [OK].
E-mail (B&W): <200 x 200 dpi>, <300 x 300 dpi>, <400 x 400 dpi>, <600 x 600 dpi>, <150 x 150 dpi>, <200 x 100 dpi>
E-mail (Color): <200 x 200 dpi>, <300 x 300 dpi>, <100 x 100 dpi>, <150 x 150 dpi>
I-fax: <200 x 200 dpi>, <200 x 100 dpi>
File server (B&W): <200 x 200 dpi>, <300 x 300 dpi>, <400 x 400 dpi>, <600 x 600 dpi>, <150 x 150 dpi>, <200 x 100 dpi>
File server (Color): <200 x 200 dpi>, <300 x 300 dpi>, <100 x 100 dpi>, <150 x 150 dpi>
  • If <PDF (COMPACT)> is selected as the file format, only <300 x 300 dpi> can be selected for sending color images attached to an e-mail message.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the original type, then press [OK].
<TEXT/PHOTO>: For documents that contain text and photos.
<TEXT>: For text documents.
<PHOTO>: For documents that contain fine text or photos.
  • If you have selected <PDF (COMPACT)> as the file format in step 5, the original type is automatically set to <TEXT/PHOTO>. Skip to step 9.
 
     
  1. Press [Start].
  • When <TIME OUT> is set to <ON> in <TX SETTINGS> in <FAX SETTINGS> in <TX/RX SETTINGS>, and if you have specified the destination by any other method than using numeric keys, the machine starts scanning automatically without pressing [Start], after the preset time for this setting is elapsed.
  • You can set the document's name, a subject line, message body text, and reply-to address, and e-mail priority common to all sending jobs. For instructions, see "Send/Receive."

 

 
Specifying Destinations

Follow the procedure below to send documents to registered recipients.


Remark
  • To send documents to a file server, you can specify the file server addresses only with one-touch keys, coded dial codes, or [Address Book].

Using One-Touch Keys

Using Coded Dial Codes

Using Group Addresses

Using Address Book Key

Using Favorites Buttons (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

 

 
Using One-Touch Keys

Return to Overview

You can specify up to 80 destinations using one-touch keys.


Remark

 
     
  1. Set documents.
 
     
  1. Press [Fax/Send] repeatedly to select the sending method, then press [OK].

If using the LASER CLASS 810, you can switch to the Fax mode by pressing [Copy/Fax].

To send documents to a file server, select any sending method (LASER CLASS 830i Only).

 
     
  1. Press the desired one-touch key (01 to 80).

If you pressed a wrong key, press [Clear] and try again.

If you want to adjust the image quality and density, see "Scan Settings."

Ex.

 
     
  1. Press [Start].
  • When <TIME OUT> is set to <ON> in <TX SETTINGS> in <FAX SETTINGS> in <TX/RX SETTINGS>, and if you have specified the destination by any other method than using numeric keys, the machine starts scanning automatically without pressing [Start], after the preset time for this setting is elapsed.

 

 
Using Coded Dial Codes

Return to Overview

You can specify up to 120 (LASER CLASS 810) / 420 (LASER CLASS 830i) destinations using coded dial codes.


Remark

 
     
  1. Set documents.
 
     
  1. Press [Fax/Send] repeatedly to select the sending method, then press [OK].

If using the LASER CLASS 810, you can switch to the Fax mode by pressing [Copy/Fax].

To send documents to a file server, select any sending method.

 
     
  1. Press [Coded Dial].
 
     
  1. Enter the desired three-digit code (LASER CLASS 810: 000 to 119, LASER CLASS 830i: 000 to 119) with the numeric keys.

Ex.

If you entered a wrong code, press [Clear], then try again from step 3.

If you want to adjust the image quality and density, see "Scan Settings."

 
     
  1. Press [Start].
  • When <TIME OUT> is set to <ON> in <TX SETTINGS> in <FAX SETTINGS> in <TX/RX SETTINGS>, and if you have specified the destination by any other method than using numeric keys, the machine starts scanning automatically without pressing [Start], after the preset time for this setting is elapsed.

 

 
Using Group Addresses

Return to Overview


Remark

 
     
  1. Set documents.
 
     
  1. Press [Fax/Send].

If using the LASER CLASS 810, you can switch to the Fax mode by pressing [Copy/Fax].

 
     
  1. Press the one-touch key or [Coded Dial] followed by the three-digit code under which the desired address group is registered.

If you entered a wrong code, press [Clear], then try again from step 3.

If you want to adjust the image quality and density, see "Scan Settings."

 
     
  1. Press [Start].
  • When <TIME OUT> is set to <ON> in <TX SETTINGS> in <FAX SETTINGS> in <TX/RX SETTINGS>, and if you have specified the destination by any other method than using numeric keys, the machine starts scanning automatically without pressing [Start], after the preset time for this setting is elapsed.

 

 
Using Address Book Key

Return to Overview

[Address Book] search enables you to search for a recipient registered in the machine. This is useful when you forget which one-touch key or coded dial code the recipient you want is registered under.


Remark

 
     
  1. Set documents.
 
     
  1. Press [Fax/Send].

If using the LASER CLASS 810, you can switch to the Fax mode by pressing [Copy/Fax].

 
     
  1. Press [Address Book] repeatedly to select <NAME SEARCH> or <ADD/TEL
    SEARCH>, then press [OK].

If no recipient is registered in Address Book, <NOT REGISTERED> is displayed.

<NAME SEARCH>: searches a destination by name
<ADD/TEL SEARCH>: searches a destination by address or fax number

If using the LASER CLASS 810, skip to step 4.

 
     
  1. Enter the first letter of the recipient's name or the first part of the fax number/address with the numeric keys.

For example, if you want to search for a name that starts with the letter "C", press [2] (ABC).
Entries starting with the letter you entered are displayed if any entries are registered.
Press [] to switch between input modes:

[:A]: Letter mode
[:1]: Number mode

Ex.

LASER CLASS 830i

Ex.

LASER CLASS 830i

Ex.

LASER CLASS 810

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to search for the recipient.
[]: displays recipients in alphabetical order.
[]: displays recipients in reverse order.
 
     
  1. When the recipient's name is displayed, press [OK].

If you want to adjust the image quality and density, see "Scan Settings."

 
     
  1. Press [Start].
  • When <TIME OUT> is set to <ON> in <TX SETTINGS> in <FAX SETTINGS> in <TX/RX SETTINGS>, and if you have specified the destination by any other method than using numeric keys, the machine starts scanning automatically without pressing [Start], after the preset time for this setting is elapsed.

 

 
Using Favorites Buttons (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview


Remark

 
     
  1. Set documents.
 
     
  1. Press [Fax/Send].

If using the LASER CLASS 810, you can switch to the Fax mode by pressing [Copy/Fax].

 
     
  1. Press the desired one-touch key registered as a favorites button (01 to 04).

If you pressed a wrong key, press [Clear] and try again.

 
       
  1. Adjust any necessary settings for your document.

For details, see "Scan Settings."

 
     
  1. Press [Start].
  • When <TIME OUT> is set to <ON> in <TX SETTINGS> in <FAX SETTINGS> in <TX/RX SETTINGS>, and if you have specified the destination by any other method than using numeric keys, the machine starts scanning automatically without pressing [Start], after the preset time for this setting is elapsed.

 

 
Storing/Editing Address Book

This machine provides you with various ways to specify the destination besides using the numeric keys. You can register fax numbers, e-mail addresses and file server addressed to the Address Book. Once you have registered destinations using these functions, you can specify the destinations by simply pressing one or a combination of keys:

You can specify destinations by pressing one-touch keys. You can register up to 80 one-touch keys, including group addresses.

You can specify destinations by pressing [Coded Dial] followed by three-digit code. You can register up to 120 (LASER CLASS 810) / 420 (LASER CLASS 830i) coded dial codes, including group addresses.

You can specify groups of destinations registered in one-touch keys and coded dial codes. You can register up to 199 (LASER CLASS 810)/499 (LASER CLASS 830i) destinations in a group.

You can specify destinations by pressing [Address Book] and searching a destination from Address Book.

You can register a destination together with any possible combination of send settings in a favorites button. One-touch keys 01 to 04 can be registered as favorites buttons.


Remark
  • Depending on the number of destinations registered, after the main power switch is turned ON, you may not be able to perform operations using the operation panel when the standby display appears. If this happens, wait until the machine responses to the key operations.
  • If <ADD. BOOK PASSWORD> is set in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, you must enter your password to enter <ADDRESS BOOK SET.> menu. Enter the password with the numeric keys, then press [OK].
  • To send documents to a file server, the file server addresses must be registered in one-touch keys or coded dial codes.
  • Destinations stored in the Address Book can be exported to your computer as a file, which can be imported into the machine. For information on exporting the Address Book, see "Import/Export Function."
  • For easy reference, print out the list of recipients registered in one-touch keys or coded dial codes. (See "REPORT SETTINGS.")

Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys/Coded Dial Codes

Registering Fax Numbers


Registering E-Mail/I-Fax Addresses (LASER CLASS 830i Only)


Registering File Server Addresses (LASER CLASS 830i Only)


Editing One-Touch Keys/Coded Dial Codes


Deleting One-Touch Keys/Coded Dial Codes


Storing Favorites Buttons (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

You can register a destination together with any possible combination of send settings in a favorites button. One-touch keys 01 to 04 can be registered as favorites buttons.


Registering a Fax Number (Favorites Buttons) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)


Registering an E-Mail/I-Fax Address (Favorites Buttons) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)


Registering a File Server Address (Favorites Buttons) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)


Storing/Editing Group Addresses

Remark
  • The destinations must be registered in one-touch keys, or coded dial codes beforehand.

Registering Group Addresses


Adding New Destination to Group


Deleting Destination from Group


Changing Group Name


Deleting Group Addresses


 

 
Registering Fax Numbers

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <1-TOUCH SPD DIAL> or <CODED SPD DIAL>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select a one-touch key (01 to 80) or coded dial code (LASER CLASS 810: 000 to 119, LASER CLASS 830i: 000 to 419) for which you want to register the fax number, then press [OK].

You can also select a one-touch key or coded dial code by pressing the corresponding one-touch key, or [Coded Dial] followed by the desired three-digit code.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TEL NUMBER ENTRY>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Enter the fax number you register (max. 120 digits, including spaces and pauses) with the numeric keys, then press [OK].

Ex.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NAME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Enter the destination name (max. 16 letters, including spaces) with the numeric keys, then press [OK].

If you want to specify the following optional settings (<LONG DISTANCE>, <TX SPEED>, and <ECM>) for the fax number you are registering, proceed to the next step.

If you do not need to set these options, skip to step 18.

Ex.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OPTIONAL SETTING>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ECM>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> to reduce system and line errors while sending to or receiving from other machines that support ECM, then press [OK].

To register another one-touch key or coded dial code, repeat the procedure from step 4.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SPEED>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the sending speed (33600 bps, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, or 4800 bps), then press [OK].
  • If transmission errors occur frequently, lower the speed.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <LONG DISTANCE>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the most effective transmission option, then press [OK].
<DOMESTIC>: Normally select this option.
<LONG DISTANCE 1-3>: Select one of these options when you make an international call. If errors occur during fax transmissions, try the setting from <LONG DISTANCE 1> through <LONG DISTANCE 3>.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Registering E-Mail/I-Fax Addresses (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <1-TOUCH SPD DIAL> or <CODED SPD DIAL>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select a one-touch key (01 to 80) or coded dial code (LASER CLASS 810: 000 to 119, LASER CLASS 830i: 000 to 419) for which you want to register the address, then press [OK].

You can also select a one-touch key or coded dial code by pressing the corresponding one-touch key, or [Coded Dial] followed by the desired three-digit code.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL> or <I-Fax>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL ADDRESS> or <I-Fax ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Enter the address you register (max. 120 digits) with the numeric keys, then press [OK].

Ex.

To register another one-touch key or coded dial code, repeat the procedure from step 4.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select to select <NAME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Enter the destination name (max. 16 letters, including spaces) with the numeric keys, then press [OK].

Ex.

 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Registering File Server Addresses (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <1-TOUCH SPD DIAL> or <CODED SPD DIAL>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select a one-touch key (01 to 80) or coded dial code (LASER CLASS 810: 000 to 119, LASER CLASS 830i: 000 to 419) for which you want to register the address, then press [OK].

You can also select a one-touch key or coded dial code by pressing the corresponding one-touch key, or [Coded Dial] followed by the desired three-digit code.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <the server protocol (<FTP> or <SMB>)>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <HOST NAME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the name of the file server on the network (up to 120 characters), then press [OK].

Ex.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NAME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the destination's name (up to 16 characters), then press [OK].

Ex.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FILE PATH>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to specify the folder to which the job is to be sent (up to 120 characters), then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <LOGIN NAME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the login name, then press [OK].

You can enter up to 24 characters for the login name.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PASSWORD>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the password, then press [OK].

You can enter up to 24 characters (14 characters when <SMB> is selected as the server protocol) for the password.

To register another one-touch key or coded dial code, repeat the procedure from step 4.

 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Editing One-Touch Keys/Coded Dial Codes

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <1-TOUCH SPD DIAL> or <CODED SPD DIAL>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select a one-touch key (01 to 80) or coded dial code (LASER CLASS 810: 000 to 119, LASER CLASS 830i: 000 to 419) for which you want to register the address, then press [OK].

You can also select a one-touch key or coded dial code by pressing the corresponding one-touch key, or [Coded Dial] followed three-digit code.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TEL NUMBER ENTRY> or <E-MAIL ADDRESS>, then press [OK].

You can edit <HOST NAME>, <NAME>, <FILE PATH>, <LOGIN NAME>, and <PASSWORD> when you edit file server addresses.

 
     
  1. Go back to the wrong digit with [] when you edit a fax number. Or press [] repeatedly to go back to a wrong number or character, then press [Clear] when you edit an e-mail or I-fax address.

To delete the entire entry, press and hold [Clear].

 
     
  1. Enter a new number or character with the numeric keys, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NAME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] repeatedly to go back to the character you want to change, then press [Clear].

To delete the entire entry, press and hold [Clear].

 
     
  1. Enter a new character with the numeric keys, then press [OK].

If you are editing a one-touch key or coded dial code under which a fax number is registered, you can also change the optional settings. For instructions, see "Registering Fax Numbers."

 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Deleting One-Touch Keys/Coded Dial Codes

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <1-TOUCH SPD DIAL> or <CODED SPD DIAL>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select a one-touch key (01 to 80) or coded dial code (LASER CLASS 810: 000 to 119, LASER CLASS 830i: 000 to 419) for which you want to register the address, then press [OK].

You can also select a one-touch key or coded dial code by pressing the corresponding one-touch key, or [Coded Dial] followed by the desired three-digit code.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TEL NUMBER ENTRY> , <E-MAIL ADDRESS> or <HOST NAME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press and hold [Clear] to delete the entire entry, then press [OK].
  • If you delete the fax number, e-mail address or file server address, the registered name is cleared automatically.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Registering a Fax Number (Favorites Buttons) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, use the numeric keys to enter the password, then press [OK].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAVORITES BUTTONS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select a one-touch key (01 to 04), then press [OK].

If a one-touch destination is already registered in the desired one-touch key, select another key, or delete the destination first.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the destination's name (up to 16 characters), then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <TEL NUMBER ENTRY> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the destination's fax number (up to 120 characters), then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <IMAGEQUALITY> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the image quality (<FINE>, <PHOTO>, <SUPER FINE>, <ULTRA FINE>, or <STANDARD>), then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <OPTIONAL SETTING> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].

If you do not want to set the optional settings, select <OFF>, then skip to step 20.

If you want to set the options for sending faxes, select <ON>.

 
     
  1. Confirm that <ECM> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <TX SPEED> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the sending speed (33600 bps, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, or 4800 bps), then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <INTERNATIONAL> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the transmission option (<DOMESTIC>, <LONG DISTANCE 1>, <LONG DISTANCE 2>, or <LONG DISTANCE 3>), then press [OK].
  • If errors occur during international fax transmissions, try the setting from <LONG DISTANCE 1> through <LONG DISTANCE 3>.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Registering an E-Mail/I-Fax Address (Favorites Buttons) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, use the numeric keys to enter the password, then press [OK].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAVORITES BUTTONS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select a one-touch key (01 to 04), then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL> or <IFAX>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <E-MAIL ADDRESS> or <I-FAX ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the destination's address, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the destination's name (up to 16 characters), then press [OK].
 
     
  1. If you are registering an e-mail address, confirm that <IMAGE FORMAT> is displayed, then press [OK].

If you are registering an I-fax address, skip to step 12.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the file format (<PDF>, <TIFF (B&W)>, <PDF (COMPACT)>, or <JPEG>), then press [OK].
<PDF>, <TIFF (B&W)>: Select for sending images in black-and-white.
<PDF (COMPACT)>, <JPEG>: Select for sending color images.
 
     
  1. Confirm that <DIVIDE INTO PAGES> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<OFF>: Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them.
<ON>: Separates multiple images and send them as separate files.
  • If you have selected <JPEG> as the file format in step 11, multiple images are sent as separate files even if you set <DIVIDE INTO PAGES> to <OFF>.
 
     
  1. Confirm that <IMAGEQUALITY> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the resolution, then press [OK].

You can select from <200 x 200dpi>, <200 x 400dpi>, <300 x 300dpi>, <400 x 400dpi>, <600 x 600dpi>, <100 x 100dpi>, <150 x 150dpi>, and <200 x 100dpi>.

  • If you are registering an e-mail address, note the following:
  • If you want to send color images in the <PDF (COMPACT)> format, select <300 x 300dpi>. Otherwise, the image is sent in black-and-white.
  • If you want to send color images in the <JPEG> format, select <100 x 100dpi>, <150 x 150dpi>, <200 x 200dpi>, or <300 x 300dpi>. Otherwise, the image is sent in black-and-white.
  • If you have selected <PDF> or <TIFF> as the file format in step 11 and <100 x 100dpi> or <600 x 600dpi> as the resolution, the image is sent in <200 x 200dpi> resolution.
  • If you are registering an I-fax address, the image is sent in <200 x 200dpi> even if you select <200 x 400dpi>, <300 x 300dpi>, <400 x 400dpi>, <600 x 600dpi>, <100 x 100dpi>, or <150 x 150dpi>.
 
     
  1. Confirm that <ORIGINAL TYPE> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the original type (<TEXT/PHOTO>, <TEXT>, or <PHOTO>), then press [OK].
  • If you have selected <PDF (COMPACT)> as the file format in step 11, the original type is automatically set to <TEXT/PHOTO>.
    Skip to step 18.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Registering a File Server Address (Favorites Buttons) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, use the numeric keys to enter the password, then press [OK].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAVORITES BUTTONS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select a one-touch key (01 to 04), then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the server protocol (<FTP> or <SMB>), then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <HOST NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the name of the file server on the network (up to 120 characters), then press [OK].

For instructions on entering the file server name, see step 9 in "Registering File Server Addresses (LASER CLASS 830i Only)."

 
     
  1. Confirm that <NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the destination's name (up to 16 characters), then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <FILE PATH> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the file path to the folder to which the job is to be sent (up to 120 characters), then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <LOGIN NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the login name, then press [OK].

You can enter up to 24 characters for the login name.

 
     
  1. Confirm that <PASSWORD> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the password, then press [OK].

You can enter up to 24 characters (14 characters when <SMB> is selected as the server protocol) for the password.

 
     
  1. Confirm that <IMAGE FORMAT> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the file format (<PDF>, <TIFF (B&W)>, <PDF (COMPACT)>, or <JPEG>), then press [OK].
<PDF>, <TIFF (B&W)>: Select for sending images in black-and-white.
<PDF (COMPACT)>, <JPEG>: Select for sending color images.
 
     
  1. Confirm that <DIVIDE INTO PAGES> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<OFF>: Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them.
<ON>: Separates multiple images and send them as separate files.
  • If you have selected <JPEG> as the file format in step 17, multiple images are sent as separate files even if you set <DIVIDE INTO PAGES> to <OFF>.
 
     
  1. Confirm that <IMAGEQUALITY> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the resolution, then press [OK].

You can select from <200 x 200 dpi>, <200 x 400 dpi>, <300 x 300 dpi>, <400 x 400 dpi>, <600 x 600 dpi>, <100 x 100 dpi>, <150 x 150 dpi>, and <200 x 100 dpi>.

  • If you want to send color images in the <PDF (COMPACT)> format, select <300 x 300 dpi>. Otherwise, the image is sent in black-and-white.
  • If you want to send color images in the <JPEG> format, select <100 x 100 dpi>, <150 x 150 dpi>, <200 x 200 dpi>, or <300 x 300 dpi>. Otherwise, the image is sent in black-and-white.
  • If you have selected <PDF> or <TIFF> as the file format in step 17 and <100 x 100 dpi> or <600 x 600 dpi> as the resolution, the image is sent in <200 x 200 dpi> resolution.
 
     
  1. Confirm that <ORIGINAL TYPE> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the original type (<TEXT/PHOTO>, <TEXT>, or <PHOTO>), then press [OK].
  • If you have selected <PDF (COMPACT)> as the file format in step 17, the original type is automatically set to <TEXT/PHOTO>.
    Skip to step 24.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Registering Group Addresses

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <GROUP DIAL>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select an empty one-touch key or coded dial code that you want to set as the group address, then press [OK].

You can also select a one-touch key or coded dial code by pressing the corresponding one-touch key, or [Coded Dial] followed by the desired three-digit code.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SELECT ADD/TEL NO>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Select the destinations you want to register in the group (LASER CLASS 810: max. 199 destinations, LASER CLASS 830i: max. 499 destinations) until all destinations are registered, then press [OK].

To enter a destination stored under a one-touch key, press the desired one-touch key.

To enter a destination stored under a coded dial code, press [Coded Dial], then enter the three-digit code with the numeric keys. For multiple entries, press [Coded Dial] between each entry.

  • You can review the destinations which have been already entered with [] or [].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NAME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Enter the group name (max. 16 letters, including spaces) with the numeric keys, then press [OK].

To register another group, repeat the procedure from step 4.

Ex.

 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Adding New Destination to Group

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <GROUP DIAL>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select a group to edit, then press [OK].

To select a group stored under the coded dial code, press [Coded Dial], then enter the three-digit code using the numeric keys.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SELECT ADD/TEL NO>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Select the destination you want to add to the group, then press [OK].

For details on specifying a destination from Address Book, see "Registering Group Addresses."

 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Deleting Destination from Group

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <GROUP DIAL>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select a group to edit, then press [OK].

To select a group stored under the coded dial code, press [Coded Dial], then enter the three-digit code using the numeric keys.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SELECT ADD/TEL NO>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to display the destination you want to delete from the group, then press [Clear].

Repeat this step if you want to delete another destination.

 
     
  1. Press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Changing Group Name

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <GROUP DIAL>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select a group to edit, then press [OK].

To select a group stored under the coded dial code, press [Coded Dial], then enter the three-digit code using the numeric keys.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NAME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] repeatedly to go back to a wrong character, then press [Clear].

To delete the entire name, press and hold [Clear].

 
     
  1. Enter a new character with the numeric keys, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Deleting Group Addresses

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <GROUP DIAL>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select a group to delete, then press [OK].

To select a group stored under the coded dial code, press [Coded Dial], then enter the three-digit code using the numeric keys.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SELECT ADD/TEL NO>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Clear] repeatedly until all destinations are deleted, then press [OK].
  • When you delete all destinations, the registered name is cleared automatically.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Manual Sending (Fax)

Use manual sending when you want to talk to the recipient before sending a document, or if the recipient does not have a fax machine that can receive automatically.


Remark
  • You cannot use group dialing for manual sending.

 
     
  1. Connect the optional handset to the machine if you want to talk to the recipient before sending a document.

For details on how to connect an optional handset to the machine, see "Install Handset (Optional)."

 
     
  1. Load the document in the ADF.
 
     
  1. Press [Fax/Send] repeatedly to select <FAX>, then press [OK].

If using the LASER CLASS 810, you can switch to the Fax mode by pressing [Copy/Fax].

If you want to adjust the image quality and density, see "Scan Settings."

 
     
  1. Press [Hook] or pick up the optional handset.
 
     
  1. Dial the recipient's fax/telephone number.
  • Make sure to confirm the dial tone before entering a fax number. If you enter the number before the dial tone can be heard, the call may not connect, or the wrong number may be dialed.
 
     
  1. Talk through the handset to the recipient.

If you press [Hook] in step 4, you can pick up the handset when you hear the recipient's voice.

If you hear a high-pitched signal instead of the recipient's voice, go to step 8.

 
     
  1. Ask the recipient to set their fax machine to receive faxes.
 
     
  1. When you hear a high-pitched signal, press [Start], then hang up the handset.

 

 
Canceling TX Jobs

Cancel an ongoing job as follows.


 
     
  1. Press [Stop].
 
     
  1. When the <STOP KEY PRESSED> message appears, press [OK].

Ex.

When the <CANCEL?> message appears, press [] to select <YES>.

Ex.


 

 
Checking and Deleting Jobs (Send)

System monitor enables you to view the transmission results, monitor the status of the send jobs currently being processed.


Checking Transmission Results (Send)

Checking and Deleting Sending Documents Stored in Memory (Send)

 

 
Checking Transmission Results (Send)

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [System Monitor] repeatedly to select <TX/RX LOG>, then press [OK].
  • If you set <CHECKING THE LOG> to <OFF> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, transmission/reception result does not appear in the LCD.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to view the required transmission/reception result.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Checking and Deleting Sending Documents Stored in Memory (Send)

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [System Monitor] repeatedly to select <TX/RX STATUS> then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to scroll through the job list.

If you want to delete the job, go to step 3. Otherwise, press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired document, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CANCEL>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] to select <YES>.

If you do not want to cancel the job, press [] to select <NO>.

 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Basic Receiving Method

Follow this procedure to set the machine for receiving faxes.
For advanced receiving features, see "Send/Receive."


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Select <TX/RX SETTINGS> with [] or [], then press [OK].
    Select <FAX SETTINGS> with [] or [], then press [OK].
    Select <RX MODE> with [] or [], then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Select the receive mode with [] or [], then press [OK].
<FaxOnly>: Answers all calls as faxes.
<FaxTel>: Switches between fax and voice calls automatically if an external telephone is connected to the machine.
<AnsMode>: Receives faxes automatically and records voice messages.
<DRPD>: Distinguishes between fax and voice calls if you want to use an external telephone.
<Manual>: Does not answer any calls. You have to manually receive faxes.

For details on these settings, see "Send/Receive."

  • For <AnsMode>, make sure an answering machine is connected to the machine.
  • For <DRPD>, subscription to a DRPD service is required.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • You press [Stop] to cancel a job:
    The <CANCEL?> message appears. Press [] to select <Yes>. The job is canceled, and the display returns to the standby mode.
  • The <TONER LOW/PREPARE NEW TONER> message appears:
    The toner cartridge is almost empty.
    Replace the toner cartridge. For details on this error message, see "LCD Messages."

 

 
Forwarding Received Documents

You can set the machine to forward received documents to other machines or file servers. If a received document matches the forwarding conditions, it is forwarded to the specified destination. Forwarding settings can be made using the Remote UI.


Remark

When Forwarding Destinations Do Not Match the Forwarding Conditions

Forwarding Documents Received in Memory

Forwarding Documents with Forwarding Errors

Printing or Erasing Documents with Forwarding Errors

 

 
When Forwarding Destinations Do Not Match the Forwarding Conditions

Return to Overview

If a forwarding destination is not registered, or if the received document does not match all of the forwarding conditions that you have specified, you can specify the forwarding destination using the operation panel.


Remark

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FW W/OUT CONDITION>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX> or <IFax>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FORWARD>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Specify the forwarding destination using the one-touch speed dialing key, and press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IMAGE FORMAT>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TIFF (B&W)> or <PDF>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DIVIDE INTO PAGES>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF> , then press [OK].
<OFF>: Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them.
<ON>: Separates multiple images and send them as separate files.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Forwarding Documents Received in Memory

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [System Monitor] repeatedly to select <TX/RX STATUS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired document, then press [OK].
  • You can transfer only the documents received in memory, which appears with the message <RX STNDBY> in the system monitor.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FORWARD>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Specify the destination, then press [OK].

The machine starts to send the selected document.

  • You can specify only one destination registered in a one-touch key or coded dial code.

 

 
Forwarding Documents with Forwarding Errors

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To use this function <STORE TO MEMORY> in <FORWARD ERR. SET> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS> must be set to <ON>.

 
     
  1. Press [System Monitor] repeatedly to select <FORWARD ERR. STATUS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired document, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FORWARD>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Specify the destination, then press [OK].

The machine starts to send the selected document.

  • You can specify only one destination registered in a one-touch key or coded dial code.
  • The document is erased from memory if transferring is successful.

 

 
Printing or Erasing Documents with Forwarding Errors

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [System Monitor] repeatedly to select <FORWARD ERR. STATUS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired document, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINT> or <CANCEL>, then press [OK].
  • If <MEMORY LOCK> is <ON> in <COMMUNICATIONS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, the documents cannot be printed.
 
     
  1. Press [] to select <YES>.

If you do not want to print or erase the job, press [] to select <NO>.

 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Canceling RX Jobs

Cancel an ongoing job as follows.


 
     
  1. Press [Stop].
 
     
  1. When the <CANCEL?> message appears, press [] to select <YES>.


 

 
Checking and Deleting Jobs (Receive)

System monitor enables you to view the reception results, and monitor the status of the receive jobs currently being processed.


Checking Reception Results (Receive)

Checking and Deleting Receiving Documents Stored in Memory (Receive)

 

 
Checking Reception Results (Receive)

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [System Monitor] repeatedly to select <TX/RX LOG>, then press [OK].
  • If you set <CHECKING THE LOG> to <OFF> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, reception result does not appear in the LCD.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to view the required reception result.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Checking and Deleting Receiving Documents Stored in Memory (Receive)

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [System Monitor] repeatedly to select <TX/RX STATUS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to scroll through the job list.

If you want to delete the job, go to step 3. Otherwise, press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired document, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CANCEL>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] to select <YES>.

If you do not want to cancel the job, press [] to select <NO>.

 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
PC Faxing

Follow this procedure to send a fax from your computer.
Make sure that the fax driver is installed. To check if the driver is installed, see "Installing Software."
For details on fax driver settings, see Online Help.


Remark
  • To send faxes from computers on the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.
  • How to display the print screen or items on the screen may vary depending on your application and/or OS.
  • When the TX Document Archiving function is set to .<ON>, faxes cannot be sent on from a computer.
  • Jobs that could not be sent are recorded on the activity report printed every 40 transmissions. (If TX Document Archiving is set to <ON>, the activity report is set to automatically be printed every 40 transmissions.)

 
 
  1. From an open document on an application, click [File] > [Print].


 
 
  1. Select the fax icon ([Canon LC800/L3000 (FAX)]), then click [Print] or [OK].

  • You want to adjust the fax properties:
    Click [Preferences] or [Properties] and adjust the settings.

 
 
  1. Specify the name and fax number in [Sending Settings], then click [Add to Recipient List].

  • You want to send a fax with a cover sheet:
    Click the [Cover Sheet] tab and set the format for the cover sheet attachment.

 
 
  1. Click [OK] in the Fax Sending Settings.


 

 
Advanced Sending Features

The machine provides the following additional fax modes: broadcasting and job recall.


Broadcasting

Delayed Sending

Job Recall/Redial

 

 
Broadcasting

Return to Overview

Broadcasting enables you to send the same document to multiple recipients.


Remark
  • You can send the same original to multiple (a maximum of 201 for the LASER CLASS 810 and 501 for the LASER CLASS 830i) destinations with one operation. (Only one of those destinations can be specified using the numeric keys.)
  • If you frequently send documents to multiple destinations, it is recommended that you store those destinations as a group.
  • When <REST. MULTI DEST.> is set to <PROHIBIT>, you cannot send the documents to multiple recipients. (See "Restricting Broadcasting.")

 
     
  1. Set documents.
 
     
  1. Press [Fax/Send] repeatedly to select the sending method, then press [OK].

If using the LASER CLASS 810, you can switch to the Fax mode by pressing [Copy/Fax].

If you are specifying destinations registered in Address Book, you can skip this step.

 
       
  1. Specify the destination.

Use the numeric keys, one-touch keys, coded dial codes or [Address Book] key to specify destinations.

  • Only one destination can be specified using the numeric keys.
 
       
  1. Repeat step 3 to enter all required recipients.
  • If you want to enter a fax number or e-mail address using the numeric keys in the middle of the procedure, press [Fax/Send], select the sending method, and then enter the number or address.
  • To check all the specified destinations, press [] or [] to scroll the display.
 
     
  1. Press [Start].
  • When <TIME OUT> is set to <ON> in <TX SETTINGS> in <FAX SETTINGS> in <TX/RX SETTINGS>, and if you have specified the destination by any other method than using numeric keys, the machine starts scanning automatically without pressing [Start], after the preset time for this setting is elapsed.

 

 
Delayed Sending

Return to Overview

Delayed sending enables you to start transmission at a specified time.


Remark

 
     
  1. Set documents.
 
     
  1. Press [Fax/Send] repeatedly to select the sending method, then press [OK].

If using the LASER CLASS 810, you can switch to the Fax mode by pressing [Copy/Fax].

 
     
  1. Press [Delayed TX].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the time you want to start sending, then press [OK].

Enter the time in the 24-hour format.

Enter all the numbers, including zeros.

Ex.

 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys, one-touch key, coded dial code, or address book dialing to enter a recipient.
 
     
  1. Press [Start].
  • When <TIME OUT> is set to <ON> in <TX SETTINGS> in <FAX SETTINGS>, the machine starts dialing automatically after the preset time for this setting is passed. However, when you manually enter a recipient, be sure to press [Start].
  • If the specified time for delayed sending passes during a temporary power failure (that recovers within a hour), the fax document will be sent at the specified time on the next day.

 

 
Job Recall/Redial

Return to Overview

You can recall the last three destinations, scan settings, and send settings which have been set, and then send your documents.


Remark
  • With the LASER CLASS 830i, this can be used as a Recall function. With the LASER CLASS 810, this can be used as a Redial function.

 
     
  1. Set documents.
 
     
  1. Press [Fax/Send].

If using the LASER CLASS 810, you can switch to the Fax mode by pressing [Copy/Fax].

 
     
  1. Press [Recall].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <1 BEFORE>, <2 BEFORE>, or <3 BEFORE>, then press [OK].
 
       
  1. Confirm that the desired recipient is displayed.

For information on changing scan settings such as the resolution when using the Recall function, see "Scan Settings."

 
     
  1. Press [Start].
  • When <TIME OUT> is set to <ON> in <TX SETTINGS> in <FAX SETTINGS> in <TX/RX SETTINGS>, and if you have specified the destination by any other method than using numeric keys, the machine starts scanning automatically without pressing [Start], after the preset time for this setting is elapsed.

 

 
Customizing Sending Features

Setting Number of Retry Attempts (E-Mail/I-Fax/File Server) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Setting Automatic Redialing (Fax)

Setting Detail Information (E-Mail/I-Fax/File Server) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

 

 
Setting Number of Retry Attempts (E-Mail/I-Fax/File Server) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview

You can set how many times the machine automatically resends data when the data cannot be sent because the receiver is busy sending or receiving, or when an error occurs.


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX COMMON SET.>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RETRY TIMES>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use [], [], or numeric keys to enter the number of retry attempts (0 to 5 times) the machine will make, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Setting Automatic Redialing (Fax)

Return to Overview

Automatic redialing enables the machine to automatically redial the recipient's fax number if the recipient cannot be reached due to a busy line, or if a sending error occurs. Auto Redial can be turned <ON> or <OFF>. If you set <AUTO REDIAL> to <ON>, you can set how many times the machine redials the number, and the redial interval.


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <AUTO REDIAL>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REDIAL TIMES>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use [], [], or numeric keys to enter the number of redials (1 to 10 times) the machine will make, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REDIAL INTERVAL>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use [], [], or numeric keys to enter the time (2 to 99 minutes, in one-minute increments) between redials, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX ERROR REDIAL>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<ON>: Resends all pages if an error occurs during transmission.
<OFF>: Does not redial even if an error occurs during transmission.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Setting Detail Information (E-Mail/I-Fax/File Server) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview

You can set the document's name, a subject line, message body text, and reply-to address, and e-mail priority common to all sending jobs. The following settings will be effective when sending documents depending on the sending method you select:

  • E-mail: <TX FILE NAME>, <SUBJECT>, <MESSAGE TEXT>, <REPLYTO>, <E-MAIL PRIORITY>
  • File server (SMB): <TX FILE NAME>, <MESSAGE TEXT>
  • USB: <TX FILE NAME>, <MESSAGE TEXT>.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <TX/RX COMMON SET.> is selected, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SEND SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX FILE NAME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the document's name (up to 24 characters), then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SUBJECT>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the subject (up to 40 characters), then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MESSAGE TEXT>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the message body text (up to 140 characters), then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <REPLY-TO> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the reply-to address (up to 120 characters), then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL PRIORITY>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the priority (<NORMAL>, <LOW> or <HIGH>), then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Fax Dialing Features

Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialing

Checking Dialing Line

Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses)

 

 
Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialing

Return to Overview

If your machine is set for pulse dialing, use the procedure below to switch to tone dialing to use information services (e.g., banks, airline reservations, and hotel reservations).


Remark
  • To talk to the other party, you will need to connect an external telephone to the machine.

 
     
  1. Press [Fax/Send].

If using the LASER CLASS 810, you can switch to the Fax mode by pressing [Copy/Fax].

 
     
  1. Press [Fax/Send] repeatedly to select <FAX>, then press [OK].

If using the LASER CLASS 810, you can switch to the Fax mode by pressing [Copy/Fax].

 
     
  1. Press [Hook].
  • Make sure to confirm the dial tone before entering a fax number. If you enter the number before the dial tone can be heard, the call may not be connected, or the wrong number may be dialed.
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to dial the required information service.
 
     
  1. When the recorded message of the information service answers, press [Tone] to switch to tone dialing.
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the numbers requested by the information service.
 
     
  1. If you want to receive faxes, press [Start].

If you are using the external telephone, hang up the handset after pressing [Start].


 

 
Checking Dialing Line

Return to Overview

Checking dialing line function enables you to configure the setting on whether to check for a dial tone.


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Use [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use [] or [] to select <DIALING LINE CHCK>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses)

Return to Overview

When you dial or register an overseas number, you may need to insert a pause within the number.


 
     
  1. Set documents.
 
     
  1. Press [Fax/Send] repeatedly to select <FAX>, then press [OK].

If using the LASER CLASS 810, you can switch to the Fax mode by pressing [Copy/Fax].

 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to dial the international access code.

For details on international access codes, contact your local telephone company.

 
     
  1. If necessary, press [Pause] to insert a pause.

Ex.

The letter <p> is displayed between the numbers.

You can enter successive pauses within the fax number to make the pause time longer.

You can change the length of a pause inserted within the fax number in the <PAUSE TIME> menu. The default setting is two second. (See "TX/RX SETTINGS.")

 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to dial the country code, the area code, and the fax/telephone number of the recipient.
 
     
  1. If necessary, press [Pause] to enter a pause at the end of the number.

The letter <P> appears at the end of the fax number.

Pauses entered at the end of fax numbers are always 10 seconds long.

 
     
  1. Press [Start].
  • When <TIME OUT> is set to <ON> in <TX SETTINGS> in <FAX SETTINGS> in <TX/RX SETTINGS>, and if you have specified the destination by any other method than using numeric keys, the machine starts scanning automatically without pressing [Start], after the preset time for this setting is elapsed.

 

 
Receiving Features

You can set the fax receive mode to suit your needs, set the machine to receive fax documents into memory (memory lock), forward received fax documents to other machines or file servers, and use the external telephone connected to the machine to receive faxes manually (remote reception). You can also set how the received documents are printed.


FaxTel: Optional Settings

DRPD: Optional Settings

Manual Reception

Memory Reception

The machine automatically receives faxes in memory when printing is disabled under certain conditions (e.g., toner or paper has run out).
When the problem is cleared, the machine automatically prints the fax which was stored in the memory.


Remark
  • The main memory of the LASER CLASS 830i can store data for a maximum of 90 jobs or approximately 90 pages.*
    The main memory of the LASER CLASS 810 can store data for a maximum of 90 jobs or approximately 90 pages.*
    * Based on the condition that the other party sends the fax by the LASER CLASS 830i with ITU-T Standard Chart No. 1, standard mode. The maximum number of pages that the machine's memory can store differs depending on the other party's machine.
  • Once the pages are printed, they are deleted from the memory.
  • If the memory becomes full, you will not be able to receive the remaining pages. Contact the other party and ask them to resend the remaining pages of the fax.

Memory Lock Reception

Printing All Documents Stored in Memory


Reception Restriction

Remote Reception

Remote reception enables you to use an external telephone connected to the machine to receive faxes manually. This can be useful when the machine is not nearby or is being used by someone else.


Remark
  • This function is not available when <ENERGY IN SLEEP> in <COMMON SETTINGS> is set to <LOW>.

Registering Remote Reception ID


Receiving a Fax Remotely


Printing Received Documents

The machine provides the following printing features: two-sided printing and received image reduction.


Two-Sided Printing


Received Image Reduction


 

 
FaxTel: Optional Settings

Return to Overview

If required, change the optional settings as follows:


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX/TEL OPT. SET>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RING START TIME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use [], [], or the numeric keys to specify the duration (0 to 30 seconds) for which the machine attempts to detect the fax tone before it starts ringing, then press [OK].

If the machine receives a fax, the machine does not ring and switches to the receive mode automatically.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <F/T RING TIME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use [], [], or the numeric keys to specify the duration (15 to 300 seconds) of ringing, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <F/T SWITCH ACTION>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the action the machine will take after the ringing ends, then press [OK].
<RECEIVE>: Receives a fax.
<DISCONNECT>: Disconnects the call.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
DRPD: Optional Settings

Return to Overview

Select the ring pattern assigned by your telephone company.


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DRPD:SELECT FAX>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select a ring pattern, then press [OK].

<DOUBLE RING>
<SHORT-SHORT-LONG>
<SHORT-LONG-SHORT>
<OTHER RING TYPE>
<NORMAL RING>

 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Manual Reception

Return to Overview

When you select <Manual> in <RX MODE>, follow the procedure below to receive a fax.


 
       
  1. When the telephone rings, pick up the optional handset or the external telephone.
 
     
  1. Confirm that the modem's connecting sound is heard, then press [Start].
  • If you picked up the receiver of an external telephone in step 1, enter the two digit remote reception ID using the numeric keys of the external telephone. (See "Receiving a Fax Remotely.")
 
       
  1. Hang up the optional handset or the external telephone.

 

 
Memory Lock Reception

Return to Overview

You can also set the machine to store all documents in memory without automatically printing them.

You can also forward the documents received in memory to other destinations. (See "Forwarding Documents Received in Memory.)


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMUNICATIONS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MEMORY LOCK>, then press [OK].

If the memory lock password has already been set, enter the password, then press [OK].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  • When you select <OFF>, the machine starts to print the received documents in memory.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PASSWORD>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the memory lock reception password (up to 7 digits), then press [OK].

Ex.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPORT PRINT>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<OFF>: Does not print a RX report.
<ON>: Prints a RX report.
  • <RX REPORT> should also be set to <ON> so that RX reports are automatically printed when documents are received in memory. For instructions, see "RX REPORT."
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MEMORY RX TIME>, then press [OK].

If you do not need to set the timer for memory lock, skip to step 16.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MEM RX START TIME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the start time (in 24-hour format), then press [OK].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MEM. RX END TIME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the end time, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Printing All Documents Stored in Memory

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMUNICATIONS>, then press [OK].

If the memory lock password has already been set, enter the password, then press [OK].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MEMORY LOCK>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the memory lock reception password, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF>, then press [OK].

The received documents are printed.

 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Reception Restriction

Return to Overview

You can reject incoming faxes without sending their numbers in the sender's machine.


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX RESTRICTION>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Registering Remote Reception ID

Return to Overview

Follow this procedure if you want to change the default remote reception ID of 25.


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REMOTE RX>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Clear] twice to delete the default remote reception ID of 25.
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter a new remote reception ID (a combination of two characters using 0 to 9, and #), then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Receiving a Fax Remotely

Return to Overview


 
       
  1. When you receive a call, pick up the external telephone.
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the two-digit remote reception ID to start reception.
  • If the machine is set for pulse dialing, press [Tone] to switch to tone dialing before pressing the remote reception ID.
 
       
  1. When the reception is complete, hang up the telephone.

 

 
Two-Sided Printing

Return to Overview

You can print received documents on both sides of the paper.


Remark
  • You can print the received documents on both sides of the paper only when <PAPER SIZE> is set to <LTR>, <LGL> or <A4>. The received documents are printed on one side of the paper when <PAPER SIZE> is not set to <LTR>, <LGL> or <A4>. (See "Setting Paper Size and Type.")

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX COMMON SET.>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TWO-SIDED PRINT>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Received Image Reduction

Return to Overview

You can print received documents in a reduced size.


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX COMMON SET.>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RECEIVE REDUCTION>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX REDUCTION> or <REDUCE DIRECTION>, then press [OK].

If you select <REDUCE DIRECTION>, skip to step 11.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <AUTO> or <FIXED REDUCTION>, then press [OK].

If you select <AUTO>, adjust the image reduction automatically. Skip to step 10.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select a preset reduction ratio (90%, 95%, 97 %, or 75%), then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REDUCE DIRECTION>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <VERTICAL ONLY> or <HORIZ&VERTICAL>, then press [OK].
<VERTICAL ONLY>: Reduces the document vertically only.
<HORIZ&VERTICAL>: Reduces the document both horizontally and vertically.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Sending Two-Sided Documents

You can set the machine to automatically turn over two-sided documents in the ADF, and scan each side separately.


 
     
  1. Set documents.
 
     
  1. Press [Fax/Send] repeatedly to select <FAX>, then press [OK].

If using the LASER CLASS 810, you can switch to the Fax mode by pressing [Copy/Fax].

 
     
  1. Press [2-Sided].
 
     
  1. Press [2-SIDED] repeatedly to select <2-SIDED BOOK> or <2-SIDED CALENDAR>, then press [OK].
  • If using the LASER CLASS 830i:
When images in documents are set vertically as illustrated on the right, select the desired output.

<2-SIDED BOOK>: Select if images on the back side of a document have the same top-bottom orientations as the front side of the document.
<2-SIDED CALENDAR>: Select if images on the front and back sides of a document have opposite orientations.
  • When images on 11x17 landscape documents are orientated horizontally, select <2-SIDED BOOK> if the images on the front and back sides of a document have opposite orientations. Select <2-SIDED CALENDAR> if images on the front and back sides of a document have the same orientations.
  • If using the LASER CLASS 810:
When images in documents are set horizontally as illustrated on the right, select the desired output.

<2-SIDED BOOK>: Select if images on the back side of the document have the same top-bottom orientation as the front side of the document.
<2-SIDED CALENDAR>: Select if images on the front and back side of the document have opposite top-bottom orientations.
  • For landscape documents, such as LTRR documents, with an image set vertically, the images on the front and back sides of the document will have opposite top-bottom orientations when <2-SIDED BOOK> is selected. When <2-SIDED CALENDAR> is selected, the front and back sides of the document will have the same top-bottom orientations.
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys, one-touch key, [Coded Dial], or address book dialing to enter a recipient.
 
     
  1. Press [Start].

To cancel all settings and return to standby mode, press [Stop].

  • When <TIME OUT> is set to <ON> in <TX SETTINGS> in <FAX SETTINGS>, the machine starts dialing automatically after the preset time for this setting is passed. However, when you manually enter a recipient, be sure to press [Start].
  • If the specified time for delayed sending passes during a temporary power failure (that recovers within a hour), the fax document will be sent at the specified time on the next day.

 

 
Direct Sending

With direct sending, the machine sends the document on the ADF as it scans one page, without storing all pages into memory at once. You can send a document ahead of other documents stored in memory.


Remark
  • You cannot use group dialing for direct sending.
  • With direct sending, the machine scans one page into memory at once and sends it right away. Therefore, when <MEMORY FULL> is displayed, even if you have selected direct sending, wait until there is enough space in memory to scan one page, or delete the documents in memory, and try again.
  • You cannot use direct sending for e-mail, I-faxs, or sending to a file server.

 
     
  1. Load the document in the ADF.
 
     
  1. Press [Fax/Send].

If using the LASER CLASS 810, you can switch to the Fax mode by pressing [Copy/Fax].

 
     
  1. Press [Direct TX].

To cancel direct sending, press [Direct TX] again.

 
       
  1. Adjust any necessary settings for your document.

For details, see "Scan Settings."

 
       
  1. Dial the recipient's fax/telephone number.

If you select delayed transmission or sequential broadcasting, memory sending is automatically selected.

 
     
  1. Press [Start].

Each page is sent as it is scanned.

  • During transmission, <TRANSMITTING...> and the recipient's fax/telephone number alternately appear as messages on the LCD display.

 

 
TX Document Archiving

This function sends a copy of the documents that are sent from this machine to another destination (fax number, e-mail/I-fax address, and file server) for archiving.
This feature allows you to make sure that delayed transmission worked properly, and allows for notification of faxes sent from the machine while you are home or at another work site.
Set the destination to use for TX Document Archiving in < FW W/OUT CNDITION > in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>. (→When Forwarding Destinations Do Not Match the Forwarding Conditions)


Remark
  • If you are using the LASER CLASS 830i, you can specify a fax number, e-mail/I-fax address, or file server as the destination.
  • If an I-FAX machine is set as the destination for TX Document Archiving, if the resolution of the original document sent is 150 x 150 dpi, this resolution is changed to 200 x 200 dpi.

Before You Set Up the TX Document Archiving

Turning the TX Document Archiving ON

 

 
Before You Set Up the TX Document Archiving

Return to Overview

Note these important points before you set up the TX Document Archiving.

  • The following types of documents are supported by TX Document Archiving:
  • LASER CLASS 810: Fax
  • LASER CLASS 830i: Fax, I-fax
  • The sending method, sending speed, and ECM (Error Correction Mode) settings specified for the destination set in <FW W/OUT CNDITION> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, also apply when sending for TX Document Archiving.
  • TX Document Archiving only works for memory sending and black-and-white sending (including Relay Broadcasting).
  • TX Document Archiving does not support the following sending methods: Direct sending and Transferring.
  • While the TX Document Archiving feature is enabled, the Direct TX LED is off and you cannot use Direct sending. If Direct sending is required, the document must be sent manually.
  • When the TX Document Archiving function is set to <ON>, faxes cannot be sent from a computer.

Remark
  • Jobs that could not be sent are recorded on the activity report printed every 40 transmissions. (If TX Document Archiving is set to <ON>, the activity report is set to automatically be printed every 40 transmissions.)
  • If the original I-FAX transmission is not sent at a resolution supported by faxes (150 x 150 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi, or 600 x 600 dpi), the resolution is changed to 200 x 200 dpi if a fax machine is set as the destination for TX Document Archiving.

 

 
Turning the TX Document Archiving ON

Return to Overview

Follow this procedure to turn TX Document Archiving 'ON'.


Remark

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMUNICATIONS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX DOC. ARCHIVING>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • TX Document Archiving will be performed once for each document transmitted. Regarding the redialing, it works based on the settings of this machine. (See "Setting Automatic Redialing (Fax).")
  • When using sequential broadcasting, after all transmissions (including redialing or error redialing) finish, if there is at least one destination to which all pages were sent successfully, then TX Document Archiving will be performed once.
  • In the Activity Management Report, regarding the Mode field (Transaction Mode), "TRANSFER" will be printed and regarding the NO. field (Transaction Number), the number of the original sending destination will be printed.
  • Regarding the DATE and TIME of the TX Document Archiving on the sender information, the DATE and TIME that the TX Document Archiving was performed will be printed.

 

 
Setting Up and Using the Optional Stamp Feature

If the optional stamp feature is provided on your machine, you can set the machine to stamp the front, lower center of every page you scan for sending.


Setting Up the Stamp Action

Turning the Stamp Feature ON/OFF

 

 
Setting Up the Stamp Action

Return to Overview

Follow this procedure to set up the stamp action when the stamp feature is turned ON.


Remark
  • If you are using the LASER CLASS 830i, this setting is enabled when sending to a fax, I-fax, e-mail, or file server destination.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <STAMP DOCUMENT>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DIRECT TX> or <DIRECT&MEMORY TX>, then press [OK].
<DIRECT TX>: Stamps only documents you scan for direct sending.
<DIRECT&MEMORY TX>: Stamps all documents you scan for direct and memory sending.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Turning the Stamp Feature ON/OFF

Return to Overview

You can press [Stamp] to stamp originals when sending or scanning them. The originals are stamped according to the stamping conditions you set. (See "Setting Up the Stamp Action.")


 
     
  1. Set documents.
 
     
  1. Press [Fax/Send] repeatedly to select the sending method, then press [OK].

If using the LASER CLASS 810, you can switch to the Fax mode by pressing [Copy/Fax].

 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys, one-touch speed dialing key, coded speed dialing code, or address book dialing to enter a recipient.
 
     
  1. Press [Stamp].
 
     
  1. Press [Start].

 

 
System Requirements (PC Faxing)

The fax driver can be used in the following system environments:

  • Operating System Software
  • Microsoft Windows 98
  • Microsoft Windows Me
  • Microsoft Windows 2000
  • Microsoft Windows XP
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2003 (32 bit)
  • Microsoft Windows Vista
  • With a Server-Based Computing Environment
  • Compatible Windows Terminal Server (Service)
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2003
  • Compatible Software
  • Citrix MetaFrame XP
  • Citrix MetaFrame 1.8
  • Citrix MetaFrame Presentation Server 3.0
  • Citrix Presentation Server 4.0
  • Computer

Any computer which runs the above operating system software properly


Remark
  • To send faxes from computers on the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 

 
Where to Find Help (PC Faxing)

Here is where to get immediate help if you are having problems installing or using the fax driver.


Remark
  • To send faxes from computers on the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

  • README. TXT file

Any hints, enhancements, limitations, and restrictions you need to be aware of when installing and using your fax driver are included in the README.TXT file provided with the driver. This file is located in \FAX\us_eng.

  • Online Help

You can locate additional help for questions you may have regarding your fax in the Online Help file provided with the driver. In the fax properties dialog box, you can click [Help] to display additional information about every feature and option in the fax driver. For Windows 98/Me, you can also click [] (Help) in the upper right corner of most dialog boxes, and then click a specific item in the dialog box for help on that item.

  • Canon Authorized Dealers or Service Providers

If the Online Help file does not provide the information you need, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or service provider.


 

 
Faxing a Document (PC Faxing)

This section describes how to fax a document and how to send a document to the memory box of the recipient's fax.


Remark
  • To send faxes from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

Sending a Document

 

 
Sending a Document

Return to Overview

To send a document by fax, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • To send faxes from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. In application software, with the document open, select [Print].

 
 
  1. In the [Print] dialog box, select your fax from [Name] → click [Properties].

The fax properties dialog box opens.

  • Some application software may have a different method with which to select a fax driver.

 
 
  1. Specify the various settings in the [Edit Address Book], [Register Cover Sheet], and [Special] sheets → click [OK].


 
 
  1. Click [OK] in the [Print] dialog box.

The [Fax Sending Settings] dialog box opens.


 
 
  1. In the [Sending Settings] sheet, specify the name and fax number of the fax recipient → click [Add to Recipient List].


 
 
  1. Click the [Cover Sheet] tab → specify a format for the cover sheet attachment.


 
 
  1. Click [OK] in the fax properties dialog box.

The fax is sent to the specified recipient(s).


 

 
Specifying Recipients (PC Faxing)

You can specify the names and fax numbers of people you want to send a fax to, by adding them to [Recipient List]. You can add recipients by:

  • Entering a new name and a new fax number in [Recipient Name] and [Fax Number].
  • Selecting a recipient in the [Select Recipient from Address Book] dialog box.

Remark
  • For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, you can use or edit the Address Book only if you are permitted access to the folder where the Address Book file is saved (by default, Power Users and higher have access to the folder). If you are not permitted access to the folder, you can use the Address Book in one of the following ways:
    Log on as a user who has access to the folder.
    Click [Specify a Folder] in the [Edit Address Book] sheet, and save the Address Book file in a folder, such as the My Documents folder, where you have Write permission.
  • To send faxes from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

Adding a New Name and Fax Number

Adding a Recipient from the Address Book

 

 
Adding a New Name and Fax Number

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To send faxes from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. From the [Fax Sending Settings] dialog box, display the [Sending Settings] sheet.

For details on how to access the [Fax Sending Settings] dialog box, see "Sending a Document."


 
 
  1. Enter the name and fax number you want to add in [Recipient Name] and [Fax Number].

 
 
  1. Click [Add to Recipient List].

The new recipient is displayed in [Recipient List].


 

 
Adding a Recipient from the Address Book

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To send faxes from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. From the [Fax Sending Settings] dialog box, display the [Sending Settings] sheet.

For details on how to access the [Fax Sending Settings] dialog box, see "Sending a Document."


 
 
  1. Click [Address Book].

The [Select Recipient from Address Book] dialog box opens.


 
 
  1. Select the address book you want to use from [Address Books].

 
 
  1. Select an entry → click [Add to List].

 
 
  1. Click [OK] in the [Select Recipient from Address Book] dialog box.

The new recipient is displayed in [Recipient List] in the [Sending Settings] sheet.


 

 
Defining Address Book Entries (PC Faxing)

This section describes instructions for defining person and group entries in the [Edit Address Book] sheet.


Remark
  • For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, you can use or edit the Address Book only if you are permitted access to the folder where the Address Book file is saved (by default, Power Users and higher have access to the folder). If you are not permitted access to the folder, you can use the Address Book in one of the following ways:
    Log on as a user who has access to the folder.
    Click [Specify a Folder] in the [Edit Address Book] sheet, and save the Address Book file in a folder, such as the My Documents folder, where you have Write permission.
  • To send faxes from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

Person (Single) Entry

Clicking [Add Person] in the [Edit Address Book] sheet opens the [Add Person] dialog box for defining a new person (single) entry. You see the same dialog box under the title [Edit Person], if you click [Edit] in the [Edit Address Book] sheet when a person (single) entry is selected from [Address Book]. The [Edit Person] dialog box enables you to change information on an existing person (single) entry.


Person (Single) Entry (New Entry)


Person (Single) Entry (Edit Entry)


Person (Single) Entry (Delete Entry)


Group Entry

Clicking [Add Group] in the [Edit Address Book] sheet opens the [Add Group] dialog box for defining a new group. A group can contain both persons and other groups. You see the same dialog box under the title [Edit Group], if you click [Edit] in the [Edit Address Book] sheet when a group entry is selected from Address Book.

The [Edit Group] dialog box enables you to change information on an existing group entry.


Group Entry (New Group)


Group Entry (Edit Group)


Group Entry (Delete Group)


 

 
Person (Single) Entry (New Entry)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To send faxes from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. From the fax properties dialog box, display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

For details on how to access the fax properties dialog box, see "Sending a Document."


 
 
  1. Click [Add Person].

The [Add Person] dialog box opens.


 
 
  1. Enter information about the new person, such as [Recipient Name] and [Company].

 
 
  1. Enter the fax number.

You can enter two fax numbers: a primary number and a secondary number.


 
 
  1. Enter information about the fax numbers in each respective [Description].

 

 
Person (Single) Entry (Edit Entry)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To send faxes from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. From the fax properties dialog box, display the [Edit Address Book] sheet → select [Person] from [Show].

For details on how to access the fax properties dialog box, see "Sending a Document."

All person (single) entries are displayed in [Address Book].


 
 
  1. Select the person you want to edit → click [Edit].

The [Edit Person] dialog box opens.


 
 
  1. Update the information if necessary.

 
 
  1. Click [OK] to modify the selected person (single) entry.

 

 
Person (Single) Entry (Delete Entry)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To send faxes from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
       
  1. Select the person (single) entry you want to delete from [Address Book].
 
       
  1. Click [Delete].

 

 
Group Entry (New Group)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To send faxes from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. From the fax properties dialog box, display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

For details on how to access the fax properties dialog box, see "Sending a Document."


 
 
  1. Click [Add Group].

The [Add Group] dialog box opens.


 
 
  1. Enter the new group name.

 
 
  1. Select persons or groups as members of the new group from [Available Recipients] → click [Add].

If you want to add a group to the new group, select [Group] or [All] from [Show] to view group entries.

To remove an entry from [Current Group Members], select it → click [Delete].

  • You can select multiple entries by holding down [SHIFT] or [CTRL] on the keyboard and clicking each entry that you want to select.

 
 
  1. Click [OK] to create the new group entry.

 

 
Group Entry (Edit Group)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To send faxes from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. From the fax properties dialog box, display the [Edit Address Book] sheet → select [Group] from [Show].

For details on how to access the fax properties dialog box, see "Sending a Document."

To view all person (single) and group entries, select [All] from [Show].

All group entries are displayed in [Address Book].


 
 
  1. Select the group you want to edit → click [Edit].

The [Edit Group] dialog box opens.


 
 
  1. Change the group name if necessary.

 
 
  1. Edit the group.
  • You can select multiple entries by holding down [SHIFT] or [CTRL] on the keyboard and clicking each entry that you want to select.

 
  • Select the person or group you want to add from [Available Recipients].
 
  • Click [Add].

 
  • Select the person or group you want to remove from [Current Group Members].
 
  • Click [Delete].

 
 
  1. Click [OK] to modify the selected group entry.

 

 
Group Entry (Delete Group)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To send faxes from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
       
  1. Select the group entry you want to delete from [Address Book].
 
       
  1. Click [Delete].

 

 
Registering Additional Address Books (PC Faxing)

You can select fax recipients from address books other than the Canon Fax Driver Address Book if they are registered with the fax driver. Follow the procedure below to register the address books you want to use.


Remark
  • You can register the Messaging API Address Book and the Windows Address Book.
  • To send faxes from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. From the fax properties dialog box, click the [Special] tab.

For details on how to access the fax properties dialog box, see "Sending a Document."


 
 
  1. Click [Address Books].

The [Address Books] dialog box opens.


 
 
  1. Click [Register].

The [Register Address Book] dialog box opens.


 
 
  1. Select the address book you want to register from [Available Address Books] → click [OK].

The dialog box corresponding to the selected address book opens.


 
 
  1. Specify the required settings in the dialog box.

For detailed information about an item in the dialog box, see the Online Help.
For Windows 98/Me, click [] (Help) → click the relevant item in the dialog box.
For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, click [Help] → click the relevant item in the right pane of the Help window.


 
 
  1. Click [OK] in the dialog box.

The registered address book is added to [Address Book List] in the [Address Books] dialog box.


 
 
  1. Click [OK] in the [Address Books] dialog box.

 

 
Attaching a Cover Sheet to a Fax (PC Faxing)

This section describes instructions for attaching a cover sheet to an outgoing fax.


Remark
  • To send faxes from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. From the [Fax Sending Settings] dialog box, click the [Cover Sheet] tab.

For details on how to access the [Fax Sending Settings] dialog box, see "Sending a Document."


 
 
  1. Select an option for attaching the cover sheet to the fax from [Cover Sheet Attachment].

 
 
  1. Select a cover sheet template from [Style].

 
 
  1. Click [Settings] to specify the items to include on the cover sheet.

The [Item Settings] dialog box opens.


 
 
  1. Display the [Sender] sheet → select check boxes according to the information you want to print on the cover sheet → enter the information in the text boxes for the selected items.

You can select the following check boxes:
[Include Sender Name]
[Include Company]
[Include Dept./Div.]
[Include Fax Number]

  • You can save the information entered in the [Sender] sheet in a file by clicking [Save Sender]. Then, when you send a fax, you can import the information by using [Import Sender], instead of entering the sender information each time you send a fax.

 
 
  1. Click the [Recipient] tab → select check boxes according to the information you want to print on the cover sheet.

You can select the following check boxes:
[Include Recipient Name]
[Include Company]
[Include Dept./Div.]
[Include Fax Number]

  • The information of the recipients specified in the [Sending Settings] sheet prints on the cover sheet.

 
 
  1. Click the [Logo] or [Signature] tab.


 
 
  1. Select [Print with Logo] or [Print with Signature] to include a logo or signature on the cover sheet.

 
 
  1. Click [Browse] → select a bitmap logo or signature file name in [File Name].

 
 
  1. Specify the magnification and position of the selected logo or signature.

 
 
  1. Click the [Sheets to Send] tab → select [Include Number of Sheets to Send] → enter the number of sheets you are going to send as a fax.


 
 
  1. Click [OK] in the [Item Settings] dialog box.

 
 
  1. Select [Insert Attention Note] → select a note from [Attention Note] or enter a note.

 
 
  1. Enter any other information you want to include on the cover sheet in [Comment to Include].

 
 
  1. Click [Preview] if you want to check the preview image on the cover sheet.

 
 
  1. Click [OK].

The specified cover sheet is attached to the fax when the fax is sent.


 

 
Print

Printing Instructions

To use this function, an optional network printer kit is required. (A network printer kit is standard-equipped for the LASER CLASS 830i.)


 

 
System Requirements

The printer driver can be used in the following system environments:


  • Operating System Software
  • Microsoft Windows 98
  • Microsoft Windows Me
  • Microsoft Windows 2000
  • Microsoft Windows XP
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2003 (32 bit)
  • Microsoft Windows Vista

  • With a Server-Based Computing Environment
  • Compatible Windows Terminal Server (Service)
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2003
  • Compatible Software
  • Citrix MetaFrame XP
  • Citrix MetaFrame 1.8
  • Citrix MetaFrame Presentation Server 3.0
  • Citrix Presentation Server 4.0
  • Compatible Microsoft Cluster Server (MSCS)
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition

  • Computer

Any computer which runs the above operating system software properly


Remark
  • The UFR II printer driver is available only for Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Vista. No other operating systems are supported.
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 

 
Printing Documents

Follow this procedure to print a document from your computer.

Make sure that the printer driver is installed. To check if the driver is installed, see "Installing Software."

For details on printer driver settings, see the Online Help.


Remark
  • To print a document from a computer on the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.
  • How to display the print screen or items on the screen may vary depending on your application and/or OS.

 
 
  1. From an open document on an application, click [File] > [Print].


 
 
  1. Select the printer icon for the machine ([Canon LC800/L3000 UFRII LT], [Canon LC800/L3000 PCL5e], [Canon LC800/L3000 PCL6]), then click [Preferences] or [Properties] to open the dialog box.


 
 
  1. After finished setting, click [OK].


 
 
  1. Click [Print] or [OK].


 

 
Checking and Deleting Print Jobs

System monitor enables you to monitor the status of the print jobs currently being processed.


Remark
  • Make sure that the Processing/Data indicator is turned on. When the Processing/Data indicator is turned off, all print jobs are erased from the memory.
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
     
  1. Press [System Monitor] repeatedly to select <PRINT STATUS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to scroll through the job list, and check the status of the print jobs.

If you want to delete the job, go to step 3. Otherwise, press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired job, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CANCEL>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] to select <YES>.

If you do not want to cancel the job, press [] to select <NO>.

 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Where to Find Help

Here is where to get immediate help if you are having problems installing or using the printer driver.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.
  • README.TXT file

Any hints, enhancements, limitations, and restrictions you need to be aware of when installing and using your printer driver are included in the README.TXT file provided with the driver. The README.TXT file is located in ¥UFRII¥us_eng.

  • Online Help

You can locate additional help for questions you may have regarding your printer in the Online Help provided with the driver. In the printer properties dialog box, you can click [Help] to display additional information about every feature and option in the UFR II printer driver. For Windows 98/Me, you can also click [] (Help) in the upper right corner of most dialog boxes, and then click a specific item in the dialog box for help with that item. See the Online Help for the detailed information on specifying UFR II options.

  • Canon Authorized Dealers or Service Providers

If the Online Help does not provide the information you need, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or service provider.


 

 
Setting Up the Printer Configuration

In order to use the functions of an optional unit attached to the printer, you need to specify the paper source options, output options, and other options in the printer driver, by setting up the printer configuration.

The printer configuration can be set up automatically while installing the driver, depending on the port selected for the machine. If the machine cannot be configured during the installation, follow the procedure below. There are two methods for setting up the printer configuration: automatic and manual.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

Configuring Automatically

Configuring Manually

 

 
Configuring Automatically

Return to Overview

If your printer is connected to a network, you can set up the printer configuration automatically.


Remark
  • If you are using a shared printer in the Print Server (Point and Print) environment, it is necessary to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service in the server PC in order to set up the printer configuration automatically (see "When Installing the Canon Driver Information Assist Service.")
  • If you are using a local printer (connected to an LPT port, USB port, etc.), you cannot set up the printer configuration automatically.
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings] → click [Printers].
  • If you are using Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, on the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows XP Home Edition, on the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows Vista, on the [] (Start) menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers].

 
 
  1. In the [Printers] folder, right-click the printer icon for your printer → click [Properties].


 
 
  1. In the printer properties dialog box, click the [Configuration] tab (Windows 98/Me) or [Device Settings] tab (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista).

The [Configuration] sheet (Windows 98/Me) or [Device Settings] sheet (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista) is displayed.


 
 
  1. Click [Get Device Status].

The detected information is displayed in the [Configuration] sheet (Windows 98/Me) or [Device Settings] sheet (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista).


 
 
  1. Click [Yes] in the message box.

 
 
  1. Click [OK].

If no information is detected, proceed to "Configuring Manually."


 

 
Configuring Manually

Return to Overview

If you cannot set up the configuration automatically, specify the options manually in the [Configuration] sheet (Windows 98/Me) or [Device Settings] sheet (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista).


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings] → click [Printers].
  • If you are using Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, on the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows XP Home Edition, on the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows Vista, on the [] (Start) menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers].

 
 
  1. In the [Printers] folder, right-click the printer icon for your printer → click [Properties].


 
 
  1. In the printer properties dialog box, click the [Configuration] tab (Windows 98/Me) or [Device Settings] tab (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista).

The [Configuration] sheet (Windows 98/Me) or [Device Settings] sheet (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista) is displayed.


 
 
  1. Specify the paper source, output, and other options installed in the printer manually.

 
 
  1. Click [OK].

 

 
Printing a Document

To print a document, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
       
  1. In the application software, with the document open, select [Print] to print your document.
 
       
  1. In the [Print] dialog box, select your printer from [Name] → click [Properties].

The printer properties dialog box opens.

 
       
  1. Specify the various print settings in the printer properties dialog box. To switch between sheets, click the tabs for the [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source], and [Quality] sheets.

You can also specify the various print settings by selecting a profile.

  • For more information on using the print options, see the Online Help.
 
       
  1. After all the print settings are specified, click [OK] in the printer properties dialog box.
 
       
  1. Click [OK] in the [Print] dialog box.

The document is printed under the settings you specified.


 

 
Accessing the Printer Properties Dialog Box

The printer properties dialog box of the printer driver contains many settings that enable you to set up and control your printer. The available settings vary depending on how you access the printer properties dialog box.

In the printer properties dialog box and the printing preferences dialog box, you can specify the printer driver settings and set up the printer configuration.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

  • Windows 98/Me

If you access the printer properties dialog box from application software, the specified settings are available for the current print job.

If you access the printer properties dialog box from the [Printers] folder, you can set up the printer configuration or specify the default printer driver settings for every print job.


Accessing the Printer Properties Dialog Box from Application Software (Windows 98/Me)

Accessing the Printer Properties Dialog Box from the Printers Folder(Windows 98/Me)

  • Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista

You can access the printer properties dialog box and the printing preferences dialog box in Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista.

In the printer properties dialog box and the printing preferences dialog box, you can specify the printer driver settings and set up the printer configuration.


Accessing the Printer Properties Dialog Box from Application Software (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista)

Accessing the Printing Preferences Dialog Box from the Printers Folder (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista)

Accessing the Printer Properties Dialog Box from the Printers Folder (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista)

 

 
Accessing the Printer Properties Dialog Box from Application Software (Windows 98/Me)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. In the application software, select [Print] to display the [Print] dialog box.

 
 
  1. Select your printer name from the drop-down list box → click [Properties].


 

 
Accessing the Printer Properties Dialog Box from the Printers Folder (Windows 98/Me)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
       
  1. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings] → click [Printers].
 
       
  1. In the [Printers] folder, right-click the printer icon for your printer → click [Properties].

 

 
Accessing the Printer Properties Dialog Box from Application Software (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista)

Return to Overview

If you access the printer properties dialog box from application software, the specified settings are available for the current print job.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. In the application software, select [Print] to display the [Print] dialog box.

 
 
  1. Select your printer from the drop-down list box → click [Properties].


 

 
Accessing the Printing Preferences Dialog Box from the Printers Folder (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista)

Return to Overview

If you access the printing preferences dialog box from the [Printers] folder, you can specify the default printer driver settings for every print job.


Remark
  • To access the printing preferences dialog box from the [Printers] folder, you need to be assigned Full Control Permission for the printer.
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings] → click [Printers].
  • If you are using Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, on the [Start] menu, [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows XP Home Edition, on the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows Vista, on the [] (Start) menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers].

 
 
  1. In the [Printers] folder, right-click the printer icon for your printer → click [Printing Preferences].


 

 
Accessing the Printer Properties Dialog Box from the Printers Folder (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista)

Return to Overview

You can set up the printer configuration in the printer properties dialog box.

There are additional options (reflected in additional tabs/sheets) if you are accessing the printer properties dialog box from the [Printers] folder. This method should be used when setting the configuration for the first time.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings] → click [Printers].
  • If you are using Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, on the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows XP Home Edition, on the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows Vista, on the [] (Start) menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers].

 
 
  1. In the [Printers] folder, right-click the printer icon for your printer → click [Properties].


 

 
Using Profiles for Printing

This section describes what a profile is, how to select a profile, and how to add or edit profiles.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

What Is a Profile?

Various printer driver settings are saved as profiles. You can also save printer driver settings that you frequently use as profiles. If you select a profile, the document is printed with the saved settings.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

Selecting a Profile for Printing

Adding or Editing Profiles

Adding or Editing Profiles in the Profile Sheet (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista)

 

 
Selecting a Profile for Printing

Return to Overview

If you select a profile, the document is printed with the settings of the selected profile.


Remark
  • For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, you can select a profile only if [Allow Profile Selection] is selected in the [Profile] sheet in the printer properties dialog box.
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
       
  1. From the printer properties dialog box, display either the [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source], or [Quality] sheets.
 
       
  1. Select the profile you want from [Profile].
 
       
  1. Click [OK].

 

 
Adding or Editing Profiles

Return to Overview

You can add your own profiles, or edit the names, icons, or comments of the customized profiles. To add or edit profiles, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, this option is available if [Allow Setting Edition] is selected in the [Profile] sheet in the printer properties dialog box.
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. From the printer properties dialog box, specify the printer driver settings for the customized profile in the [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source], and [Quality] sheets.

 
 
  1. Click [] (Add Profile) or [] (Edit Profile) at the right of [Profile].

The [Add Profile] or [Edit Profile] dialog box opens.


 
 
  1. Specify the name, icon, and a comment of the profile → click [OK].

 

 
Adding or Editing Profiles in the Profile Sheet (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista)

Return to Overview

Profiles specified in the printer properties dialog box that is opened from the [Printers] folder can be accessed and used by all the clients connected to the server.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings] → click [Printers].
  • If you are using Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, on the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows XP Home Edition, on the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows Vista, on the [] (Start) menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers].

 
 
  1. In the [Printers] folder, right-click the printer icon for your printer → click [Properties].

 
 
  1. In the printer properties dialog box, click the [Profile] tab.

The [Profile] sheet is displayed.


 
 
  1. Click [Add] or [Edit].

The [Add/Edit Profile] dialog box opens.


 
 
  1. Specify the settings for the profile in the [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source], and [Quality] sheets.

 
 
  1. Display the [Attribution] sheet.

 
 
  1. Specify the name, icon, and a comment of the profile click [OK].

 

 
Scaling a Document

There are two methods for scaling a document: select the output size of the document to scale it automatically, or specify the scaling value manually.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

Scaling a Document Automatically

Scaling a Document Manually

 

 
Scaling a Document Automatically

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. From the printer properties dialog box, display the [Page Setup] sheet.


 
 
  1. Select the page size from [Page Size].

If this driver setting is inaccessible from the application software, click [Printer Settings] or [Page Settings] (depending on the application software) on the [File] menu to specify the page size.


 
 
  1. Select the actual paper size to print on from [Output Size].

 
 
  1. Click [OK].

The scaling is set automatically according to the sizes specified in [Page Size] and [Output Size].

  • If the value is less than 25% or more than 200%, the document is printed without scaling on the paper specified in [Output Size].

 

 
Scaling a Document Manually

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. From the printer properties dialog box, display the [Page Setup] sheet.


 
 
  1. Select the page size from [Page Size].

If this driver setting is inaccessible from the application software, click [Printer Settings] or [Page Settings] (depending on the application software) on the [File] menu to specify the page size.


 
 
  1. Select the actual paper size to print on from [Output Size].

 
 
  1. Select [Manual Scaling] → specify the desired scaling value from 25% to 200%.

 
 
  1. Click [OK].

 

 
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet

Multiple pages can be printed on one sheet of paper. The number of document pages which can be printed on one sheet of paper is 2, 4, 6, 8, 9, or 16.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. From the printer properties dialog box, display the [Page Setup] sheet.


 
 
  1. Select the required page layout from [Page Layout].

 
 
  1. Select the required page order layout from [Page Order].


 
 
  1. Click [OK].

 

 
Two-Sided Printing

Two-sided printing prints a document on both sides of the paper.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. From the printer properties dialog box, click the [Finishing] tab.


 
 
  1. Select [2-sided Printing] from [Print Style].

 
 
  1. Select the required binding edge for the paper printout from [Binding Location].

If the [Binding Location] option is selected, the document and margins are positioned correctly on the pages for two-sided printing.


 
 
  1. If you want to set the gutter width, click [Gutter] to open the [Gutter Settings] dialog box → specify the value in [Gutter] → click [OK].

If you do not set the gutter width, proceed to step 5.


 
 
  1. Click [OK] in the [Finishing] sheet.

 

 
Specifying the Finishing Options

This section describes how to select a finishing option and how to use Booklet Printing.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

Selecting a Finishing Option

The various options in the [Finishing] sheet enable you to select the most appropriate tray or bin output method for each document.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

Selecting the Output Option


Booklet Printing

 

 
Selecting the Output Option

Return to Overview

The available output options are:

Off Outputs the printed document without any finishing.
Collate Outputs sorted copies of the document in correct binding order into the output tray.
Group Outputs document pages in groups into the output tray.


Remark
  • When a collate option is available in the [Print] dialog box of the application software, the Collate option setting of the printer driver has priority, regardless of the same setting in the application software. However, in some application software, output is collated when the collate option is selected in the application software even if the Collate option is not selected in the printer driver.
  • To output document pages using the Group option, you must select [Group] in the printer driver, regardless of a group option setting in the [Print] dialog box of the application software.
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. From the printer properties dialog box, display the [Page Setup] sheet.


 
 
  1. Specify the number of copies to print in [Copies].

 
 
  1. Click the [Finishing] tab.


 
 
  1. Select a finishing option, such as [Collate], [Group], under [Finishing] sheet.

 
 
  1. Click [OK] in the [Finishing] sheet.

 

 
Booklet Printing

Return to Overview

Booklet Printing enables you to print the pages of a document as a booklet.


Remark
  • Under Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/ Vista, Booklet Printing is not available if [Disabled] is selected for [Spooling at Host] in the [Device Settings] sheet.
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. From the printer properties dialog box, click the [Finishing] tab.


 
 
  1. Select [Booklet Printing] from [Print Style].

 
 
  1. Click [Booklet].

The [Detailed Settings for Booklet] dialog box opens.


 
 
  1. Specify the detailed settings → click [OK].

 
 
  1. Click [OK] in the [Finishing] sheet.

 

 
Specifying the Paper Source

The [Paper Source] sheet enables you to specify the settings for the paper source.

The type of paper and loading method can be set under [Paper Selection].

Use the Paper Selection setting to specify whether to print all the pages from one paper source or to print the pages from different paper sources.


Remark
  • You can also specify whether the paper loading method is according to paper source or paper type. To specify the paper loading method, select [Paper Source] or [Paper Type] under [Select by] in the [Paper Source] sheet.
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

Printing All the Pages from the Same Paper Source

Printing the First, Body, and Last Pages from Different Paper Sources

Printing the First, Second, Body, and Last Pages from Different Paper Sources

Printing the Cover and Body Pages of a Booklet from Different Paper Sources

Printing on Transparencies

 

 
Printing All the Pages from the Same Paper Source

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. From the printer properties dialog box, click the [Paper Source] tab.

 
 
  1. Select [Same Paper for All Pages] from [Paper Selection].


 
 
  1. Select the paper source required from [Paper Source].

 
 
  1. Click [OK].

 

 
Printing the First, Body, and Last Pages from Different Paper Sources

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. From the printer properties dialog box, click the [Paper Source] tab.

 
 
  1. Select [Different for First, Others, and Last] from [Paper Selection].


 
 
  1. Select the paper sources required for the first, body, and last pages from [First Page], [Other Pages], and [Last Page].

 
 
  1. Click [OK].

 

 
Printing the First, Second, Body, and Last Pages from Different Paper Sources

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. From the printer properties dialog box, click the [Paper Source] tab.

 
 
  1. Select [Different for First, Second, Others, and Last] from [Paper Selection].


 
 
  1. Select the paper sources required for the first, second, body, and last pages from [First Page], [Second Page], [Other Pages], and [Last Page].

 
 
  1. Click [OK].

 

 
Printing the Cover and Body Pages of a Booklet from Different Paper Sources

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. From the printer properties dialog box, click the [Finishing] tab.

 
 
  1. Select [Booklet Printing] from [Print Style].


 
 
  1. Click the [Paper Source] tab → select [Different for Cover and Others] from [Paper Selection].


 
 
  1. Select the paper sources required for the cover and body pages from [Cover Page] and [Other Pages].

 
 
  1. Click [OK].

 

 
Printing on Transparencies

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. From the printer properties dialog box, click the [Paper Source] tab.

 
 
  1. Select [Transparency Interleaving] from [Paper Selection].


 
 
  1. Select the paper source required for the interleaf sheets from [Transparencies] and [Interleaf Sheets].

 
 
  1. Select [Print on Interleaf Sheets] if you want to print the same data on the interleaving and transparencies.

 
 
  1. Click [OK].

 

 
Printing on Custom Paper

This section describes how to print on nonstandard paper. If you register a paper size as a custom paper size, you will be able to select the registered custom paper size from [Page Size] or [Output Size] in the [Page Setup] sheet when printing a document.


Remark
  • Before printing on local standard paper, make sure the printer is set to print on the desired paper size.
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

Registering Custom Paper

Printing on Custom Paper

Printing on Local Standard Paper

You can use local standard paper, such as oficio or government letter paper, to print documents. In order to print on local standard paper, you need to specify the paper source for local standard paper in advance. Also, you need to register the local standard paper as custom paper.(→ "Registering Custom Paper," and "Printing on Custom Paper.")


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

Specifying the Paper Source for Local Standard Paper


 

 
Registering Custom Paper

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings] → click [Printers].
  • If you are using Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, on the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows XP Home Edition, on the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows Vista, on the [] (Start) menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers].

 
 
  1. In the [Printers] folder, right-click the printer icon for your printer → click [Properties] (Windows 98/Me) or [Printing Preferences] (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista).

 
 
  1. In the printer properties dialog box, click the [Page Setup] tab → click [Custom Paper Size].


 
 
  1. Enter a custom paper name in [Name of Custom Paper Size].


 
 
  1. Select the unit of measurement to specify the paper size for [Unit] → specify the height and width for [Height] and [Width].
  • Enter the values for the height and width of the paper size in portrait orientation, where the height should be longer than the width.

 
 
  1. Click [Register] → click [OK] in the [Custom Paper Size Settings] dialog box.

 
 
  1. Click [OK] in the printer properties dialog box.
  • For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, the custom paper sizes can be used with all printers installed on the computer you are using.
  • For Windows 98/Me, you can register a maximum of 50 custom paper sizes.

 

 
Printing on Custom Paper

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. From the printer properties dialog box, display the [Page Setup] sheet.

 
 
  1. Select the custom paper name you specified from [Page Size] and [Output Size].


 
 
  1. Click [OK].

 

 
Specifying the Paper Source for Local Standard Paper

Return to Overview

If the printer configuration has been set up automatically, the paper source for local standard paper has already been specified automatically.

If the printer configuration has not been set up automatically, follow the procedure below to specify the paper source for local standard paper.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings] → click [Printers].
  • If you are using Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, on the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows XP Home Edition, on the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows Vista, on the [] (Start) menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers].

 
 
  1. In the [Printers] folder, right-click the printer icon for your printer → click [Properties].

 
 
  1. In the printer properties dialog box, click the [Configuration] tab (Windows 98/Me) or [Device Settings] tab (Windows 2000/ XP/Server 2003/Vista) → [Form to Tray Assignment].


 
 
  1. From [Paper Source Information], select the paper source in which the local standard paper is loaded → select [Local Standard] from [Paper Size].


 
 
  1. Click [OK] in the [Form to Tray Assignment] dialog box.

 
 
  1. Click [OK] in the printer properties dialog box.

 

 
Printing a Banner Page with a Print Job

You can add a banner page to your document when it is printed. The banner page shows the user's login name, the time at which the job was printed, and the document file name.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. From the printer properties dialog box, click the [Finishing] tab.


 
 
  1. Click [Finishing Details].

The [Finishing Details] dialog box opens.


 
 
  1. Select [Auto] for [Print Banner Page].

 
 
  1. Select either [Paper Source] or [Paper Type] from [Select by], according to the paper supply method you want to use.

 
 
  1. Specify the paper source or paper type to be used for the banner page → click [OK].

 
 
  1. Click [OK] in the [Finishing] sheet.
  • Regardless of the number of copies that you are printing, only one banner page is output for each print job.
  • A banner page is output together with the other pages of a print job to the same destination.
  • Under Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, this option is not available if [Disabled] is selected for [Spooling at Host] in the [Device Settings] sheet.

 

 
Overlay Printing (PCL Only) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

This section describes what Overlay Printing is, how to create a form file, and how to print with an Overlay.


What Is Overlay Printing?

Overlay Printing overlays text data onto a form file.

For example, if the format of a report or bill is created in application software as a form file, you can create a perfectly formatted document by overlaying a text data document onto the form file.

To perform Overlay Printing, form files are required. You can use the following as form files:

  • Files created in application software and then stored in your computer or your printer as form files
  • Image data files for Form Composition stored in the printer
  • Files downloaded to your printer with the Canon NetSpot Resource Downloader

Remark
  • You can use only form files created in applications on your computer.
  • To use form files downloaded with the Canon NetSpot Resource Downloader, you need to install the NetSpot Resource Downloader Printer Driver Add-on Module. For instructions on how to use Canon NetSpot Resource Downloader, see the NetSpot Resource Downloader User's Guide.
  • For Windows Vista, Canon NetSpot Resource Downloader is not supported.

Overlay Printing Using a Form File on Host

Creating a Form File (PCL Only) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)


Printing with an Overlay (PCL Only) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)


 

 
Creating a Form File (PCL Only) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview

If forms created in application software are stored in your computer as form files, you can use the forms for Overlay Printing.

To store a form file in your computer, follow the procedure below.


 
 
  1. Prepare a document in the application software.

 
 
  1. In the application software, select [Print].

 
 
  1. Click [Properties] in the [Print] dialog box.

 
 
  1. Display the [Page Setup] sheet.


 
 
  1. Click [Page Options].

The [Page Options] dialog box opens.


 
 
  1. Click the [Overlay] tab.

 
 
  1. Click [Browse] → specify the file name → click [Save].

 
 
  1. Enter a title, or a subtitle if necessary → click [OK].

 
 
  1. Click [OK] in the [Page Setup] sheet.

 
 
  1. Click [OK] in the [Print] dialog box.

The document is now registered as a form file in the folder you specified.

  • The document is not printed out when creating a form file.

 

 
Printing with an Overlay (PCL Only) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview

To perform Overlay Printing using a form file stored in your computer, follow the procedure below.


 
 
  1. In the application software, select [Print].

 
 
  1. Click [Properties] in the [Print] dialog box.

 
 
  1. Display the [Page Setup] sheet.


 
 
  1. Click [Page Options].

The [Page Options] dialog box opens.


 
 
  1. Click the [Overlay] tab.

 
 
  1. Select [Use Overlay Printing] under [Processing Method].


 
 
  1. Click [Browse] → select the file name that you want to use as a form file → click [Save].

 
 
  1. Click [OK] in the [Page Options] dialog box.

 
 
  1. Click [OK] in the [Page Setup] sheet.

 
 
  1. Click [OK] in the [Print] dialog box.

The document is printed with the selected form file overlaid.


 

 
Specifying the Print Quality

The [Quality] sheet enables you to select print quality settings called Objectives.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

What Is an Objective?

Objectives are print quality settings selected to give the best result for a particular type of print job.

The following Objectives are stored in the printer driver:

  • General
  • Publications
  • Graphics
  • Photos
  • Designs [CAD]

Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

Selecting and Editing an Objective

You can select the Objective most suitable for your type of print job. You can also edit the settings of an Objective.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

Selecting an Objective


Editing the Objective Settings


 

 
Selecting an Objective

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. From the printer properties dialog box, click the [Quality] tab.


 
 
  1. Click the required Objective from [Objective].
  • An explanation of the selected Objective is displayed below the [Objective] list box. Use the information to decide which Objective to use.

 

 
Editing the Objective Settings

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. From the printer properties dialog box, click the [Quality] tab.


 
 
  1. Select the [Objective] whose settings you want to change.

 
 
  1. Click [Details].

The [Detailed Settings] dialog box opens.


 
 
  1. Specify the new settings → click [OK].

 
 
  1. Click [OK] in the [Quality] sheet.

 

 
Job Accounting Feature

This section describes Job Accounting, how to specify the ID and password for Job Accounting, and how to print with Job Accounting.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

Job Accounting Overview

When printing a document, Job Accounting enables you to sum print totals for each department or user for management purposes, under an ID and a password assigned to each department or user.

A document will be printed only if the specified ID and password are verified as valid.


Remark
  • If you are using a local printer (connected to an LPT port, USB port, etc.), you cannot use the Job Accounting feature.
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

Specifying the ID and Password

Printing with Job Accounting (Windows 98/Me)

Printing with Job Accounting (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista)

The procedure for printing with Job Accounting differs depending on whether [Allow Password Setting] is selected in the [ID/Password Settings] dialog box displayed by selecting [Job Accounting], and then clicking [Settings] in the [Device Settings] sheet.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

With Allow Password Setting Selected


With Allow Password Setting Not Selected


 

 
Specifying the ID and Password

Return to Overview

In order to print documents using the Job Accounting feature, follow the procedure below to specify the ID and password.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings] → click [Printers].
  • If you are using Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, on the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows XP Home Edition, on the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows Vista, on the [] (Start) menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers].

 
 
  1. In the [Printers] folder, right-click the printer icon for your printer → click [Properties].

 
 
  1. In the printer properties dialog box, click the [Configuration] tab (Windows 98/Me) or [Device Settings] tab (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista).

 
 
  1. Click [Get Device Status] to confirm that [Job Accounting] is selected, or manually select [Job Accounting].


 
 
  1. Click [Settings] to open the [ID/Password Settings] dialog box → enter the ID and password.

  • The ID and password can be changed when printing a document only if [Confirm ID/Password When Printing] is selected.
  • For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, you can specify the password in the [ID/Password Settings] dialog box only if [Allow Password Setting] is selected.
  • You can leave the password blank.

 
 
  1. Click [Verify] to confirm that the specified ID and password are valid.

 
 
  1. Click [OK].

 

 
Printing with Job Accounting (Windows 98/Me)

Return to Overview

To print with Job Accounting, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
       
  1. In the application software, select [Print].
 
       
  1. Click [Properties] in the [Print] dialog box.
 
       
  1. Specify the various settings in the printer properties dialog box.
 
       
  1. Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box → click [OK] in the [Print] dialog box.
 
       
  1. If the [Confirm ID/Password] dialog box opens, enter the ID and the password → click [OK].

The document is printed with the specified ID and password.

  • The [Confirm ID/Password] dialog box opens only if [Confirm ID/Password When Printing] is selected in the [ID/Password Settings] dialog box. Otherwise, the document is printed under the previously specified ID and password.
  • You can leave the password blank.

 

 
With Allow Password Setting Selected

Return to Overview

The password for Job Accounting can be specified in advance in the [ID/Password Settings] dialog box.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
       
  1. In the application software, select [Print].
 
       
  1. Click [Properties] in the [Print] dialog box.
 
       
  1. Specify the various settings in the printer properties dialog box.
 
       
  1. Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box → click [OK] in the [Print] dialog box.

The document is printed with the specified ID and password.


 

 
With Allow Password Setting Not Selected

Return to Overview

The password for Job Accounting is not specified in the [ID/Password Settings] dialog box, so that you have to specify the password each time you print a document.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
       
  1. In the application software, select [Print].
 
       
  1. Click [Properties] in the [Print] dialog box.
 
       
  1. Specify the various settings in the printer properties dialog box.
 
       
  1. Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box → click [OK] in the [Print] dialog box.
 
       
  1. In the [Confirm ID/Password] dialog box, enter the password → change the ID if necessary.
  • You can leave the password blank.
 
       
  1. Click [OK].

The document is printed with the specified ID and password.


 

 
Specifying the Grayscale Settings

Selecting an objective in the [Quality] sheet automatically sets the grayscale settings to suit the document that is to be printed. You can also set the desired grayscale settings manually.

This section describes the grayscale settings and how to specify the grayscale settings.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

About the Grayscale Settings

To make the detailed grayscale settings, you can use the [Grayscale Settings] dialog box, containing the [Grayscale Adjustment], and [Matching] sheets.

The [Grayscale Adjustment] sheet enables you to specify the brightness, and contrast settings affecting a printed document. Use the grid on the right part of the sheet to make an adjustment. A default original image and an adjusted preview image are displayed on the left part of the sheet. Use them to check the result of the adjustment.

The [Matching] sheet enables you to specify the method of color matching or monitor profile when printing color documents.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

Grayscale Printing

 

 
Grayscale Printing

Return to Overview

You can specify detailed grayscale settings manually when printing color documents in grayscale. To specify manual grayscale settings, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. From the printer properties dialog box, click the [Quality] tab.

 
 
  1. Select [Manual Grayscale Settings].


 
 
  1. Click [Grayscale Settings].

The [Grayscale Settings] dialog box is displayed.


 
 
  1. Adjust the brightness and contrast.

For detailed information about the [Grayscale Adjustment] sheet, see the Online Help.


 
 
  1. Click the [Matching] tab.


 
 
  1. Specify the matching mode, the matching method, and the monitor profile.

For detailed information about the [Matching] sheet, see the Online Help.


 
 
  1. Click [OK].

 
 
  1. Click [OK] in the [Quality] sheet.

 

 
Appendix

Operational Requirements and Restrictions in the Microsoft Cluster Server Environment

This section describes operational requirements and restrictions for using a printer in the Microsoft Cluster Server environment.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

When Installing the Printer Driver


 

Take notice of the following points when using a printer in the Microsoft Cluster Server environment:

  • Only server cluster environments in Microsoft Cluster Server are guaranteed to work with the printer drivers.
  • The printer driver supports a server cluster consisting of two nodes. A cluster of three or more nodes is not supported.
  • There must be only one spooler resource in the server cluster. Multiple spooler resources are not available.
  • Select a Standard TCP/IP port for the printer.
  • The printer driver must be installed in each cluster node individually. Otherwise it might be impossible to add a new driver to the virtual server.

Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

When Installing the Canon Driver Information Assist Service

Printer Driver Functions List

UFR II Driver Functions List


PCL Driver Functions List (LASER CLASS 830i Only)


Local Standard Paper Sizes List

 

 
When Installing the Canon Driver Information Assist Service

Return to Overview

In order to set up the printer configuration automatically or to use the Job Accounting feature, it is necessary to register the Canon Driver Information Assist Service as a cluster object in each node of the cluster server. To do this, after installing the Canon Driver Information Assist Service in each node, add it to the same group as the print cluster resources (Printer Spooler, IP Address, Network Name, and Physical Disk) in the Cluster Administrator.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
       
  1. Install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service in each node using the Installer.
 
       
  1. On the [Start] menu, click [Cluster Administrator] to start Cluster Administrator.
 
       
  1. From the [File] menu, point to [File] → click [Open Connection].
 
       
  1. Right-click the [Resources] folder icon in the left pane of Cluster Administrator → point to [New] → click [Resource].
 
       
  1. Enter the name and description of the new resource.
 
       
  1. Select [Generic Service] for [Resource type] → select the same group as the print cluster resources for [Group] → click [Next].
  • If the group which includes the print cluster resources (Printer Spooler, IP Address, Network Name, and Physical Disk) does not exist, it is necessary to create a new group for the print cluster resources.
 
       
  1. Select the nodes in which the Canon Driver Information Assist Service is installed from [Available nodes] click [Add].

The nodes you selected are added to [Possible owners].

 
       
  1. Click [Next].
 
       
  1. Leave [Dependencies] blank in the next dialog box → click [Next].
 
       
  1. Enter <Canon Driver Information Assist Service> in [Service name] → click [Next].
 
       
  1. Make sure that [Registry Replication] is not selected → click [Finish].
  • The resource is created, and the Canon Driver Information Assist Service is registered as a cluster object.

 

 
UFR II Driver Functions List

Return to Overview

The available functions for the Canon UFR II printer driver vary depending on the version of Windows you are using and the type of your driver (UFRII LT).


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

For the functions available for your environment, refer to the following table:

Sheet Settings Windows 98/Me Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista
[Device Settings/ Configuration] Sheet Spooling at Host Unavailable Available
Allow Password Settings Unavailable Available
[Profile] Sheet All Settings Unavailable Available

 

 
PCL Driver Functions List (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview


The available functions for the Canon PCL printer driver vary depending on the version of Windows you are using and the type of your driver (PCL5e or PCL6).

For the functions available for your environment, refer to the following table:

Sheet Settings Windows 98/Me Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista
PCL5e PCL6 PCL5e PCL6
[Finishing] sheet EMF spooling
Unavailable
Unavailable
Available
Available
Rendering Rate Rendering Rate
Unavailable
Unavailable
Only PCL5e
Available
Banding
Only PCL5e
Unavailable
Unavailable
Unavailable
Clip Font Character
Available
Unavailable
Available
Unavailable
[Profile] Sheet All Settings
Unavailable
Unavailable
Available
Available

 

 
Local Standard Paper Sizes List

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

To Use Local Standard Paper, you need to register the paper size that you will be using as a custom paper size beforehand. For the sizes of Local Standard Papers available for your printer, see below:

LASER CLASS 810/LASER CLASS 830i:

Paper Name Width (mm) Height (mm)
Oficio 216.0 317.0
Bolivian Oficio 216.0 355.0
Mexican Oficio 216.0 341.0
Folio 210.0 330.0
Government Letter 203.0 267.0
Government Legal 203.0 330.0
Foolscap 216.0 330.0
Chinese K16 195.0 270.0

 

 
Security

Security Instructions

Some functions may not be available, depending on whether the optional network printer kit is attached. (A network printer kit is standard-equipped for the LASER CLASS 830i.)


 

 
Specifying the System Manager Settings

You can set an ID and a password for the System Manager. Once the System Manager ID/password is set, restrictions can be placed on storing or changing the System Settings.


Remark
  • When you use Department ID Management, you need to set both the System Manager ID and password to restrict the access to the <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu from the operation panel, or using the Remote UI. Otherwise, all users will be considered as System Manager, and anyone can access the <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu from the operation panel, or use the Remote UI without restriction.
  • You can enter a maximum of 32 characters for the System Manager's name.
  • The maximum number of digits that you can store for the System Manager ID and System Password is seven. If you enter fewer than seven digits for either setting, the machine stores them with leading zeros. Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
  • You cannot store a System Manager ID with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>. If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros are ignored. Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.
  • To delete information that has been entered, press and hold down [Clear] → enter the correct number.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYS. MANAGER INFO>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYS. MANAGER ID>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter a number, then press [OK].

You must set both a System Manager ID and password to manage the operations of the machine.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM PASSWORD>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter a number, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM MANAGER>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the System Manager's name, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Device Information Settings

You can set a name for the machine, and enter information regarding its location.


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DEVICE INFO>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DEVICE NAME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter a name (up to 32 characters), then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <LOCATION>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the location of the machine (up to 32 characters), then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Department ID Management

You can register a Department ID and password for each department, and manage the machine by limiting its use to only those who enter the correct Department ID and password. This is called Department ID Management. Use Department ID Management to keep track of the copy, scan, and print totals for each department.

With Department ID Management, the following settings can be specified:

  • Turn Department ID Management ON or OFF.
  • Register the Department ID and password.
  • Set page limits for scans, prints, and copies.
  • Accept or reject print jobs from computers with unknown IDs.

Remark
  • When you use Department ID Management, you need to set both the System Manager ID and password to restrict the access to the <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu from the operation panel, or using the Remote UI. Otherwise, all users will be considered as System Manager, and anyone can access the <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu from the operation panel, or use the Remote UI without restriction. (See "Specifying the System Manager Settings.")
  • The pages of received fax/I-fax documents and automatically printed reports are not counted as prints.
  • The maximum number of digits that you can store for the Department ID and password is seven. If you enter fewer than seven digits for either setting, the machine stores them with leading zeros. Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
  • You cannot register a Department ID or password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>. If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros are ignored.
    Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.
  • If you make a mistake when entering a number, press [Clear] to clear the entire number → enter the correct number.
  • You can set the page limit from 0 to 999,999 pages.

Registering the Department ID, Password, and Page Limit

Changing the Password and Page Limit

Erasing the Department ID and Password

Checking Counter Information

Clearing Page Totals

Printing Counter Information (DEPT. INFO LIST)

Accepting Print Jobs with Unknown IDs

 

 
Registering the Department ID, Password, and Page Limit

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MANAGE DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REGISTER DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the number to which department will be designated, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the Department ID, then press [OK].
  • If you do not want to set a password, you can use the machine by entering only the Department ID.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PASSWORD>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the password, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAGE LIMIT SET.>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired function, then press [OK].

You can select <TOTAL PRINT LIMIT>, <COPY LIMIT> , <BLACK SCAN LIMIT>, <COLOR SCAN LIMIT> (LASER CLASS 830i Only), or <PRINT LIMIT>.

  • <TOTAL PRINT> is the sum of <COPY LIMIT> and <PRINT LIMIT>.
  • <COLOR SCAN LIMIT> is only displayed when using the LASER CLASS 830i.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<OFF>: Does not set a page limit restriction. Skip to step 15.
<ON>: Set a page limit restriction.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAGE TOTALS> (when <TOTAL PRINT LIMIT> is selected), then press [OK].

The message displayed will vary depending on which function you selected in step 11.
Example: <COPY LIMIT> appears when <COPY LIMIT> is selected.

 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the maximum number of pages that can be made by the registered Department ID, then press [OK].
  • You can set the page limit from 0 to 999,999 pages. Once a page limit is reached, copying, scanning, or printing is not possible.
  • The page limit refers to the number of printed surfaces. Therefore, a two-sided print is counted as two pages.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Changing the Password and Page Limit

Return to Overview

You can change the password and page limit settings that you have registered.


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MANAGE DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REGISTER DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the Department ID whose password and page limit you want to change, then press [OK] twice.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PASSWORD>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Clear] to clear the current password.
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the new password, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAGE LIMIT SET.>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired function, then press [OK].

You can select <TOTAL PRINT LIMIT>, <COPY LIMIT>, <BLACK SCAN LIMIT>, <COLOR SCAN LIMIT> (LASER CLASS 830i Only), or <PRINT LIMIT>.

  • <COLOR SCAN LIMIT> is only displayed when using the LASER CLASS 830i.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<OFF>: Does not set a page limit restriction. Skip to step 16.
<ON>: Set a page limit restriction.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAGE TOTALS> (when <TOTAL PRINT LIMIT> is selected), then press [OK].

The message displayed will vary depending on which function you selected in step 11.
Example: <COPY LIMIT> appears when <COPY LIMIT> is selected.

 
     
  1. Press [Clear] to clear the current number of page limit restriction.
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the maximum number of pages that can be made by the registered Department ID, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Erasing the Department ID and Password

Return to Overview

You can erase the Department ID and password that you have registered.


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MANAGE DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REGISTER DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the Department ID that you want to erase, then press [OK] twice.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ERASE>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <YES> or <NO>, then press [OK].
<NO>: Does not erase the selected Department ID and all of its settings.
<YES>: Erase the selected Department ID and all of its settings.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Checking Counter Information

Return to Overview

You can check how much paper was used by the each department.


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MANAGE DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAGE TOTALS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <VIEW PAGE TOTALS>, then press [OK].
  • If you select <CLEAR ALL TOTAL>, the counter information is deleted.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired function, then press [OK].

You can select <TOTAL PRINT>, <COPY>, <SCAN>, <COLOR SCAN> (LASER CLASS 830i Only), or <PRINT>.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to display the desired Department ID, and check the counter information.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Clearing Page Totals

Return to Overview

You can clear the page totals made for all departments.


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MANAGE DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAGE TOTALS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CLEAR ALL TOTAL>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <YES> or <NO>, then press [OK].
<NO>: Does not clear the page totals.
<YES>: Clear the page totals.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Printing Counter Information (DEPT. INFO LIST)

Return to Overview

You can print a list of how much paper was used by the each department.


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MANAGE DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAGE TOTALS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINT LIST>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] to select <YES>.

Printing starts, and the screen automatically returns to the standby mode.
If you do not want to print the counter information, press [] to select <NO>.


 

 
Accepting Print Jobs with Unknown IDs

Return to Overview

You can specify whether to accept or reject print jobs from computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID.


Remark
  • To print from a computer with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MANAGE DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PDL JOBS W/OUT ID>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<ON>: The machine accepts print jobs from computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID.
<OFF>: The machine does not accept print jobs from computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Managing User IDs

You can set whether or not to use the User ID Management. The User ID Management function enables you to register up to 100 (LASER CLASS 810) / 1000 (LASER CLASS 830i) User IDs.


Remark
  • When you use User ID Management, you need to register a user ID with the administrator privilege to restrict the access to the <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu from the operation panel, or using the Remote UI. Otherwise, all users will be considered as System Manager, and anyone can access the <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu from the operation panel, or use the Remote UI without restriction. (See "Managing the Department/User ID from a Computer.")
  • You need to register the User ID and password before you set this mode to <ON>.
  • One Department ID can be registered for each User ID.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MANAGE USER ID>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<ON>: User ID Management is enabled.
<OFF>: User ID Management is disabled.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Handling Documents with Forwarding Errors

You can set how the machine handles the documents that failed to be forwarded.


Remark
  • If a forwarding error occurs when both <PRINT> and <STORE TO MEMORY> are set to <OFF>, the received document will be lost.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FORWARD ERR. SET.>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINT>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<ON>: The machine prints received documents when document forwarding fails.
<OFF>: The machine does not print the image.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <STORE TO MEMORY>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<ON>: The machine stores received documents in memory when document forwarding fails.
<OFF>: The machine does not store the image.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Restricting the Remote UI

You can set whether to enable the Remote UI to operate the machine and change settings.


Remark
  • To use the Remote UI with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REMOTE UI>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<ON>: You can specify settings and operate the machine through the Remote UI.
<OFF>: You cannot specify settings and operate the machine through the Remote UI.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • The Remote UI is enabled only after you restart the machine. (the main power switch is turned off, and then back on.)

 

 
Restricting Access to Destinations

You can send the documents with following restrictions or settings.

  • Setting a Password for the Address Book
  • Restricting the New Address
  • Restricting PC Faxing
  • Restricting Redialing/Job Recall
  • Confirming Entered Fax Numbers
  • Restricting Broadcasting

Setting a Password for the Address Book

Restricting the New Address

Restricting PC Faxing

Restricting Job Recall (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Restricting Redialing (LASER CLASS 810 Only)

Confirming Entered Fax Numbers

Restricting Broadcasting

 

 
Setting a Password for the Address Book

Return to Overview

If you set a password, the screen for entering the password appears when you attempt to edit the Address Book.


Remark
  • If you want to cancel password protection, select <OFF> in step 5.
   

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ACCESS TO DEST.>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADD. BOOK PASSWORD>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the password for confirmation, then press [OK].

If you enter a wrong password, you have to start over from the first entry.

 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Restricting the New Address

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to restrict the entering of new destinations. When you set <RESTRICT NEW ADD.> to <ON>, the following are restricted:

  • Specifying a destination using the numeric keys.
  • Changing registered destinations.
  • Registering new destinations.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ACCESS TO DEST.>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RESTRICT NEW ADD.>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Restricting PC Faxing

Return to Overview

You can specify whether or not to allow sending faxes from computers using the fax driver.
An optional network printer kit is required to use the fax driver with the LASER CLASS 810.


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RESTRICT TX FUNC>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX DRIVER TX>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Confirming Entered Fax Numbers

Return to Overview

You can specify whether or not to confirm the entered fax numbers each time you send a fax.


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RESTRICT TX FUNC>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CONFIRM FAX NO.>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<OFF>: The confirmation screen does not appear.
<ON>: The confirmation screen appears when you enter a fax number using the numeric keys.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Restricting Job Recall (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview

You can specify whether or not to allow using [Recall].


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RESTRICT TX FUNC>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REST. REDIAL/ CALL>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Restricting Redialing (LASER CLASS 810 Only)

Return to Overview

You can specify whether or not to allow using [Redial].


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RESTRICT TX FUNC>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RESTRICT REDIAL>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Restricting Broadcasting

Return to Overview

You can specify whether or not to allow sending the documents to multiple recipients. Sets whether to restrict sending to multiple destinations when a fax destination is included.


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RESTRICT TX FUNC>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REST. MULTI DEST.> , then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF>, <PROHIBIT> or <CONFIRMATION>, then press [OK].
<OFF>: Allows sending the documents to multiple recipients.
<CONFIRMATION>: The message appears after pressing [Start] to confirm whether or not to send documents to multiple recipients. The message only appears when fax numbers are included in the recipients.
<PROHIBIT>: Does not allow sending the documents to multiple recipients.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode

 

 
Checking the Job Log

You can specify whether or not to check the job log. When you set <CHECKING THE LOG> to <ON>, you can check the job log using the System Monitor screen. When you set <CHECKING THE LOG> to <OFF>, the job log does not appear on the System Monitor screen.


Remark
  • When you set <CHECKING THE LOG> to <OFF>, the Activity Report will not print automatically.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CHECKING THE LOG>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Restricting the USB Interface Port

You can specify whether to accept or reject jobs by restricting the connection to the USB port.


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <USE DEVICE USB>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<ON>: The machine accepts jobs through the USB port.
<OFF>: The machine does not accept jobs through the USB port.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
 
       
  1. Restart the machine.

 

 
Network Settings

Network Settings Instructions

To use this function, an optional network printer kit is required. (A network printer kit is standard-equipped for the LASER CLASS 830i.)

Some functions are not available even if the optional network printer kit is installed when using the LASER CLASS 810.


 

 
System Requirements

This section describes the system environments with which the machine is compatible.


Remark
  • To set the machine to a network with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

Printing or Sending a Fax from a Computer

The following system environments are compatible when printing or sending a fax from a computer:

  • OS
  • Microsoft Windows 98/98SE
  • Microsoft Windows Me
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
  • Microsoft Windows XP Professional
  • Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2003
  • Microsoft Windows Vista
  • Computers
  • Windows; IBM PC/compatibles
  • Protocol
  • TCP/IP

Remark
  • If you are using Windows 2000, you need to install Service Pack 4 or later.

Using E-Mail/I-Fax

The following system environments are confirmed for using the e-mail functions.

  • Mail forwarding server software
  • Sendmail 8.93 or later (UNIX)
  • Microsoft Exchange Server (Windows) (Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 + Service Pack 1 or later)
  • Lotus Domino R4.6 or later (Windows)
  • Mail receiving server software
  • Qpopper 2.53 or later (UNIX)
  • Microsoft Exchange Server (Windows) (Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 + Service Pack 1 or later)
  • Lotus Domino R4.6 or later (Windows)

Remark
  • The machine sends e-mail to mail servers using SMTP.
  • The machine can receive incoming messages from a mail server using the POP3 protocol or directly using the machinefs own SMTP receiving function. If the latter method is used, it is not necessary for the mail server to support the POP3 protocol.
  • The machine can receive I-fax images and plain text e-mails, but not any other type of e-mail.

Sending Data to a File Server

The following system environments are compatible when sending data from the machine to a file server, depending on the type of network used:

With a TCP/IPv4 Network (Using FTP):

  • Servers
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Server and Internet Information Services 5.0
  • Microsoft Windows XP Professional and Internet Information Services 5.1
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2003 and Internet Information Services 6.0
  • Microsoft Windows Vista and Internet Information Services 6.0
  • Solaris Version 2.6 or later
  • Red Hat Linux 7.2
  • Mac OS X
  • FTP server for imageWARE Gateway
  • Protocol
  • TCP/IPv4

With a NetBIOS Network:

  • Servers
  • Microsoft Windows 98/98SE
  • Microsoft Windows Me
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
  • Microsoft Windows XP Professional
  • Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2003
  • Microsoft Windows Vista
  • Server software for sending data
  • Samba 2.2.8a or later (UNIX/Linux)
  • Protocol
  • NetBIOS over TCP/IP (NetBT)

Remark
  • If you are using Windows 2000, you need to install Service Pack 4 or later.

 

 
Basic Network Settings

Basic Network Settings are required in order to use the following functions of the machine.

  • Printing or sending a fax from a computer
  • Using e-mail
  • Sending data to a file server

Before making basic network settings, confirm that the following procedures are performed.


Remark
  • It is recommended that the network administrator perform the following procedures.
  • To set the machine to a network with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

Introduction to Basic Network Settings

Interface Settings

Ethernet Driver


Communication Environment Setup

To set up a configuration for communication between the machine and computers on your network, use the following procedure.


SNMP


Dedicated Port (IPv4 Only)


 

 
Introduction to Basic Network Settings

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To set the machine to a network with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
       
  1. Network Cable Connection (See "Connect the Machine to a Network (Set the Machine for Network Usage).")

Connect the machine to your network using the network cables.

 
       
  1. Preparation for Protocol Settings (See "Specify the IP Address Settings (Set the Machine for Network Usage).")

Specify the machine's IP address so that the machine and the network computer can communicate before making protocol settings. Any of the following can be used to specify the settings.
Machine's operation panel (Additional Functions menu)
NetSpot Device Installer (Canon utility software included in the User Software CD)


 

 
Ethernet Driver

Return to Overview

You can specify the communication method and Ethernet connection type.


Remark
  • To set the machine to a network with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ETHERNET DRIVER>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <AUTO DETECT> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired detection method, then press [OK].
<AUTO>: Automatically determines the communication mode (Half duplex/Full duplex) and Ethernet type (10Base-T/100BaseTX). Skip to step 11.
<MANUAL>: You have to manually specify the communication mode and Ethernet type.
  • If you reconnect the network cable (for example, reconnect the cable to a different Ethernet hub) with the power on, the Auto Detect function will not work even if you set <AUTO DETECT> to <AUTO>. (Connect the cable with the power off.)
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMUNICATION MODE>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired communication method, then press [OK].
<HALF DUPLEX>: Sends and receives alternately.
<FULL DUPLEX>: Sends and receives simultaneously.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ETHERNET TYPE>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired Ethernet connection type, then press [OK].
<10 BASE-T>: Establish a 10Base-T network connection.
<100 BASE-TX>: Establish a 100Base-TX network connection.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
 
       
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn off the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and then, turn it on.


 

 
SNMP

Return to Overview

SNMP helps monitor the state of the machine and collects information on it. The following two items can be set:

<COMMUNITY NAME>:
Sets the SNMP community name. You can specify up to two community names.

<SNMP WRITABLE>:
Enables the computers on the network to access the machine and modify its settings if this item is activated. You can specify this setting for each community separately.


Remark
  • To set the machine to a network with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SNMP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <USE SNMP>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<ON>: When you set or browse each item of the machine with utility that uses SNMP to obtain information.
<OFF>: When you do not use an SNMP utility.
  • If you want to use a Canon printer driver or utility, select <ON> for both <USE SNMP> and <DEDICATED PORT>.
  • You can restrict the IP addresses of computers on which items can be set or browsed. If you restrict the IP addresses, it is not possible to use the Remote UI to set or browse detailed information on computers other than those whose IP addresses are allowed, even if both <USE SNMP> and <DEDICATED PORT> are <ON>. For details, see "IP Address Range Settings (IPv4 Settings)."
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMUNITY NAME 1>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the desired community name other than "public," then press [OK].

If you do not need to specify <COMMUNITY NAME 2>, skip to step 11.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMUNITY NAME 2>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the desired community name, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SNMP WRITABLE 1>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].

If you do not need to specify <SNMP WRITABLE 2>, skip to step 15.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SNMP WRITABLE 2>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
 
       
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn off the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and then, turn it on.


 

 
Dedicated Port (IPv4 Only)

Return to Overview

To set or browse detailed information on the machine with a Canon printer driver or utility, set <DEDICATED PORT> to <ON>.


Remark
  • If you want to use a Canon printer driver or utility, select <ON> for both <USE SNMP> and <DEDICATED PORT>.
  • You can restrict the IP addresses of computers on which items can be set or browsed. If you restrict the IP addresses, it is not possible to use the Remote UI to set or browse detailed information on computers other than those whose IP addresses are allowed, even if both <USE SNMP> and <DEDICATED PORT> are <ON>. For details, see "IP Address Range Settings (IPv4 Settings)."
  • To set the machine to a network with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DEDICATED PORT>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<ON>: If you want to set or browse detailed information on the machine with a Canon printer driver or utility.
<OFF>: If you are not using a Canon printer driver or utility.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
 
       
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn off the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and then, turn it on.


 

 
Setting Up a Computer for Printing/Sending a Fax

This section describes procedures for Setting Up a computer for printing/sending a fax.

Before setting up a computer for printing/sending a fax, it is necessary to perform the following setup procedures.


Remark
  • It is recommended that the network administrator perform the following procedures.
  • To set the machine to a network with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

Introduction to Setting Up a Computer for Printing/Sending a Fax

Settings from the Operation Panel

Machine Connection Method (LPD/Raw)

Print Server Settings

 

 
Introduction to Setting Up a Computer for Printing/Sending a Fax

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To set the machine to a network with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
       
  1. Network Cable Connection (See "Specify the IP Address Settings (Set the Machine for Network Usage).")

Connect the machine to your network using the network cables.

 
       
  1. Preparation for Protocol Settings (See "Specify the IP Address Settings (Set the Machine for Network Usage).")

Specify the machinefs IP address so that the machine and the network computer can communicate before making protocol settings. Any of the following can be used to specify the settings.
Machine's operation panel (Additional Functions menu)
NetSpot Device Installer (Canon utility software included in the User Software CD)

 
       
  1. Basic Network Settings

Set up the basic network settings between the machine and computers on your network. To specify the settings, use:
Machine's operation panel
Web browser (Remote UI)


 

 
Settings from the Operation Panel

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To set the machine to a network with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

You can select the printing method over a TCP/IP network.


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <LPD PRINT>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<ON>: Uses LPD as the print application.
<OFF>: Does not use LPD.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RAW PRINT>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<ON>: Uses Raw as the print application.
<OFF>: Does not use Raw.
 
     
  1. Confirm that <USE BIDIRECTIONAL> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
<ON>: Establishes bidirectional communication using Port 9100.
<OFF>: Does not establish bidirectional communication using Port 9100.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
 
       
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn off the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and then, turn it on.


 

 
Machine Connection Method (LPD/Raw)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To set the machine to a network with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

  • Connecting to a TCP/IP Network:

All computers that use the machine must have TCP/IP client software installed and must be enabled for TCP/IP network use. For details, see the manuals provided with the operating system.

  • Installing the Printer Driver and Specifying the Machine Destination Setting:

To print from a computer, you must install a printer driver and specify a setting for the machine destination. The machine destination setting differs depending on the print application used for printing. Use the following information as a guide to determine the print application you are using, and then perform the necessary operations.

  • LPD: This is the print application generally used with TCP/IP.
  • Raw: This is a print application used with Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista. It can print at higher speeds than LPD.

Remark
  • In the following procedures, items displayed on the screen for Windows XP are used; items might differ depending on your operating system.

 
 
  1. Open the printer properties dialog box.

For Windows Vista, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Printer] under [Hardware and Sound].
For Windows 2000, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Settings] → [Printers].
For Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Printers and Faxes].
For Windows XP Home Edition, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].


 
 
  1. Right-click the icon of the printer you installed → select [Properties].

 
 
  1. Display the [Ports] sheet by clicking the [Ports] tab.


 
 
  1. Open the [Printer Ports] dialog box by clicking [Add Port].

 
 
  1. From [Available ports types], select [Standard TCP/IP Port] → click [New Port].

The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard starts.


 
 
  1. Click [Next].

 
 
  1. In [Printer Name or IP Address], enter the machine IP address or machine host name → click [Next].

After the computer has confirmed that there is a machine in which the entered IP address is assigned, the [Completing the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] window appears.


 
 
  1. Click [Finish].

If the dialog box displays [Additional Port Information Required], follow the instructions on the screen to search again, or click [Standard] → click [Canon Network Printing Device with P9100] from the pull-down list → click [Next].


 
 
  1. Click [Close] to close the [Printer Ports] dialog box.

 
 
  1. In the printer properties dialog box, click [Configure Port] → Click [LPR] under [Protocol] → enter a print queue in [Queue Name] under [LPR Settings].

If you want to use Raw, confirm [Raw] under [Protocol] is selected, and proceed to step 11.

  • You can specify a print queue in [Queue Name]. The following three print queues are available:
    LP: The machine prints according to its spool settings. Normally select this option.
    SPOOL: The machine prints only after spooling a print job on the hard disk, regardless of its spool settings.
    DIRECT: The machine prints without spooling a print job on the hard disk, regardless of its spool settings.

 
 
  1. Click [OK].

 
 
  1. Click [Close].

 

 
Print Server Settings

Return to Overview


If Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista is on your network, the following procedure enables you to set up a print server for more efficient management of network printers. Once a print server is set up, print jobs can be managed by the print server. Also, by setting up an alternate driver for the print server, printer drivers can be installed in each computer via the network.


Remark
  • To set the machine to a network with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
     
  1. Open the printer properties dialog box.

For Windows Vista, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → [Printers]
For Windows 2000, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Settings] → [Printers].
For Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Printers and Faxes].
For Windows XP Home Edition, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → Printers and Faxes].

 
     
  1. Right-click the icon of the printer you installed → select [Sharing].
 
     
  1. For Windows Vista, click [Change sharing options]

For other operating systems, skip to step 4.

  • Click [Continue] to proceed if the [User Account Control] dialog box appears.
 
     
  1. Select [Share this printer] (Windows 2000: [Shared as]) and enter a share name.
 
     
  1. If this machine is shared with users running different versions of Windows, click [Additional drivers].

When the alternate driver is installed, additional windows will open for entering the location of the file containing the printer driver. Follow the instructions in these windows.

  • To install the printer driver on another computer, use the [Printer Wizard] window for selecting the printer destination → select [Network printer] → select the shared printer for the computer selected in the print server.
 
     
  1. Click [OK].

The shared printer settings are complete.


 

 
Setting Up E-Mail (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

This section describes procedures for setting up e-mail. Before setting up e-mail, it is necessary to perform the following setup procedures.


Remark
  • It is recommended that the network administrator perform the following procedures.

Introduction to Setting Up E-Mail (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Settings from the Operation Panel (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

 

 
Introduction to Setting Up E-Mail (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview


 
       
  1. Network Cable Connection (See "Specify the IP Address Settings (Set the Machine for Network Usage).")

Connect the machine to your network using the network cables.

 
       
  1. Preparation for Protocol Settings (See "Specify the IP Address Settings (Set the Machine for Network Usage).")

Specify the machine's IP address so that the machine and the network computer can communicate before making protocol settings. Any of the following can be used to specify the settings.
Machine's operation panel (Additional Functions menu)
NetSpot Device Installer (Canon utility software included in the User Software CD)

 
       
  1. Basic Network Settings

Set up the basic network settings between the machine and computers on your network. To specify the settings, use:
Machine's operation panel
Web browser (Remote UI)


 

 
Settings from the Operation Pane (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • You may need to specify the DNS Settings to resolve the host names of the SMTP and POP servers in order to send e-mail. For details, see "DNS Settings."

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL/l-FAX>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SMTP RX>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<OFF>: Does not receive e-mail/I-fax using the machine's own SMTP receiving function. If you want to receive e-mail/I-fax using a POP server, select <OFF>.
<ON>: Receives e-mail/I-fax using the machine's own SMTP receiving function.
  • The machine can receive I-fax images and communication error notices only.
  • You must register the host name of the machine with the DNS server if you want to receive e-mail using the machine's own SMTP receiving function.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SMTP SERVER>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the SMTP server name, then press [OK].
Enter the SMTP server name if the SMTP server name is already registered in the DNS server.
Enter the IP address of the SMTP server if the SMTP server name is not registered in the DNS server.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <POP>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<OFF>: Does not receive e-mail/I-fax using a POP server. If you want to receive e-mail using the machine's own SMTP receiving function, select <OFF>.
<ON>: Receives e-mail using a POP server.
  • The machine can receive I-fax images and plain text e-mails only.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <AUTH/ENC SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <POP BEFORE SEND>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<OFF>: Does not use an SMTP server that requires POP before SMTP.
<ON>: Uses an SMTP server that requires POP before SMTP (method for authenticating users who have logged in the POP server before sending e-mail).
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SMTP AUTH>, then press [OK].
<OFF>: Does not use an SMTP server that requires SMTP Authentication. Skip to step 19.
<ON>: Uses an SMTP server that requires SMTP Authentication (method for authenticating users who have logged in the SMTP server before sending e-mail).
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <USER>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the user name, then press [OK].

Enter the user name used for logging in to the SMTP server if the SMTP server name is already registered in the DNS server.
Enter the IP address of the SMTP server if the SMTP server name is not registered in the DNS server.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PASSWORD>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the password used for logging in to the SMTP server. then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the e-mail address your machine will use, then press [OK].
Enter the e-mail address as follows when you receive e-mail using a POP server.

Enter the e-mail address as follows when you receive e-mail using the machine's own SMTP receiving function.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <POP SERVER>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the POP server name, then press [OK].
Enter the POP server name if the POP server name is already registered in the DNS server.
Enter the IP address of the POP server if the POP server name is not registered in the DNS server.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <POP ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the login name for access to the POP server, then press [OK].
 

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <POP PASSWORD>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the password for access to the POP server, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <POP INTERVAL>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use [], [], or numeric keys to set the interval at which you want to check the POP server for incoming e-mail, then press [OK].
  • If the interval is set to 0, the POP server is not checked automatically.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
 
       
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn off the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and then, turn it on.


 

 
Setting Up a Computer as a FTP Server (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

To send data from the machine to a computer on your network, you need to specify the settings of the computer for receiving data.

You can send data over a TCP/IP network to any of the following:

  • FTP server (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, UNIX, Mac OS X, imageWARE Gateway series)
  • Windows shared folder (Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Server 2003)
  • Samba shared folder (UNIX/Linux)

This section describes how to set up a computer as an FTP server.

For instructions on how to configure a Windows and Samba shared folder, see "Setting Up a Computer as a File Server (LASER CLASS 830i Only)."


Remark
  • Samba 2.2.8a or later is supported.
  • This section describes only the procedures for setting up a computer to receive data sent from the machine. To send data from the machine to a server on the network, you must enter an address setting from the operation panel. For instructions on how to specify destination address settings, see "ADDRESS BOOK SET.."
  • The following procedure explains a sample FTP server setup. Depending on your environment, the actual setup procedure may differ.

Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista (Setting Up a Computer as a FTP Server) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

UNIX (Setting Up a Computer as a FTP Server) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Mac OS X (Setting Up a Computer as a FTP Server) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

FTP Server for imageWARE Gateway (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

 

 
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista (Setting Up a Computer as a FTP Server) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • It is recommended that the FTP server be configured by the network administrator.
  • The use of Windows 2000 Server as an FTP server requires the installation of Microsoft Internet Information Services 5.0 (IIS 5.0).
    If IIS is not installed in the computer you are using, you will need to install IIS before entering these settings.
    For installation procedures, see the documentation provided with your operating system.
  • The use of Windows XP Professional as an FTP server requires the installation of Microsoft Internet Information Services 5.1 (IIS 5.1).
    If IIS is not installed in the computer you are using, you will need to install IIS before entering these settings. For installation procedures, see the documentation provided with your operating system.
    Windows XP Home Edition cannot be used as an FTP server.
  • The use of Windows Server 2003 as an FTP server requires the installation of Microsoft Internet Information Services 6.0 (IIS 6.0).
    If IIS is not installed in the computer you are using, you will need to install IIS before entering these settings. For installation procedures, see the documentation provided with your operating system.
  • The use of Windows Vista as an FTP server requires the installation of Microsoft Internet Information Services 5.1 (IIS 5.1).
    If IIS is not installed in the computer you are using, you will need to install IIS before entering these settings. For installation procedures, see the documentation provided with your operating system.
    Windows XP Home Edition cannot be used as an FTP server.
  • Verification of users for access to FTP servers is done by referencing the local account database Windows 2000 Server/XP Professional/Server 2003/Vista that is used as the FTP server. Therefore, it is not possible to use the account of a domain user registered in Windows 2000 Server/XP Professional/Server 2003/Vista to send data directly from the machine to FTP servers in other domains.
  • This section describes the procedures for using the default home directory under [Default FTP Site]. To use other settings, enter the FTP site and home directory by referring to the documentation for IIS.
  • In the following procedures, items displayed on the screen for Windows XP are used; items might differ depending on your operating system.

 
 
  1. Log on to Windows as a member of the group with access rights to the directory to be designated as the FTP site directory.
  • Depending on your environment, the access rights settings for a drive or directory may differ. For details, see the Windows documentation.

 
 
  1. Start IIS.

For Windows 2000, click [Start] on the Windows taskbar → [Settings] → [Control Panel] → [Administrative Tools] → [Internet Services Manager].

For Windows XP, click [start] on the Windows taskbar → [Control Panel] → [Performance and Maintenance] → [Administrative Tools] → [Internet Information Services].

For Windows Server 2003, click [Start] on the Windows taskbar → [Administrative Tools] → [Internet Information Services Manager].

For Windows Vista, click [start] on the Windows taskbar → [Control Panel] → [Performance and Maintenance] → [Administrative Tools] → [Internet Information Services].


 
 
  1. Enter the FTP site settings.

For Windows 2000, right-click the [Default FTP Site] icon → click [Properties].

For Windows XP/Server 2003, double-click the [FTP Sites] icon → right-click the [Default FTP Site] icon → click [Properties].

For Windows Vista, double-click the [FTP Sites] icon → right-click the [Default FTP Site] icon → click [Properties].

In the [Default FTP Site Properties] dialog box, click the [Security Accounts] tab to display the [Security Accounts] sheet.

For Windows 2000, deselect [Allow Anonymous Connections]. For Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista, deselect [Allow only anonymous connection].

Click the [Home Directory] tab to display the [Home Directory] sheet → select both [Read] and [Write].

Click [OK] to close the [Default FTP Site Properties] dialog box.


 
 
  1. Confirm [Full computer name].

For Windows 2000:
Right-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop → click [Properties].
Click the [Network Identification] tab to display the [Network Identification] sheet → confirm [Full computer name].
Click [Cancel] to close the [System Properties] dialog box.

For Windows XP/Server 2003:
Click [start] or [Start] on the Windows taskbar, right-click [My Computer] → click [Properties].
Click the [Computer Name] tab to display the [Computer Name] sheet → confirm [Full computer name].
Click [Cancel] to close the dialog box.

For Windows Vista:
Click [start] or [Start] on the Windows taskbar, right-click [My Computer] → click [Properties].
Click the [Computer Name] tab to display the [Computer Name] sheet → confirm [Full computer name].
Click [Cancel] to close the dialog box.


 
 
  1. Set up the users and passwords for access to the FTP server.

For Windows 2000, right-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop → click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] window.

For Windows XP/Server 2003, click [start] or [Start] on the Windows taskbar, right-click [My Computer] → click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] window.

For Windows Vista, click [start] or [Start] on the Windows taskbar, right-click [My Computer] → click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] window.

Under [System Tools], double-click [Local Users and Groups] → right-click the [Users] folder → click [New User].

In the [New User] dialog box, enter the user name in [User name] → enter the password in [Password] → re-enter the password in [Confirm password].

Enter a user name not longer than 20 alphanumeric characters, and a password not longer than 24 (14 for Windows 2000) alphanumeric characters. If [User must change password at next logon] is selected, any new users added must change their passwords in order to send data from the machine. (You cannot change the password from the operation panel.)

Confirm the settings → click [Create].

Close the [Computer Management] window.


 
 
  1. Set a destination address using the operation panel.

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings:
[Full computer name]: starfish.organization.company.com Create a directory named "share" in the specified FTP server's directory "\Inetpub\ftproot", and then set "share" as the data destination.
  • The machine's destination settings:
The server protocol: <FTP>
<NAME>: The destination's name
<HOST NAME>: starfish.organization.company.com
<FILE PATH>: share
<LOGIN NAME>: User name entered in step 5
<PASSWORD>: Password for the above user
  • To use [Full computer name], which was confirmed in step 4, as the host name for <HOST NAME> as shown in the example, it is necessary to use a DNS server. (This applies even if the machine and the FTP server are in the same subnet.) If no DNS server is available, the host name setting should be specified using the IP address of the FTP server.
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> on the operation panel.
  • If you switch the language of the LCD display, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly.
  • For instructions on how to specify destination address settings, see "ADDRESS BOOK SET.."

 

 
UNIX (Setting Up a Computer as a FTP Server) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • UNIX users must have Solaris 2.6 or later installed in order to use the computer as an FTP server.
  • In some environments, detailed settings may be required in order to use FTP. For details, consult your network manager.

 
       
  1. Log in to a workstation as a superuser.
 
       
  1. Set up the users who send documents from the machine, and their passwords.

Enter a user name and a password not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters.

 
       
  1. Create a shared directory to be used for destination addresses, and then enable read access and write access by the users who will be sending data.
 
       
  1. Set a destination address using the operation panel.

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings:
[Host name]: starfish
[Domain]: organization.company.com
The user's home directory is /home/hsato, and /home/hsato/share is the data destination.
  • The machine's destination settings:
The server protocol: <FTP>
<NAME>: The destination's name
<HOST NAME>: starfish.organization.company.com
<FILE PATH>: Enter one of the following:
share (when using relative path)/home/hsato/share (when using absolute path)
<LOGIN NAME>: User name entered in step 2
<PASSWORD>: Password for the above user
  • To use the host name of the above example for <HOST NAME>, it is necessary to use a DNS server. (This applies even if the machine and the FTP server are in the same subnet.) If no DNS server is available, the host name setting should be specified using the IP address of the FTP server.
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> on the operation panel.
  • If you switch the language of the LCD display, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly.
  • For instructions on how to specify destination address settings, see "ADDRESS BOOK SET.."

 

 
Mac OS X (Setting Up a Computer as a FTP Server) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • The following procedures are based on Mac OS X version 10.4. The procedures may differ depending on the versions of Mac OS X you are using.

 
       
  1. Log in to Mac OS X as Administrator.
 
       
  1. Start the FTP services under Mac OS X.
  • Click the Apple icon in the top left of the screen → [System Preferences].
  • Click the [Sharing] icon in the [System Preferences] window.
  • Click to select the [FTP Access] → click [Start].
  • Click [Show all] on the toolbar.
 
       
  1. Specify the user to whom you want to send data, and then the password.
  • Click the [Accounts] icon in the [System Preferences] window.
  • Click [] to create a new account.
  • Enter a user name, and a password not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters.
  • Click [Create Account].
  • Close the [Accounts] window.
 
       
  1. Create a shared folder to which files are to be sent.

Sample setting:
Create a folder named "iR_Folder" in the [Public] folder in the [Home] folder.

 
       
  1. Grant access to the shared folder created in step 4.
  • Click to select the shared folder → select [Get Info] from the [File] menu.
  • Click [Ownership & Permissions] → [Details].
  • Enable read and write access to the folder by the owner and members of a group to which the owner belongs.
  • Close the Info window.
 
       
  1. Set a destination address using the operation panel.

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings (set using the above procedure):
    Create a folder named "iR_Folder" in the [Public] folder in the [Home] folder of the user named "yoko", and then specify the iR_Folder as the folder to which files are sent.
  • The machine's destination settings:
The server protocol: <FTP>
<NAME>: The destination's name
<HOST NAME>: IP address of Macintosh
<FILE PATH>: Enter an absolute path to a folder to which files are sent:
/Users/yoko/Public/iR_Folder
<LOGIN NAME>: User name entered in step 3
<PASSWORD>: Password for the above user
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for <FILE PATH> on the operation panel.
  • If you switch the language of the LCD display, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly.
  • For instructions on how to specify destination address settings, see "ADDRESS BOOK SET.."

 

 
FTP Server for imageWARE Gateway (Setting Up a Computer as a FTP Server) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • An FTP server for imageWARE Gateway is required for receiving data from the machine when used with imageWARE Gateway.

 
       
  1. Set up the FTP server for imageWARE Gateway.

For details about the settings, see the imageWARE Gateway Users Guide.

 
       
  1. On the FTP server for imageWARE Gateway, specify the folder to store data sent from the machine.

For details about the settings, see the imageWARE Gateway Users Guide.

  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for a folder name.
  • Enter a user name and a password not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters.
 
       
  1. On the FTP server for imageWARE Gateway, export destination data.

For details about the settings, see the imageWARE Gateway Users Guide.

  • A DNS server is needed to use an FQDN format (for example, starfish.organization.company.com) for the FTP server address. (A DNS server is also required if the machine and the FTP server are in the same subnet.) If you have not set up a DNS server, use IP addresses.
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for an FTP server address of the FQDN format.
 
       
  1. Use the Remote UI of the machine to import the destination data exported in step 3 into the machine.
  • Click [Add. Func.] of the Remote UI → click [Import/Export].
  • Click [Address Book].
  • Click [Import].
  • Click [Browse] → select the file to import.
  • Click [OK].
  • If you switch the language of the LCD display, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly.
  • For instructions on how to specify destination address settings, see "ADDRESS BOOK SET.."

 

 
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server (Using SMB) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

This section describes procedures for setting up a computer as a file server.

Before setting up a computer as a file server, it is necessary to perform the following setup procedures.


Remark
  • It is recommended that the network administrator perform the following procedures.

Introduction to Setting Up a Computer as a File Server (Using SMB) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Settings from the Operation Panel (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Configuring a Shared Folder

To send data from the machine to a computer on your network, you need to specify the settings of the computer for receiving data. You can send data over a NetBIOS network to a Windows shared folder.


Remark
  • The following procedures describe a sample shared folder configuration. Depending on your environment, the actual configuration procedure may differ.

Configuring a Shared Folder (Windows 98/Me) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)


Configuring a Shared Folder (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)


Configuring a Shared Folder (UNIX/Linux) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)


 

 
Introduction to Setting Up a Computer as a File Server (Using SMB) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview


 
       
  1. Network Cable Connection (See "Specify the IP Address Settings (Set the Machine for Network Usage).")

Connect the machine to your network using the network cables.

 
       
  1. Preparation for Protocol Settings (See "Specify the IP Address Settings (Set the Machine for Network Usage).")

Specify the machine's IP address so that the machine and the network computer can communicate before making protocol settings. Any of the following can be used to specify the settings.
Machine's operation panel (Additional Functions menu)
NetSpot Device Installer (Canon utility software included in the User Software CD)

 
       
  1. Basic Network Settings

Set up the basic network settings between the machine and computers on your network. To specify the settings, use:
Machine's operation panel
Web browser (Remote UI)


 

 
Settings from the Operation Panel (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview


Remark

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SMB SERVER SET>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <USE SMB CLIENT> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SERVER>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the NetBIOS name of the machine, then press [OK].
  • Be sure to enter a unique name that does not exist as a name for another computer or printer on the same network.
  • You cannot enter a character string that includes blanks.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <WORKGROUP>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the name of the workgroup the machine belongs to, then press [OK].
  • You cannot enter the domain name as the workgroup name.
  • You cannot enter a character string that includes blanks.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMENT>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter a comment if necessary, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <LM ANNOUNCE> displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<OFF>: Does not notify the LAN Manager of its existence on the network.
<ON>: Notifies the LAN Manager of its existence on the network.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
 
       
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn off the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and then, turn it on.


 

 
Configuring a Shared Folder (Windows 98/Me) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • If a suitable Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista machine is available on your network, it is recommended that you configure that machine as a file server instead of using a Windows 98/Me machine.
  • In the following procedures, items displayed on the screen for Windows 98 are used; items might differ depending on your operating system.

 
 
  1. Specify the NetBIOS settings.

Right-click the [Network Neighborhood] icon displayed on the desktop → click [Properties].
In [The following network components are installed], confirm that both [Client for Microsoft Networks] and [File and printer sharing for Microsoft Networks] appear. If these components do not appear, click [Add] to install.

Click [File and Print Sharing] → click [I want to be able to give others access to my files] → click [OK].
To specify the access control method, click the [Access Control] tab → select the level of access control. If you select [User-level access control], specify a domain in which a list of users and groups is saved.

In the [Network] dialog box, click the [Identification] tab to display the [Identification] sheet. Confirm the computer name.

Click [OK] to close the [Network] dialog box.


 
 
  1. Set up file sharing.
  • For details on this dialog box, see the Windows 98/Me documentation.
    Confirm the settings you entered → click [OK].
    Click [OK] to close the properties dialog box of the shared folder.

 
  • Right-click the folder you want to share using Explorer → click [Sharing].
 
  • On the [Sharing] sheet, click [Shared As] → enter the share name in [Share Name].

 
  • For [Access Type], select either [Full] or [Depends on Password].
 
  • Enter a password. If [Depends on Password] is selected, enter a password not longer than 8 alphanumeric characters for full access.
 
  • Confirm the settings you entered → click [OK].

 
  • Right-click the folder you want to share using Explorer → click [Sharing].
 
  • On the [Sharing] sheet, click [Shared As] → enter the share name in [Share Name].

 
  • Click [Add] to open the [Add Users] dialog box on the screen.
 
  • From the left list select the users to whom you want to give access to the shared folder → add them to the right list.

 
 
  1. Set a destination address using the machine's operation panel.

Sample destination setting:
Server side settings:

[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share

Create a folder called Images within share, and then specify Images as the destination for sending.
The machine's destination settings:

The server protocol: <SMB>
<NAME>: The destination's name
<HOST NAME>: ¥¥swan¥share
<FILE PATH>: ¥Images
<LOGIN NAME>: (Not required if you have selected [Sharelevel access control] in step 1)
<PASSWORD>: Password entered in step 2.
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for <HOST NAME> on the operation panel. A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for <FILE PATH>, and a maximum of 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered for <LOGIN NAME>. Enter each of these items on the server using no more than their allowable number of characters.
  • If you change the language of the LCD display, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.
  • If the language of the LCD display differs from the computer on your network, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.
  • You can send data using the following formats. A DNS server is required for the latter case:
    ¥¥192.168.2.100¥share
    ¥¥host_name.organization.company.com¥share

 

 
Configuring a Shared Folder (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • It is recommended that the file server be configured by the network administrator.
  • The number of users or clients that can access a server running Windows 2000 Server/XP/Server 2003/Vista is limited. After this number of users or clients is reached, it is not possible to send to a server running Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista.
  • In the following procedures, items displayed on the screen for Windows XP are used; items might differ depending on your operating system.

 
 
  1. Log on to Windows as Administrator.

 
 
  1. Confirm the file sharing settings.

  • For Windows Vista, click [Continue] to proceed if the [User Account Control] dialog box appears.

For Windows Vista:
Click [Start] on the Windows task bar → right-click [Network] → [Properties] → [Manage network connections] → right-click [Local Area Connection] → [Properties]
Confirm that [Client for Microsoft Networks], [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks], and [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)] are all selected. If any of these functions is not selected, select it now.

For Windows 2000:
Right-click the [My Network Places] icon on the desktop → click [Properties] to open the [Network and Dialup Connections] window.
Confirm that [Client for Microsoft Networks], [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks], and [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] are all selected. If any of these functions is not selected, select it now.

For Windows XP:
Click [start] on the Windows taskbar → right-click [My Network Places] → click [Properties] to open the [Network Connections] window.
Confirm that [Client for Microsoft Networks], [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks], and [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] are all selected. If any of these functions is not selected, select it now.

For Windows Server 2003:
Click [Start] on the Windows taskbar → [Control Panel] → [Network Connections] → Right-click the [Local Area Connection] icon → click [Properties] to open the [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box.
Confirm that [Client for Microsoft Networks], [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks], and [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] are all selected. If any of these functions is not selected, select it now.


 
 
  1. Specify the NetBIOS settings

For Windows Vista
Double-click [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)] to open the [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties] dialog box → in the [General] sheet, click [Advanced].
In the [Advanced TCP/IP Settings] dialog box, click the [WINS] tab → in the [WINS] sheet, click [Enable NetBIOS over TCP/IP].
Click [OK] until all the dialog boxes are closed.
Restart the computer if prompted.

For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003
Double-click [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] to open the [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties] dialog box → in the [General] sheet, click [Advanced].
In the [Advanced TCP/IP Settings] dialog box, click the [WINS] tab → in the [WINS] sheet, click [Enable NetBIOS over TCP/IP].
Click [OK] until all the dialog boxes are closed.
Restart the computer if prompted.


 
 
  1. Confirm the computer name.
  • For Windows Vista, click [Continue] to proceed if the [User Account Control] dialog box appears.

For Windows Vista:
Click [Start] on the Windows taskbar → right-click [Computer] → Properties] → [Advanced system settings]
Click the [Computer Name] tab to display the [Computer Name] sheet.
Click [Change] → [More] in the [Computer Name Changes] dialog box.
In the [DNS Suffix and NetBIOS Computer Name] dialog box, confirm [NetBIOS computer name].
Click [Cancel] until all the dialog boxes are closed.

For Windows 2000:
Right-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop → click [Properties].
Click the [Network Identification] tab to display the [Network Identification] sheet.
Click [Properties] → [More] in the [Identification Changes] dialog box.
In the [DNS Suffix and NetBIOS Computer Name] dialog box, confirm [NetBIOS computer name].
Click [Cancel] until all the dialog boxes are closed.

For Windows XP/Server 2003:
Click [start] or [Start] on the Windows taskbar → right-click [My Computer] → click [Properties].
Click the [Computer Name] tab to display the [Computer Name] sheet.
Click [Change] → [More] in the [Computer Name Changes] dialog box.
In the [DNS Suffix and NetBIOS Computer Name] dialog box, confirm [NetBIOS computer name].
Click [Cancel] until all the dialog boxes are closed.


 
 
  1. Open the [Computer Management] window.

For Windows XP Home Edition, skip step 7.

  • For Windows Vista, click [Continue] to proceed if the [User Account Control] dialog box appears.

For Windows Vista:
Click [Start] on the Windows taskbar, right-click [Computer] → click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] window.

For Windows 2000:
Right-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop → click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] window.

For Windows XP/Server 2003:
Click [start] or [Start] on the Windows taskbar, right-click [My Computer] → click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] window.


 
 
  1. Set up the users and passwords for access to the shared folder.

Under [System Tools], double-click [Local Users and Groups] → right-click the [Users] folder → click [New User].

In the [New User] dialog box, enter the user name in [User name] → enter the password in [Password] → re-enter the password in [Confirm password].

Enter a user name not longer than 20 alphanumeric characters, and a password not longer than 14 alphanumeric characters. If [User must change password at next logon] is selected, any new users added must change their passwords in order to send data from the machine. (You cannot change the password from the operation panel.)
Confirm the settings → click [Create].
Close the [Computer Management] window.


 
 
  1. Configure the shared folder.

  • For Windows Vista, click [Continue] to proceed if the [User Account Control] dialog box appears.

For Windows Vista:
Right-click the folder you want to share using Explorer → click [Properties].
On the [Sharing] sheet, click [Advanced Sharing]
On the [Advanced Sharing] dialog box, select [Share this folder] → enter the share name in [Share name].

For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003:
Right-click the folder you want to share using Explorer → click [Properties].
On the [Sharing] sheet, click [Share this folder] → enter the share name in [Share name].


 
 
  1. Set security.
  • To display the [Security] tab in Windows XP, follow the procedures below. For details about the settings, see the documentation provided with Windows XP.
  • Windows XP Professional: Open Folder Options → deselect [Use simple file sharing]. However, you can share folders and files with [Use simple file sharing] selected. Select or deselect [Use simple file sharing] to suit your environment.
  • Windows XP Home Edition: Start Windows in safe mode → select [Safe Mode with Networking] in the Windows Advanced Options Menu. After logging on to Windows, you can find a [Security] tab by opening the properties dialog box of the shared folder.

 
  • Click [Permissions] → select or add the users or groups to whom you want to give access to the shared folder.

  • Under [Permissions], select both [Change] and [Read] → click [OK].

 
  • Click [Permissions] → select or add the users or groups to whom you want to give access to the shared folder.

 
  • Under [Permissions], select both [Change] and [Read] → click [OK].
 
  • For Windows Vista, click [OK] to close the [Advanced Sharing] dialog box
 
  • Click the [Security] tab.
 
  • In the [Security] sheet, select or add the users or groups to whom you want give access to the shared folder.
 
  • Under [Permissions], select both [Write] and [Read & Execute], or a higher access authority. For data in the folder, check both [Write] and [Read], or a higher access authority.
 
  • Click [OK] → close the properties dialog box of the shared folder.

 
 
  1. Set a destination address using the operation panel.

Sample destination setting:

Server side settings:

[NetBIOS computer name]: swan
[Share name]: share

Create a folder called Images within share, and then specify Images as the destination for sending.

The machine's destination settings:

The server protocol: <SMB>
<NAME>: The destination's name
<HOST NAME>: ¥¥swan¥share
<FILE PATH>: ¥Images
<LOGIN NAME>: User name entered in step 6.
<PASSWORD>: Password for the above user.
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for <HOST NAME> on the operation panel. Also, a maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for <FILE PATH>. Enter each of these items on the server using no more than their allowable number of characters.
  • If you change the language of the LCD display, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.
  • If the language of the LCD display differs from the computer on your network, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.
  • You can send data using the following formats. A DNS server is required for the latter case:
    ¥¥192.168.2.100¥share
    ¥¥host_name.organization.company.com¥share
  • For Windows XP Home Edition, <LOGIN NAME> and <PASSWORD> are not required.

 

 
Configuring a Shared Folder (UNIX/Linux) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • Samba 2.2.8a or later is supported.
  • In some environments, detailed settings may be required in order to use Samba. For details, consult your network manage

 
       
  1. Log in to a workstation as a superuser.
 
       
  1. Set up the users who access Samba shared folder, and their passwords.

Set a user name not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters, and a password not longer than 14 alphanumeric characters.

 
       
  1. Set a destination address using the control panel.

Sample destination setting:

Server side settings:

[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share

Create a folder called Images within share, and then specify Images as the recipient for sending.

The machine's destination settings:

The Protocol drop-down list FTP
[Protocol]: Windows (SMB)
[Host Name]: ¥¥swan¥share
[File Path]: ¥Images
[User]: User name entered in above step.
[Password]: Password for the above user.
  • If you use [Browse] to specify each item, press [Browse] after the expiration of the time specified in "Startup Time Settings." (the default setting startup time is <60 seconds>).
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for [Host Name] on the control panel. Also, a maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for [File Path]. Enter each of these items on the server using no more than their allowable number of characters.
  • If Language Switch in Common Settings is set to <On>, the Host Name and File Path of the file server destination may not be displayed correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them.
  • If the language of the touch panel display differs from the computer used as a master browser, [Host name] and [File path] may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.
  • You can send data using the following formats. A DNS server is required for the latter case:
    ¥¥192.168.2.100¥share
    ¥¥host_name.organization.company.com¥share

 

 
Startup Time Settings

If you connect the machine to a switching hub, it may not be able to connect to a network even though your network settings are set correctly.

This occurs because the spanning tree process performed between switching hubs prevents them from communicating with each other immediately after the machine connects to a switching hub. In this case, use the following procedure to delay the startup of network communication.


Remark
  • To set the machine to a network with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <STARTUP TIME SET.>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use [], [], or numeric keys to set the time period required to delay the startup of network communications for the machine, then press [OK].

You can enter the value from 0 to 300 (seconds).

 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
 
       
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn off the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it on.


 

 
Additional Network Settings

Depending your network environment, additional network settings may be required.


Remark
  • It is recommended that the network administrator perform the following procedures.
  • To set the machine to a network with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

TCP/IP Settings (IPv4)

DNS Settings (IPv4 Settings)


IP Address Range Settings (IPv4 Settings)


WINS Settings (LASER CLASS 830i Only)


PASV mode for FTP Setting (LASER CLASS 830i Only)


FTP Extension Settings (LASER CLASS 830i Only)


HTTP Settings


Port Number Settings


RX MAC Address Settings


Proxy Settings (LASER CLASS 830i Only)


TCP/IP Settings (IPv6)


Remark
  • You cannot use the functions of IPv6 without using the functions of IPv4.

DNS Settings (IPv6 Settings)


IP Address Range Settings (IPv6 Settings)


HTTP Settings (IPv6 Settings)


 

You can restrict the use of Remote UI.


Remark

Port Number Settings (IPv6 Settings)


 

Depending on your network environment, you can change the port number for each protocol.


Remark

 

 
DNS Settings (IPv4 Settings)

Return to Overview

DNS (Domain Name Service) is a service used for associating a host name (which is a name of a computer or a printer on a TCP/IPv4 network) with a unique IPv4 address.


Remark
  • To set the machine to a network with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IPv4 SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DNS SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DNS SERVER SET>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRIM. DNS SERVER>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the IPv4 address of a primary DNS server, then press [OK].

If you do not need to specify secondary DNS server, Press [Back] to skip to step 12.

  • If [BOOTP] or [DHCP] is set to [On], the IP address of a DNS server you set manually will be overwritten.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SECOND DNS SERVER>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the IPv4 address of a secondary DNS server, then press [OK].

If you do not want to set up a DNS secondary server, enter <0.0.0.0>.

  • If [BOOTP] or [DHCP] is set to <On>, the IP address of a DNS server you set manually will be overwritten.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <HOST/DOMAIN NAME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <HOST NAME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the desired host name, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DOMAIN NAME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the network domain name, then press [OK].
  • If [BOOTP] or [DHCP] is set to [On], the host name and domain name you set manually will be overwritten.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DNS DYAMIC SET>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <DNS DYNA. UPDATE> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<Off>: Does not use the DNS server dynamic update function.
<On>: Use the DNS server dynamic update function.
  • The DNS dynamic update function enables the machine to register its IP address, host name, and domain name to the DNS server automatically. This function is available in the environment where there is a dynamic DNS server.
  • To use the DNS dynamic update function, enter the IP address of a DNS server, and the host name and domain name of the machine.
  • If you have a DHCP server running Windows 2000 Server that uses the DHCP service and want to register the machine's DNS record, configure the following settings in the DHCP server:
  • Under the DHCP server, right-click the [Scope] icon → click [Properties]. In the [DNS] sheet of the displayed dialog box, select [Automatically update DHCP client information in DNS] → [Update DNS only if DHCP client requests].
  • If you have a DHCP server running Windows 2003 Server that uses the DHCP service and want to register the machine's DNS record, configure the following settings in the DHCP server:
  • Under the DHCP server, right-click the [Scope] icon → click [Properties]. In the [DNS] sheet of the displayed dialog box, select [Enable DNS dynamic updates according to the settings below] → [Dynamically update DNS A and PTR records only if requested by the DHCP clients].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
 
       
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn off the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it on.


 

 
IP Address Range Settings (IPv4 Settings)

Return to Overview

You can restrict the machine access from the computers on the network by specifying the range of IP addresses allowed/ forbidden to access the machine.


Remark
  • You can maintain security by setting the range of IP addresses for computers that can obtain access to the machine.
  • Once you set the range of IP addresses of computers on which items for the machine can be set or browsed, it is not possible to use the Remote UI on computers whose IP addresses are not allowed; a utility on the computers cannot be used to set or browse detailed information concerning the machine.
  • Once you set the range of IP addresses of computers from which data (print/fax/I-fax job) can be sent to the machine, the machine rejects data sent from computers whose IP addresses are not allowed. (Sending I-fax documents from a computer is available only for the LASER CLASS 830i.)
  • To set the machine to a network with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IPv4 SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SET IP ADD RANGE>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select from <IP ADDRESS 1> through <IP ADDRESS 10>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PERMIT/REJECT>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REJECT> or <PERMIT>, then press [OK].
<Reject>: Restricts the access to the machine (printing/PC faxing/Remote UI) from the computers with certain IP addresses.
<Permit>: Permits the access to the machine (printing/PC faxing/Remote UI) from the computers with certain IP addresses.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <START IP ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the start IP address, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <END IP ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the end IP address, then press [OK].

To enter another IP address range, repeat step 8 to 14.

 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
 
       
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn off the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it on.


 

 
WINS Settings (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview

WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) is a service used for associating a NetBIOS name (which is a name of a computer or a printer on a NetBIOS network) with a unique IP address.


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CONFIGURE WINS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <WINS RESOLUTION>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<OFF>: Does not resolve the name with WINS. Skip to step 10.
<ON>: Resolves the name with WINS.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to <WINS SERVER>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the IPv4 address of a WINS, then press [OK].
  • If DHCP determines the IP address, the IP address obtained from a DHCP server is overwritten with the IP address of a WINS server (obtained from the DHCP server), whenever possible.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<Off>: Does not resolve the name with WINS. Skip to step 10.
<On:>: Resolves the name with WINS.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to <WINS SERVER>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the IP address of a WINS, then press [OK].
  • If DHCP determines the IP address, the IP address obtained from a DHCP server is overwritten with the IP address of a WINS server (obtained from the DHCP server), whenever possible.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
 
       
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn off the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and then, turn it on.


 

 
PASV mode for FTP Setting (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • Whether you use the PASV mode for FTP depends on the network environment you are using and the settings of the file server you are sending to. Before specifying the PASV mode for FTP, consult your network administrator.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <USE PASV MODE>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<OFF>: Disables the PASV mode for FTP.
<ON>: Enables the PASV mode for FTP.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
 
       
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn off the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it on.


 

 
FTP Extension Settings (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, set the FTP server address specified in imageWARE Gateway as the destination. Set [FTP Extension] to [ON]. Using imageWARE Document Manager and the Send function of the machine enables you to manage digitized paper documents and computer data on the network. For more information on imageWARE Document Manager, see the appropriate imageWARE Gateway documentation.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FTP EXTENSION>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<OFF>: Disables the FTP extension.
<ON>: Enables the FTP extension.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
 
       
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn off the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it on.


 

 
HTTP Settings

Return to Overview

You can restrict the use of Remote UI.


Remark
  • To set the machine to a network with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <USE HTTP>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<ON>: Uses the Remote UI.
<OFF>: Does not use the Remote UI.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
 
       
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn off the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it on.


 

 
Port Number Settings

Return to Overview

Depending on your network environment, you can change the port number for each protocol.


Remark
  • To set the machine to a network with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PORT NO.>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the protocol of which you want to change the port number (LPD, RAW, HTTP, SMTP RX, POP3 RX, FTP SENDING, SMTP TX or SNMP), then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the port number, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
 
       
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn off the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it on.


 

 
RX MAC Address Settings

Return to Overview

You can restrict the machine access from the computers on the network by specifying the MAC addresses of the computers allowed/forbidden to access the machine.


Remark
  • To set the machine to a network with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PERMIT RX MAC ADD>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<OFF>: Disables a MAC address filter.
<ON>: Enables a MAC address filter.
  • If you select <ON>, you will be unable to access from MAC addresses which have not been specified.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select from <PERMIT RX ADD1> through <PERMIT RX ADD5>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the MAC address of the computer allowed to access the machine, then press [OK].

Repeat step 7 and 8 to specify other MAC addresses.

 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
 
       
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn off the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it on.


 

 
Proxy Settings (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PROXY SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <USE PROXY> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <SERVER ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter a proxy server IP address or FQDN, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <PORT NO.> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the port number of a proxy server, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <USE SAME DOMAIN> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<ON>: Uses a proxy in the same domain.
<OFF>: Does not use a proxy in the same domain.
 
     
  1. If you want to use proxy authentication, confirm that <AUTH SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].

Otherwise, press [Additional Functions] repeatedly until <PROXY SETTINGS> in <TCP/IP SETTINGS> is displayed, then go to step 20.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <USER> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the user name to use for proxy authentication, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <PASSWORD> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the password to use for proxy authentication, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
 
       
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn off the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it on.


 

 
DNS Settings (IPv6 Settings)

Return to Overview

DNS (Domain Name Service) is a service used for associating a host name (which is a name of a computer or a printer on a TCP/IPv6 network) with a unique IPv6 address.


Remark
  • To set the machine to a network with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IPv6 SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DNS SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DNS SERVER SET>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRIM. DNS SERVER>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the IPv6 address of a primary DNS server, then press [OK].

If you do not want to set up a DNS secondary server, Press [Back] to skip to step 12.

  • You cannot enter a multicast address or address composed entirely of zeros in [Primary DNS Server] or [Secondary DNS Server].
  • If you set Use DHCPv6 to <On>, the IPv6 address of a DNS server you set manually will be overwritten.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SECOND DNS SERVER>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the IPv6 address of a secondary DNS server, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <HOST/DOMAIN NAME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <SAME HOST/DOMAIN> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<OFF>: Sets a different host name or domain name for IPv6 communication. Proceed to step 15.
<ON>: Sets the same host name or domain name used with IPv4 communication for IPv6 communication. Press [Back] to skip to step 19.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <HOST NAME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the desired host name, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DOMAIN NAME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the network domain name, then press [OK].
  • If you set Use DHCPv6 to <On>, the domain name you set manually will be overwritten.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DNS DYAMIC SET>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <DNS DYNA. UPDATE> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<OFF>: Does not use the DNS server dynamic update function. Skip to step 27.
<ON>: Enables you to automatically register the IPv6 address, host name, and domain name set for the machine in the DNS server using dynamic DNS updating if your environment includes a dynamic DNS server. Proceed to step 21.
 
     
  1. Confirm that <REG. MANUAL ADD> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<ON>: Registers a manual address in the DNS server using dynamic DNS updating.
<OFF>: Does not register a manual address in the DNS server using dynamic DNS updating.
 
     
  1. Confirm that <REG. STATEFUL ADD> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
<ON>: Registers a stateful address in the DNS server using dynamic DNS updating.
<OFF>: Does not register a stateful address in the DNS server using dynamic DNS updating.
  • Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 do not support DHCPv6 servers.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
 
       
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn off the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it on.


 

 
IP Address Range Settings (IPv6 Settings)

Return to Overview

You can restrict the machine access from the computers on the network by specifying the range of IP addresses allowed/ forbidden to access the machine.


Remark
  • You can maintain security by setting the range of IP addresses for computers that can obtain access to the machine.
  • Once you set the range of IP addresses of computers on which items for the machine can be set or browsed, it is not possible to use the Remote UI on computers whose IP addresses are not allowed; a utility on the computers cannot be used to set or browse detailed information concerning the machine.
  • Once you set the range of IP addresses of computers from which data (print/fax/I-fax job) can be sent to the machine, the machine rejects data sent from computers whose IP addresses are not allowed. (Sending I-fax documents from a computer is available only for the LASER CLASS 830i.)
  • To set the machine to a network with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IPv6 SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SET IP ADD RANGE>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select from <IP ADDRESS 1> through <IP ADDRESS 10>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PERMIT/REJECT>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REJECT> or <PERMIT>, then press [OK].
<Reject>: Restricts the access to the machine (printing/PC faxing/Remote UI) from the computers with certain IP addresses.
<Permit>: Permits the access to the machine (printing/PC faxing/Remote UI) from the computers with certain IP addresses.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <START IP ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the start IP address, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <END IP ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the end IP address, then press [OK].

To enter another IP address range, repeat step 8 to 14.

 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
 
       
  1. Restart the machine.

Turn off the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it on.


 

 
Checking Network Connection

You can check if the network connections are properly set.


Remark
  • To set the machine to a network with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

IPv4 (Checking Network Connection)

IPv6 (Checking Network Connection)

 

 
IPv4 (Checking Network Connection)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To set the machine to a network with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IPv4 SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PING COMMAND>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <PING COMMAND> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Enter the desired IPv4 address existing on the network using the numeric keys, then press [OK].
  • If you set the startup time of the machine's network function by following the procedure in "Startup Time Settings," execute the PING command only after the time set as the startup time passes.
  • If you connect the machine to a switching hub, the machine may not be able to connect to a network even though your network settings are appropriate. This problem may be resolved by delaying the startup of network communications for the machine. See "Startup Time Settings," for information on how to set up the startup time.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
IPv6 (Checking Network Connection)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To set the machine to a network with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TCP/IP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IPv6 SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PING COMMAND>, then press [OK].
 
       
  1. Check the following.
  • Select [PING COMMAND], enter the desired IPv6 address existing on the network, then press [OK].
  • Select [HOST NAME], enter the machine's host name, then press [OK].
  • If you set the startup time of the machine's network function by following the procedure in "Startup Time Settings," execute the PING command only after the time set as the startup time passes.
  • If you connect the machine to a switching hub, the machine may not be able to connect to a network even though your network settings are appropriate. This problem may be resolved by delaying the startup of network communications for the machine. See "Startup Time Settings," for information on how to set up the startup time.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Machine Management

The machine enables you to use any of the following software to check the status and to specify the settings on your computer.

  • Web browser (Remote UI)
  • NetSpot Device Installer (Canon utility software included in the User Software CD)

Remark
  • To set the machine to a network with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

Machine Management Using Web Browser (Remote UI)

You can use Remote UI installed in the machine to manage it on a web browser.
For using Remote UI, see "Using the Remote UI."


Machine Management Using NetSpot Device Installer

NetSpot Device Installer is utility software for specifying the initial settings of Canon devices connected to a network. Available on the CD-ROM, NetSpot Device Installer can be accessed directly without installation, enabling network users to quickly and easily specify the initial settings of network devices.
For instructions on how to use NetSpot Device Installer, see the online help for NetSpot Device Installer.


 

 
Settings/Management from a PC

Settings/Management from a PC Instructions

To use this function, an optional network printer kit is required. (A network printer kit is standard-equipped for the LASER CLASS 830i.)


 

 
System Requirements

The Remote UI has been confirmed to work in the following system environments.


Remark
  • To use the Remote UI with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

Windows

  • OS
  • Microsoft Windows 98/98SE
  • Microsoft Windows Me
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
  • Microsoft Windows XP
  • Microsoft Windows Vista
  • Web Browser
  • Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 SP1 or later
  • Netscape Communicator/Navigator 6.0 or later, except Netscape Communicator 6

Macintosh

  • OS
  • Mac OS 8.6 or later, until Mac OS X Classic
  • Web Browser
  • Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 SP1 or later

 

 
Using the Remote UI

The Remote UI software enables you to access and manage the machine connected to a network using a web browser.

  • Check the machine status from a network computer
  • Set and control the machine from a computer

Remark
  • To use the Remote UI with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

Starting the Remote UI

 

 
Starting the Remote UI

Return to Overview


Remark
  • Before you start the Remote UI, select <VIEW IP ADDRESS> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> located in the <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, and verify the IP address of the machine. If you do not know the IP address, consult with your network administrator. (See "Checking Network Connection.")
  • To use the Remote UI with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. Start the web browser.

 
 
  1. Enter the IP address of the machine in [Address] or [Location] → press [Enter] on the keyboard.

The Remote UI screen appears.


 
 
  1. Enter the ID and password.
For No Management mode: Select [Administrator Mode] or [End-User Mode] → enter the password or owner name.
For Department ID Management mode: Enter the department ID and password.
For User Management mode: Enter the User ID and password.

 
 
  1. Click [OK].

[Device] - [Status] page is displayed when you logon the Remote UI.

A Displays the current status of the machine, etc.
B Takes you to the Remote UI top page.
C Updates (refreshes) the currently displayed screen with the latest information.
D Displays the online help for the Remote UI.
E Displays the current status of print jobs, etc.
F Takes you back to the top of a current page.
G Displays a list of settings for the machine, etc.
H Displays one-touch or coded speed dialing data (fax numbers, etc.) registered on the machine.
Takes you back to the previous page.

 

 
Displaying Device Status and Information

You can view the current status of the machine and also information about the administrator in charge of the machine, the installation location and various machine settings.


Remark
  • To use the Remote UI with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. Click [Device] → select the item you want to display from the menu that appears under [Device].

[Status] Displays the remaining amount of paper in the various paper sources and any error messages. To check details of errors, click [Error Information].
[Information] Displays information related to the machine, such as the system manager's information and the location of the machine.
[Features] Displays the functions that are available with the current system configuration.
[Network] Displays information about the network interface and any network protocols that are enabled. If you are using Administrator Mode, you can also adjust these settings.
[Counter Check] Displays the total number of pages that have been output for printing, copying, and received job printing.
  • If you are changing the Network Settings, the machine must be restarted to enable the settings. Turn off the main power switch of the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and turn the power back on.

 

 
Job Management

The Remote UI enables you to manage print jobs. It also enables you to view the sending and receiving results of fax jobs.


Remark
  • To use the Remote UI with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

Managing Print Jobs

Viewing the Print Log

Viewing the Activity Log

 

 
Managing Print Jobs

Return to Overview

You can use the Remote UI to manage print jobs that are being processed by the machine, or are held in the print queue.


Remark
  • If [Permit End-user's Job Operation] is not selected in [Register ID and Password] or [Register Password] in [Edit] in [System Settings] under [Add.Func.], you cannot delete any print jobs when the machine is in the End-User Mode. If [Permit End-user's Job Operation] is selected, you can delete print jobs for which you have owner privileges. (See "Customizing System Settings.")
  • To use the Remote UI with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. Click [Job Status] → select [Print Job] from the menu that appears under [Job Status].

A list of print jobs being waiting or processed by the machine appears.


 
 
  1. To delete a print job, select the [Select] check box next to the desired job → click [].
  • You cannot recover the job once it is deleted.

 

 
Viewing the Print Log

Return to Overview

The Remote UI enables you to view the [Print Log] of print jobs.
The [Print Log] shows up to 128 recent print jobs.


Remark
  • If you set <CHECKING THE LOG> to <OFF> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, the [Activity Log] does not appear. (See "Checking the Job Log.")
  • To use the Remote UI with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. Click [Job Status] → select [Print Log] from the menu that appears under [Job Status].

The [Print Log] appears displaying information about print jobs that have already been processed by the machine.


 

 
Viewing the Activity Log

Return to Overview

The Remote UI enables you to view the [Activity Log] of fax jobs. The [Activity Log] shows up to 40 recent facsimile transactions.


Remark
  • If you set <CHECKING THE LOG> to <OFF> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, the [Activity Log] does not appear. (See "Checking the Job Log.")
  • To use the Remote UI with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. Click [Job Status] → select [Activity Log] from the menu that appears under [Job Status].

The [Activity Log] appears displaying information about fax jobs that have already been processed by the machine.


 

 
Managing the Address Book

The Remote UI enables you to make additions and changes to each item of the Address.


Remark
  • You can also access these setting menus from the operation panel of the machine. For details, see "Machine Settings."
  • To use the Remote UI with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. Click [Address] → select [Favorites Button], [One-touch Speed Dial] or [Coded Dial] from the menu that appears under [Address].


 
  • Click the number or the name to display the current address information.

 
  • To edit the information, click [Edit] → make the necessary changes on the Change Address screen → click [OK].


 
  • Click [None] or any number for which [None] is displayed as the name.

 
  • Specify the type of address from [Type] → enter the necessary information → click [OK].

 
  • For group dialing, select [Group] from [Type] → enter a group name in [Group Name] → click [Address Book] under [Members List].

 
  • Select [One-touch Speed Dial] or [Coded Dial] from the drop-down list → select the check box next to the number to register for the group dialing → click [OK].
 
  • Make sure that the registered addresses are displayed in [Members List] → click [OK].


 
  • Select the check box next to the number to delete → click [].

  • You cannot recover the address once it is deleted.

 

 
Customizing System Settings

Remark
  • To use the Remote UI with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

Customizing System Information

 

 
Customizing System Information

Return to Overview

The Remote UI enables you to specify the machine's system settings.


Remark
  • You can also access the System Setting from the Operation Panel of the machine. For details, see "Machine Settings."
  • To use the Remote UI with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. Click [Add.Func.] → select [System Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add.Func.] → click [Edit].


 
 
  1. Enter the necessary information → click [OK].


 
  • Click [Restrict the Send Function].

 
  • Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].


 
  • Click [Register ID and Password].

 
  • Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].

Set ID and Password: Sets the System Manager ID and Password to protect the contents of <SYSTEM SETTINGS>. Once the System Manager ID and Password is set, they must be entered when you access the <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu from the operation panel, or when you logon the Remote UI.
System Manager ID: Sets the System Manager ID (seven digits maximum).
Set/ Change Password: Select this check box to set a password for the System manager ID.
System Manager Password: Enter a number (seven digits maximum).
Confirm: Enter the password again. If the number you enter here is different from the number entered for [System Manager Password], an error dialog box appears.
Permit End-user's Job Operation: Select this check box to permit deleting print jobs for which you have owner privileges when the machine is in the End-User Mode from the Remote UI.

 

 
Specifying Forwarding Settings

The Remote UI enables you to automatically forward received documents to specified addresses. To use this function, you need to specify the forwarding settings in two ways, and depending on the settings the function will work differently:

  • Forwarding conditions are set: the machine will forward only documents that meet specified conditions.
  • Forwarding conditions are not set: the machine will forward all received documents.

Remark
  • [Forwarding Settings] is displayed only when you are in the Administrator Mode.
  • To use the Remote UI with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. Click [Add.Func.] → [Forwarding Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add.Func.].


 
  • Click [] (Add New Conditions).

 
  • Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].

Receive Type: Select [Fax] or [I-Fax] for the receiving mode.
Condition Name: Enter a name for the forwarding condition. If you select [Enable This Forwarding Condition], this forwarding condition will be enabled.
Forwarding Conditions: The settings here enable you to specify the forwarding conditions that the received documents must meet in order to be forwarded.
The setting items differ depending on the type of the receiving mode:

Items for Fax:

[disregarded]: Disregards the Fax Number information as a forwarding condition.
[does not exist]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information does not exist.
[equals]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information matches all of the characters entered.
[differs from]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information differs from the characters entered.
[begins with]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information begins with the characters entered.
[ends with]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information ends with the characters entered.
[contains]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information contains the characters entered.
[does not contain]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information does not contain the characters entered.

Items for I-Fax:

[disregarded]: Disregards the Destination, From, or Subject information as forwarding conditions.
[equals]: Forwards the document if the From or Subject information matches all of the characters entered.
[differs from]: Forwards the document if the Destination, From, or Subject information differs from the characters entered.
[begins with]: Forwards the document if the Destination, From, or Subject information begins with the characters entered.
[ends with]: Forwards the document if the Destination, From, or Subject information ends with the characters entered.
[contains]: Forwards the document if the Destination, From, or Subject information contains the characters entered.
[does not contain]: Forwards the document if the Destination, From, or Subject information does not contain the characters entered.

Forwarding Destination: Specify an address from the Address Book by clicking [Address Book] → select the desired address from the displayed list → click [OK].
Forwarding Settings: If you are forwarding documents to an email address or a file server, you can set their file format to [TIFF] or [PDF].
If you select [Divide into Pages], you can forward files as divided pages.

 
  • Click [Forwarding without Conditions].

 
  • Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].


 
 
  1. Select the receiving mode from [Receive Type].

If you select [All], all the forwarding settings stored in the machine are displayed.


 
  • Click the condition name to display the current forwarding setting.

 
  • To change the setting, make the necessary changes → click [OK].


 
  • Select the check box next to the forwarding condition to delete → click [] (Delete the Selected Conditions).

  • You cannot recover the setting once it is deleted.
 
  • To change the setting, make the necessary changes → click [OK].

 
  • Click [Print Forwarding Conditions List].


 

 
Managing the Department/User ID from a Computer

By registering a department/user ID and password for each department/user, you can manage the machine by limiting its use to only those who enter the correct department/user ID and password. Department/user IDs and passwords for up to 100 (LASER CLASS 810)/1000 (LASER CLASS 830i) departments/users can be registered. You can also set the page limit for each department to copy, print, and scan for sending documents.


Remark
  • You can also access these setting menus from the operation panel of the machine. For details, see "Machine Settings."
  • [Department ID/User Management] is displayed only when you are in the Administrator Mode.
  • When you use Department ID Management, you need to set both the System Manager ID and password to restrict the access to the <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu from the operation panel, or using the Remote UI. Otherwise, all users will be considered as System Manager, and anyone can access the <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu from the operation panel, or use the Remote UI without restriction. (See "Customizing System Information.")
  • When you use User ID Management, you need to register a user ID with the administrator privilege to restrict the access to the <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu from the operation panel, or using the Remote UI. Otherwise, all users will be considered as System Manager, and any one can access the <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu from the operation panel, or use the Remote UI without restriction.
  • To use the Remote UI with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. Click [Add.Func.] → [Department ID/User Management] from the menu that appears under [Add.Func.] → click [Settings].


 
 
  1. Click [Department ID Management Settings] or [User Management Settings] to register a new department or user.


 
 
  1. Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].


Department ID registration screen

Department ID registration screen:

Department ID: Enter the Department ID number (seven digits maximum).
Set Password: Select this check box to set a password for the Department ID.
Password: Enter a number (seven digits maximum).
Confirm: Enter the password again. If the number you enter here is different from the number entered for [Password], an error dialog box appears.
Page Limits: You can restrict the number of pages by the total of prints, copies, scan and color scan mode, or by limiting each function separately. Select the item, then use the numeric keys to enter the number of pages.


User ID registration screen

User ID registration screen:

User ID: Enter a log-on name (32 characters maximum).
Set Password: Select this check box to set a password for the User ID.
Password: Enter a character (32 characters maximum).
Confirm: Enter the password again. If the character you enter here is different from the character entered for [Password], an error dialog box appears.
Department ID: Enter the Department ID number the user belongs to (seven digits maximum). If the Department ID Management mode is set, be sure to assign the user to a department. Otherwise, the user cannot log on to the machine.
Set Password: Select this check box to set a password for the Department ID.
Password: Enter a number (seven digits maximum).
Confirm: Enter the password again. If the number you enter here is different from the number entered for [Password], an error dialog box appears.
User Type: Classify the user in two categories [User] (End-User Mode) or [Administrator] (Administrator Mode).
Display Name: Enter the user name.
E-mail Address: Enter the e-mail address of the user.

 
 
  1. Click [Settings].


 
 
  1. Select [Enable Department ID Management] or [Enable User Management] → click [OK] to activate the management mode.

[Enable Department ID Management] When this check box is selected, Department ID Management becomes enabled. When enabled, the user must enter the Department ID and password in order to execute jobs, perform operations on Remote UI, and use functions such as Copy, Fax, and Scan. (This enables you to keep track of the total number of prints by department and set impression limits.)
[Enable User Management] When this check box is selected, User Management becomes enabled. When enabled, the user must enter the User ID and password in order to execute jobs, perform operations on Remote UI, and use functions, such as Copy, Fax, and Scan. (This enables you to keep track of the total number of prints by User and set impression limits.) When you enable both Department ID Management and User ID Management, you need to assign a Department ID for each user. A user without a Department ID cannot use the machine.
[Accept Print Jobs with Unknown Ids] Select the check box to permit print jobs with unknown IDs. [Clear All Counts] Click this button to reset the counter to zero for all departments.

 
  • Click [] or the user name to display the current department or user information.

  • You can click [Change List View] to switch the management list between department and user ID.
  • [Change List View] appears when both the department ID management and user ID management are activated.
  • When only the user ID management is activated, you can view and edit the user ID. In this case, you can view, edit and delete the user ID even if the department ID management is not activated.
 
  • To edit the information, make the necessary changes → click [OK].


 
  • Select the check box next to the department/user ID to delete → click [] (Delete).

  • You can click [Change List View] to switch the management list between department and user ID.
  • [Change List View] appears when both the department ID management and user ID management are activated.
  • When only the user ID management is activated, you can view and edit the user ID. In this case, you can view, edit and delete the user ID even if the department ID management is not activated.

 

 
Import/Export Function

The Remote UI enables you to save the Address Book and other settings information, such as a file that can be loaded into the machine when needed. This function is useful when you want to use the same settings on another machine, and for backing up. The Import/Export function is intended for data exchange, and is available only through the Remote UI.


Remark
  • The Import/Export operation may take more than a few minutes to complete. Do not turn the machine's main power OFF until the operation is complete. Otherwise, the machine may malfunction.
  • Do not operate the machine while importing or exporting an address book.
  • If the machine is in the Sleep mode, press [Energy Saver] on the operation panel to cancel the Sleep mode before performing an Import operation.
  • During an Export operation, the screen display does not change until the operation is complete. Do not click [Start Export] while the hourglass or pointer indicates that the operation is still being processed.
  • [Import/Export] is displayed only when you are in the Administrator Mode.
  • To use the Remote UI with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

Saving the Address Book

Loading an Address Book

Saving User Management Data in Files (Export)

Loading User Management Data Files (Overwrite/Import)

Saving Additional Functions Settings in Files (Export)

Loading Additional Functions Settings Files (Overwrite/Import)

 

 
Saving the Address Book

Return to Overview

You can store the Address Book as a file in your computer.


Remark
  • To use the Remote UI with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. Click [Add.Func.] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add.Func.] → click [Address Book].


 
 
  1. Click [Start Export].


 
 
  1. Follow the instructions on the screen to specify the location where you want to save the file.

The file is saved in the specified location.


 

 
Loading an Address Book

Return to Overview

You can load address books into the machine from saved files.


Remark
  • If the machine is in the Sleep mode, press [Energy Saver] on the operation panel to cancel the Sleep mode before performing an Import operation.
  • When you register the contents of a new file, the currently registered addresses are overwritten by the new address list.
  • You can register up to 200 (LASER CLASS 810) / 500 (LASER CLASS 830i) addresses in the Address Book. Each address is treated as a separate item.
  • You cannot import the group dialing information which contains another group dialing.
  • When Delayed Sending is set on the machine, do not import an address book.
  • To use the Remote UI with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. Click [Add.Func.] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add.Func.] → click [Address Book].


 
 
  1. Click [Import].


 
 
  1. Click [Browse] → select the file to import → click [OK].

  • Do not execute any other jobs while importing an address book.

 

 
Saving User Management Data in Files (Export)

Return to Overview

You can store User Management Data as a file in your computer.


Remark
  • User type of all exported data is the End-User.
  • To use the Remote UI with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. Click [Add.Func.] → [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add.Func.] → click [User Management Data].


 
 
  1. Click [Start Export].


 
 
  1. Follow the instructions on the screen to specify the location where you want to save the file.

The file is saved in the specified location.


 

 
Loading User Management Data Files (Overwrite/Import)

Return to Overview

You can load User Management Data into the machine from saved files.


Remark
  • If the machine is in the Sleep mode, press [Energy Saver] on the operation panel to cancel the Sleep mode before performing an Import operation.
  • Imported user data is registered or overwritten as the End-User Mode.
  • To use the Remote UI with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. Click [Add.Func.] → [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add.Func.] → click [User Management Data].


 
 
  1. Click [Import].


 
 
  1. Click [Browse] → select the file to import click [OK].

  • Do not import any files while the machine is executing other jobs.
  • If overlapped User IDs are registered in imported data, those IDs will be registered in the machine as being overlapped. Among those overlapped data, the last registered one is available.

 

 
Saving Additional Functions Settings in Files (Export)

Return to Overview

You can store Additional Functions settings as a file in your computer.


Remark
  • To use the Remote UI with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. Click [Add.Func.] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add.Func.] → click [Additional Functions].


 
 
  1. Click [Start Export].


 
 
  1. Follow the instructions on the screen to specify the location where you want to save the file.

The file is saved in the specified location.


 

 
Loading Additional Functions Settings Files (Overwrite/Import)

Return to Overview

You can load Additional Functions settings into the machine from saved files.


Remark
  • If the machine is in the Sleep mode, press [Energy Saver] on the operation panel to cancel the Sleep mode before performing an Import operation.
  • To use the Remote UI with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. Click [Add.Func.] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add.Func.] → click [Additional Functions].


 
 
  1. Click [Import].


 
 
  1. Click [Browse] → select the file to import → click [OK].

  • When Additional Functions settings are imported, Network Settings are automatically overwritten.
  • The machine must be restarted to enable the imported Additional Functions settings. After importing, turn OFF the main power switch of the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and turn the power back on.
  • After importing Additional Functions settings, the Remote UI cannot be used to perform other operations until the machine is restarted.
  • Do not import any files while the machine is executing other jobs.

 

 
Device Custom Settings

The machine's custom settings can be edited with the Remote UI.
The following procedure shows how to customize the machine's settings from the Remote UI.


Remark
  • You can also access these setting menus from the Operation Panel of the machine. For details, see "Machine Settings."
  • The following setting is enabled not only for sending faxes, but also when sending to an e-mail, I-fax, or file server destination.
  • [Add. Func.] → [Common Settings] → <Send/Receive Settings> → <Fax Settings> → [TX Settings] → <Stamp Document> → ([Direct & Memory TX] or [Direct TX])
  • To use the Remote UI with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 
  1. Click [Add.Func.] → select [Common Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add.Func.] → click the type of custom setting that you want to specify.


 
 
  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].


The above screen shot shows [Common Settings].

  • If you are changing the Network Settings, the machine must be restarted to enable the settings. Turn OFF the main power switch of the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and turn the power back ON.

 

 
What This Machine Can Do

What This Machine Can Do Instructions

Some functions may not be available, depending on whether the optional network printer kit is attached. (A network printer kit is standard-equipped for the LASER CLASS 830i.)

Some functions are not available even if the optional network printer kit is installed when using the LASER CLASS 810.


 

 
Machine Components

  A ADF (Automatic Document Feeder)
Holds documents and feeds them automatically into the scanning area.
  B Slide guides
Adjust to the width of the document.
  C Document feeder tray
Holds documents.
  D Document delivery tray
Receives documents.
  E Paper delivery tray
Receives copies, prints and faxes.
  F Paper stopper
Prevents the paper from falling off the paper delivery tray.
Open the stopper from its original position for A4/LTR size paper. For LGL size paper, pull out the extension first, and then open the stopper.
  G Operation panel
Machine controls.
  H Paper cassette
Holds the paper supply.
  I Stacking support
Helps prevent paper curl on the output tray. Open as far as it goes when using curl-prone paper.

  J Left cover
Open this cover when replacing the toner cartridge or clearing paper jams.
  K Scanning area
Scans documents from the ADF.
  L Multi-purpose tray
Feeds non-standard size or thick/thin type paper stacks.
  M Slide guides for multi-purpose tray
Adjusts to the width of the paper.
  N Multi-purpose tray extension
Pull out to load paper stack.

  O USB port
Connect the USB (Universal Serial Bus) cable.
  P Ethernet port
Connect the network cable.
For the LASER CLASS 810, the machine is equipped with an Ethernet port if an optional printer kit is attached.
  Q Telephone line jack
Connect the external telephone cable.
  R External device jack
Connect an external device.
  S Handset jack
Connect an optional handset cable.
  T Power socket
Connect the power cord.
  U Main power switch
Turns the power on or off.

 

 
Operation Panel

Right Side of the Operation Panel

LASER CLASS 830i (Right Side of the Operation Panel)


LASER CLASS 810 (Right Side of the Operation Panel)


Left Side of the Operation Panel

LASER CLASS 830i (Left Side of the Operation Panel)


LASER CLASS 810 (Left Side of the Operation Panel)


 

 
LASER CLASS 830i (Right Side of the Operation Panel)

Return to Overview



 
A [Additional Function] key
Press to select or cancel the modes in Additional Functions.
B [Paper Select] key
Press to select a paper source (paper cassette or multi-purpose tray).
C [Density] key
Press to adjust the density for copy or documents you send.
D [2-Sided] key
Press to set two-sided copying or faxing.
E Density indicator
Indicates the density you set in the Copy/Fax mode.
F Image Quality indicator
Indicates the image quality you set in the Copy/Fax mode.
G [View Settings] key
Press to confirm settings of the copy function.
H [Serial No.] key
Press to confirm the serial number.
I [Log In/Out (ID)] key
Press to operate the machine when the ID management is activated. Also press to enable the ID management when you finished using the machine.
J [Copy] key
Press to switch to Copy mode.
L [Clear] key
Press to clear entered alphanumeric characters.
M [Energy Saver] key
Press to set or cancel the Sleep mode manually. The key lights green when the Sleep mode is set, and goes off when the mode is canceled.
N [Stop] key
Press to cancel machine operations.
O Error indicator
Flashes or lights up when an error has occurred.
P [Start] key
Press to start copying, scanning and sending faxes.
Q Processing/Data indicator
Flashes during sending or receiving faxes. Lights when the machine has waiting jobs and stores the data in memory.
R [SYMBOLS] key
Press to enter symbols.
S Numeric keys
Enter letters and numbers.
T [Tone] key
Press to switch from rotary pulse to tone dialing.
U [Reset] key
Press to return the machine to standby mode.
V [Fax/Send] key
Press to switch to the Fax/Send mode.
W Color indicator
Lights up when color sending is selected.
X [Image Quality] key
Press to select image quality for copy or fax.
Y [] key
Press to increase the value for various settings. Also press to see the next item in the menu.
Z [OK] key
Press to accept a set function or mode. Also press and hold to print a sample page when you are in the copy mode.
a [] key
Press to decrease the value for various settings. Also press to see the previous item in the menu.
b [Back] key
Press to return to the previous screen.
c LCD display
Displays messages and prompts during operation. Displays selection, text, and numbers when adjusting the settings.
d [System Monitor] key
Press to check fax transmission, print, copy, or report output status.
   

 

 
LASER CLASS 810 (Right Side of the Operation Panel)

Return to Overview



 
A [Additional Function] key
Press to select or cancel the modes in Additional Functions.
B [Paper Select] key
Press to select a paper source (paper cassette or multi-purpose tray).
C [Density] key
Press to adjust the density for copy or documents you send.
D [2-Sided] key
Press to set two-sided copying or faxing.
E Density indicator
Indicates the density you set in the Copy/Fax mode.
F Image Quality indicator
Indicates the image quality you set in the Copy/Fax mode.
G [View Settings] key
Press to confirm settings of the copy function.
H [Serial No.] key
Press to confirm the serial number.
I [Log In/Out (ID)] key
Press to operate the machine when the ID management is activated. Also press to enable the ID management when you finished using the machine.
K [Copy/Fax] key
Press to switch to the Copy/Fax mode.
L [Clear] key
Press to clear entered alphanumeric characters.
M [Energy Saver] key
Press to set or cancel the Sleep mode manually. The key lights green when the Sleep mode is set, and goes off when the mode is canceled.
N [Stop] key
Press to cancel machine operations.
O Error indicator
Flashes or lights up when an error has occurred.
P [Start] key
Press to start copying, scanning and sending faxes.
Q Processing/Data indicator
Flashes during sending or receiving faxes. Lights when the machine has waiting jobs and stores the data in memory.
R [SYMBOLS] key
Press to enter symbols.
S Numeric keys
Enter letters and numbers.
T [Tone] key
Press to switch from rotary pulse to tone dialing.
U [Reset] key
Press to return the machine to standby mode.
X [Image Quality] key
Press to select image quality for copy or fax.
Y [] key
Press to increase the value for various settings. Also press to see the next item in the menu.
Z [OK] key
Press to accept a set function or mode. Also press and hold to print a sample page when you are in the copy mode.
a [] key
Press to decrease the value for various settings. Also press to see the previous item in the menu.
b [Back] key
Press to return to the previous screen.
c LCD display
Displays messages and prompts during operation. Displays selection, text, and numbers when adjusting the settings.
d [System Monitor] key
Press to check fax transmission, print, copy, or report output status.
   

 

 
LASER CLASS 830i (Left Side of the Operation Panel)

Return to Overview



 
A One-Touch keys
Press to specify destinations registered under one-touch keys.
01-04 can be used as favorites buttons(LASER CLASS 830i Only).
B One-Touch Key Panels
The first panel displays keys 01-20. Open the first panel to access keys 21-40. Open the second panel to access keys 41-60. Open the third panel to access keys 61-80.
C [Address Book] key
Press to search pre-registered destinations under one-touch keys or coded dial codes by name, number, or address.
D [Stamp] key
Press to set the Watermark mode.
E [Delayed TX] key
Press to set Delayed Sending.
F [Direct TX] key
Press to set Direct Sending.
G [Hook] key
Press when you want to dial without lifting the handset of the external telephone.
H [Pause] key
Press to enter a pause between or after the telephone/fax number when dialing or registering numbers.
I [Recall] key
Press to recall previously set send jobs, including the destinations, scan settings, and send settings.
K [Coded Dial] key
Press to specify destinations registered under coded dial codes.

 

 
LASER CLASS 810 (Left Side of the Operation Panel)

Return to Overview



 
A One-Touch keys
Press to specify destinations registered under one-touch keys.
B One-Touch Key Panels
The first panel displays keys 01-20. Open the first panel to access keys 21-40. Open the second panel to access keys 41-60. Open the third panel to access keys 61-80.
C [Address Book] key
Press to search pre-registered destinations under one-touch keys or coded dial codes by name, number, or address.
D [Stamp] key
Press to set the Watermark mode.
E [Delayed TX] key
Press to set Delayed Sending.
F [Direct TX] key
Press to set Direct Sending.
G [Hook] key
Press when you want to dial without lifting the handset of the external telephone.
H [Pause] key
Press to enter a pause between or after the telephone/fax number when dialing or registering numbers.
J [Redial] key
Press to redial the last number dialed manually with the numeric keys when a fax is standing by.
K [Coded Dial] key
Press to specify destinations registered under coded dial codes.

 

 
Guidelines for Entering Characters

Use the following keys to enter information in the machine.

  • Use the numeric keys to enter characters. Press the numeric key repeatedly until the required character appears.
  • Press [#] to enter symbols.
  • Press [] to switch among input modes:
  • [:A]: Letter (uppercase) mode
  • [:a]: Letter (lowercase) mode
  • [:1]: Number mode
  • Press [] or [] to move the cursor.
  • Press [Clear] to delete the character at the cursor position. Hold [Clear] to delete the entire entry.
  • Press [OK] to confirm the entry.

 

 
LCD (Standby Mode)

Copy Mode

Fax/Send Mode

Log In Mode

Remark
  • When the main power switch is turned on, the LCD displays <PLEASE WAIT> first, and then displays <INITIALIZING...> until the standby display appears. It is also possible to see the standby display without having <INITIALIZING...> shown.
  • Depending on the number of destinations registered, after the main power switch is turned ON, you may not be able to perform operations using the operation panel when the standby display appears. If this happens, wait until the machine responses to the key operations.
   
  • If the Auto Clear function is activated, the display returns to the standby mode.
  • Log in mode is displayed only when Department/User ID Management is set to <ON> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>. To log in or out, see "Department/User ID Management."

 

 
Copy Mode

Return to Overview


 
A Zoom ratio B Paper size
C Quantity    

 

 
Fax/Send Mode

Return to Overview


 

 
Log In Mode

Return to Overview

  • For Department ID Management

  • For User ID Management


 

 
Toner Cartridge

The lifetime of the Canon genuine toner cartridge is approximately 4,500 pages. The page counts are based on 5% coverage when printing A4 size paper with the default print density setting. The level of toner consumption varies depending on the type of documents printed. If your average document contains a lot of graphics, tables, or charts, the life of the toner cartridge will be shorter as they consume more toner. When you are replacing a toner cartridge, be sure to use a toner cartridge designed for this product. To purchase this cartridge, contact your local Canon dealer or Canon Customer Care Center (1-800-828-4040).

* The term "5% coverage" denotes a document on which the area covered with toner is 5% of the total area of a sheet.

Toner Cartridge name: Canon FX11 Cartridge


Model Name Supported Canon
Genuine Cartridge
Print Yield
LASER CLASS 810 Canon FX11 Cartridge Approx. 4,500 pages
LASER CLASS 830i

Maintaining the Toner Cartridge

 

 
Maintaining the Toner Cartridge

Return to Overview


  • Keep the toner cartridge away from computer screens, disk drives, and floppy disks. The magnet inside the toner cartridge may harm these items.
  • Avoid locations subject to high temperature, high humidity, or rapid changes in temperature.
  • Do not expose the toner cartridge to direct sunlight or bright light for more than five minutes.
  • Store the toner cartridge in its protective bag. Do not open the bag until you are ready to install the toner cartridge in the machine.
  • Save the toner cartridge's protective bag in case you need to repack and transport the toner cartridge at a later date.
  • Do not store the toner cartridge in a salty atmosphere or where there are corrosive gases such as from aerosol sprays.
  • Do not remove the toner cartridge from the machine unnecessarily.
  • Do not open the drum protective shutter on the toner cartridge. Print quality may deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to light or is damaged.
  • Always hold the toner cartridge by its handle to avoid touching the drum protective shutter.
  • Do not stand the toner cartridge on end, and do not turn it upside down. If toner becomes caked in the toner cartridge, it may become impossible to free it even by shaking the toner cartridge.
  • If there is a toner powder leakage, make sure not to inhale or touch the toner powder. If it comes in contact with your skin, rinse with cold water using soap. If you feel an irritation on your skin or inhale the powder, consult a doctor immediately.
  • When removing the toner cartridge from the machine, make sure to remove it carefully. If not removed with care, the toner powder may scatter and come in contact with your eyes and mouth. If this happens, rinse with water and consult a doctor immediately.
  • Keep the toner cartridge away from small children. If they ingest the toner powder, consult a doctor immediately.
  • Do not disassemble the toner cartridge. The toner powder may scatter and come in contact with your eyes and mouth. If this happens, rinse with water and consult a doctor immediately.

Remark
  • Do not place the toner cartridge in fire. Toner powder is flammable.

 

 
Specifications

General

Facsimile

Telephone

Send (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Copier

Printer

Remark
  • Specifications are subject to change without notice.
   

 

 
General

Return to Overview


General
  • Type
Personal Desktop
  • Power Source
120 V-127 V, 50/60 Hz (Power requirements differ depending on the country in which you purchased the product.)
  • Power Consumption
Max: Less than 1020 W
  • Weight
LASER CLASS 810: Approx. 54.2 lb (24.6kg)
LASER CLASS 830i: Approx. 56.2 lb (25.5kg)
(including toner cartridge)
  • Dimensions
17 3/4 in. (H) x 19 in. (D) x 20 1/2 in. (W) (452mm (H) x 481mm (D) x 520 mm (W))
22 7/8 in. (H) x 19 in. (D) x 20 1/2 in. (W) (580mm (H) x 481mm (D) x 520 mm (W)) (with optional cassette)
  • Installation Space
38 3/4 in. (D) x 43 1/4 in. (W)
(984 mm (D) x 1097 mm (W)) (including optional handset)
  • Environmental Conditions
Temperature: 59 °F–86°F (15°C–30°C) Humidity: 10%–80% RH
  • Display Languages
ENGLISH/FRENCH/SPANISH/PORTUGUESE
  • Acceptable Documents
Document Requirements.
  • Acceptable Paper Stock
Paper Requirements.
  • Printable Area
Printable Area.
  • Scanning Area
Scanning Area.

 

 
Facsimile

Return to Overview


Facsimile
  • Applicable Line
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)*1
  • Compatibility
G3
  • Data Compression Schemes
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
  • Modem Speed
33.6 Kbps
Automatic fallback
  • Transmission Speed
Approx. 3 seconds/page*2 at 33.6 Kbps, ECM-JBIG,
transmitting from the memory
  • Transmission/Reception Memory
LASER CLASS 810
Maximum approx. 512 (1500*3) pages*2
(total pages of transmission/reception)
LASER CLASS 830i
Maximum approx. 1500 pages*2
(total pages of transmission/reception)
  • Fax Resolution
FINE: 203 pels/in. x 196 lines/in. (8 pels/mm x 7.7 lines/mm)
PHOTO: 203 pels/in. x 196 lines/in. (8 pels/mm x 7.7 lines/mm)
SUPER FINE: 203 pels/in. x 392 lines/in. (8 pels/mm x 15.4 lines/mm)
ULTRA FINE: 406 pels/in. x 392 lines/in. (16 pels/mm x 15.4 lines/mm)
STANDARD: 203 pels/in. x 98 lines/in. (8 pels/mm x 3.85 lines/mm)
  • Dialing
LASER CLASS 810
  • Speed dialing
    One-touch speed dialing (80 destinations)
    Coded speed dialing (120 destinations)
    Group dialing (199 destinations)
    Address Book dialing (with Address Book key)
  • Regular dialing (with numeric keys)
  • Automatic redialing
  • Manual redialing (with Redial/Pause key)
  • Sequential broadcast (201 destinations)
  • Automatic reception
  • Remote reception by telephone (Default ID: 25)
  • ACTIVITY REPORT (after every 40 transactions)
  • TX (Transmission)/RX (Reception) REPORT
  • TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification)
LASER CLASS 830i
  • Speed dialing
    One-touch speed dialing (80 destinations)
    Coded speed dialing (420 destinations)
    Group dialing (499 destinations)
    Address Book dialing (with Address Book key)
  • Regular dialing (with numeric keys)
  • Automatic redialing
  • Manual redialing (with Redial/Pause key)
  • Sequential broadcast (501 destinations)
  • Automatic reception
  • Remote reception by telephone (Default ID: 25)
  • ACTIVITY REPORT (after every 40 transactions)
  • TX (Transmission)/RX (Reception) REPORT
  • TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification)

*1 The Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) currently supports 28.8 Kbps modem speed or lower, depending on telephone line conditions.
*2 Based on ITU-T Standard Chart No. 1, JBIG standard mode.
*3 For the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 

 
Telephone

Return to Overview


Telephone
  • Connection
  • Optional handset
  • External telephone/answering machine/data modem

 

 
Send (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

Return to Overview


Send
Send to file server
  • Communication Protocol
FTP (TCP/IP), SMB (TCP/IP)
  • Data Format
TIFF (B&W), PDF (B&W), JPEG (Color), PDF (Compact) (Color)
  • Resolution
100 x 100 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi, 200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi, 200 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
  • System Environment
Windows 98/Me, Windows XP Professional/Home Edition, Windows 2000 Server/Professional (SP1 or later), Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Solaris Version 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Red Hat Linux 7.2
  • Interface
100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T
  • Color Mode
Color, B&W (black and white)
  • Original Type
Text, Text/Photo, Photo
E-mail and I-Fax Features
  • Communication Protocol
SMTP, POP3, I-FAX (Simple mode)
  • Resolution
100 x 100 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi, 200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi, 200 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
  • Data Format
TIFF (B&W), PDF (B&W), JPEG (Color), PDF (Compact) (Color)
  • Original Size
E-mail: LTR, LTRR, LGL, LDR, A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, A5R, B5, B5R
I-Fax: LTR, LTRR, LGL*1, LDR*1, A3*1, B4*1, A4*1, A4R*1, A5*1, A5R*1, B5*1, B5R*1
*1 Sent as LTR
  • Server Software
Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 (SP2), Sendmail 8.11.2, Lotus Domino R4.5/R5

 

 
Copier

Return to Overview


Copier
  • Scanning Resolution
TEXT mode, TEXT/PHOTO mode, PHOTO mode: 600 dpi x 600 dpi
  • Printing Resolution
1200 dpi enhanced x 600 dpi
  • Magnification
Auto Zoom 0.500 - 1.450, 1% increments
  • Copy Speed
Direct: LTR 23 cpm
  • No. of Copies
Max. 99 copies

 

 
Printer

Return to Overview


Printer
  • Printing Method
Indirect electrostatic method (On-demand fixing)
  • Paper Handling
  • Paper cassette: 500 sheets x 1 cassette (21 lb (80 g/m²))
  • Multi-purpose tray: 100 sheets (21 lb (80 g/m²))
  • Paper Delivery
100 sheets (17 to 21 lb bond (64 to 80g/m²))
  • Print Speed
Copy Speed.
  • Printing Resolution
1200 dpi enhanced x 600 dpi
  • Number of Tones
256
  • Printing Cartridge
Toner Cartridge.

 

 
Document Requirements

  ADF
Type Plain paper (Multipage documents of the same size, thickness and weight or one page documents.)
Size (W x L) LASER CLASS 830i:
Max. 11 3/4" x 17"(Max. 24 7/8")
(Max. 297 x 432 mm(Max. 630 mm))
Min. 5 7/8" x 5 7/8"
(Min. 148 x 148 mm)
LASER CLASS 810:
Max. 8 1/2" x 14"(Max. 24 7/8")
(Max. 216 x 355.6 mm(Max. 630 mm))
Min. 5 7/8" x 5 7/8"
(Min. 148 x 148 mm)
Weight One-Sided Scanning: 13 to 34 1b bond (50 to 128 g/m²)
Tow-Sided Scanning: 13 to 28 1b bond (50 to 105 g/m²)
Quantity Max. 50 sheets*1
(Max. 20 sheets for LGL documents)*1*2

*1 21 lb bond (80 g/m²) paper
*2 LASER CLASS 830i Only

  • Do not place the document in the ADF until the glue, ink or correction fluid on the document is completely dry.
  • Remove all fasteners (staples, paper clips, etc.) before loading the document in the ADF.
  • To prevent document jams in the ADF, do not use any of the following:
  • Wrinkled or creased paper
  • Carbon paper or carbon-backed paper
  • Curled or rolled paper
  • Coated paper
  • Torn paper
  • Onion skin or thin paper
  • Documents with staples or paper clips attached
  • Paper printed with a thermal transfer printer
  • Transparencies

 

 
Scanning Area

Make sure your document's text and graphics fall within the shaded area in the following diagram. Note that the margin widths listed are approximate and there may be slight variations in actual use.


 

 
Paper Requirements

  Paper cassette Multi-purpose tray
Size (W x L) Legal, Letter 3" × 5" to Legal (8 1/2" × 14")
(76 × 127 to 216 × 356 mm)
Weight 17 to 24 lb bond
(64 to 90 g/m²)
15 to 34 lb bond
(56 to 128 g/m²)
Quantity Max. 500 sheets *1 Max. 100 sheets *1
Type Plain *2
Color *2
Recycled *3
Heavy 1 *3
Heavy 2 *4  -
Heavy 3 *5  -
Bond *6
3hole punch paper *7
Transparency *8  -
Labels  -
Envelopes  -

(○: available -: not available)
*1 21 lb bond (80 g/m²) paper
*2 From 17 to 21 lb bond (64 to 80 g/m²)
*3 From 22 to 24 lb bond (81 to 90 g/m²)
*4 From 24 to 28 lb bond (91 to 105 g/m²)
*5 From 28 to 34 lb bond (106 to 128 g/m²)
*6 20 lb bond (75 g/m²)
*7 LTR size only
*8 Use only LTR transparencies made especially for this machine.

Remark
  • The default paper size is LTR. If you use a different paper size, you must change the paper size settings. (See "Setting Paper Type and Size.")

  • To prevent paper jams, do not use any of the following:
  • Wrinkled or creased paper
  • Curled or rolled paper
  • Coated paper
  • Torn paper
  • Damp paper
  • Very thin paper
  • Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (Do not copy on the reverse side.)
  • The following types of paper do not print well:
  • Highly textured paper
  • Very smooth paper
  • Shiny paper
  • Make sure the paper is free from dust, lint, and oil stains.
  • Be sure to test paper before purchasing large quantities.
  • Store all paper wrapped and on a flat surface until ready for use. Keep opened packs in their original packaging in a cool, dry location.
  • Store paper at 64.4°F–75.2°F (18°C–24°C), 40%–60% relative humidity.
  • Use only the transparencies designed for laser printers. Canon recommends you to use Canon type transparencies with this machine.

 

 
Printable Area

The shaded area indicates the approximate printable area of LTR paper and envelope. Note that the margin widths listed are approximate and there may be slight variations in actual use.


 

 
Loading Paper

To load paper in the paper cassette, see "Load Paper."


In the Multi-Purpose Tray (e.g., Envelopes)

 

 
Into the Multi-Purpose Tray (e.g., Envelopes)

Return to Overview

If you are making prints on transparencies, labels, nonstandard-sized paper, or envelopes, load them into the multi-purpose tray.


Remark
  • Use standard envelopes with diagonal seams and flaps.
  • To prevent jams, do not use the following:
  • Envelopes with windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or double flaps
  • Envelopes made with special coated paper or deeply embossed paper
  • Envelopes with peel-off sealing strips
  • Envelopes with letters enclosed
  • Make sure to set the correct envelope size in the printer driver. (See online help.)

 
     
  1. Open the multi-purpose tray.
 
     
  1. Pull out the multi-purpose tray extension until it clicks, then open it.
  • Do not load the paper without using the multi-purpose tray extension.
 
     
  1. Gently load the stack of envelopes with the address side facing down, and set the envelopes as illustrated. Be sure to insert the envelopes as far as they will go.
When you load the envelopes, arrange the stack of envelopes on a firm, clean surface first, then press down firmly on the edges to make the folds crisp.

 
     
  1. Adjust the slide guides to the width of the paper stack.
  • Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the paper limit guide.
  • Some types of paper may not feed properly into the multi-purpose tray. For high quality copies, be sure to use the paper and transparencies recommended by Canon.
  • When making copies of a small document or thick paper, etc., the copy speed may be slightly slower than usual.

 

 
Setting Paper Size and Type

The default settings is <LTR> and <PLAIN PAPER>. When you place other sizes and/or types of paper, follow this procedure to change the settings.
The procedure is same for the paper cassette and multi-purpose tray except for selecting the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray in step 3 and 6.


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAPER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CASSETTE1> or <MP TRAY>, then press [OK].
  • If an optional paper cassette is attached, you can also select <CASETTE2>.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAPER SIZE>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the paper size, then press [OK].

You can select from the following paper sizes:

If you select <CASETTE 1> or <CASETTE 2> in step3:
<LTR>, <LGL>, <A4> ,<OFICIO>, <BRAZIL-OFICIO>, <MEXICO-OFICIO>, <FLSP>

If you select <MP TRAY> in step3:
<LTR>, <LGL>, <A4>, <B5>, <A5R>, <STMTR>, <EXECUTIV>, <COM10>, <MONARCH>, <DL>, <ISO-C5>, <ISO-B5>, <OFICIO>, <BRAZIL-OFICIO>, <MEXICO-OFICIO>, <FOLIO>, <G-LTR>, <G-LGL>, <FLSP>, <CUSTOM SIZE>*

*When selecting this size, enter the height, and press [OK].
Enter the width, and press [OK].

  • The paper sizes available will vary depending on the country where the unit was purchased.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SELECT PAPER TYPE>, then press [OK].
  • If you have selected <EXECUTIV>, <COM10>, <MONARCH>, <DL> or <ISO-C5> for the paper size in step 5, <SELECT PAPER TYPE> is not displayed. Skip to step 8.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the paper type, then press [OK].

You can select from the following paper types:

If you select <CASETTE 1> or <CASETTE 2> in step3:
<PLAIN PAPER>, <COLOR>, <RECYCLED>, <HEAVY PAPER1>, <BOND>, <3 HOLE PUNCH PAPER>

If you select <MP TRAY> in step3:
<PLAIN PAPER>, <COLOR>, <RECYCLED>, <HEAVY PAPER 1>, <HEAVY PAPER 2>, <HEAVY PAPER 3>, <BOND>, <3 HOLE PUNCH PAPER>, <TRANSPARENCY>, <LABELS>, <ENVELOPE>

 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Introduction (UFR II Printer Driver)

The Canon UFR II printer driver enables users of Microsoft Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Vista to print from any Windows application and make full use of their Canon printers. (Although the machines supported by this printer driver have multiple functions, they will be referred to as "printers" in this guide).

Canon provides you with two types of printer drivers: Hewlett-Packard's PCL (Printer Control Language) printer driver, which includes the PCL5e and PCL6 printer drivers, and Canon's UFR II (Ultra Fast Rendering II) printer driver.

  • PCL

The PCL5e and PCL6 printer drivers can be used with most kinds of business application software. The PCL5e printer driver is for black-and-white printers, and the PCL6 printer driver is for both color and black-and-white printers. PCL6 is an advanced version of PCL5e, and offers superior printing quality and speed. The PCL5e printer driver is provided as standard with black-and-white printers.

  • UFR II

Canon UFRII LT printer driver enables you to print from any application software to the machine. Taking full advantage of your PC's processing power to compress the print data, this driver executes the high-speed data processing.

You can update your printer driver software and acquire information about Canon products on the Canon home page (http://www.usa.canon.com). Driver software is updated every few months.


Remark
  • The available printer drivers may vary, depending on the machine and the version of Windows you are using.
  • To use the UFR II Printer Driver with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 

 
Introduction (PCL Printer Driver) (LASER CLASS 830i Only)

The Canon PCL5e and PCL6 printer drivers enable users of Microsoft Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Vista to print from any Windows application and make full use of their Canon printers. (Although the machines supported by these printer drivers have multiple functions, they will be referred to as "printers" in this guide.)

Canon provides you with two types of printer drivers: Hewlett-Packard's PCL (Printer Control Language) printer driver, which includes the PCL5e, and PCL6 printer drivers, and Canon's UFR II (Ultra Fast Rendering II) printer driver.

  • PCL

The PCL5e and PCL6 printer drivers can be used with most kinds of business application software. The PCL5e printer driver is for black-and-white printers, and the PCL6 printer driver is for both color and black-and-white printers. PCL6 is an advanced version of PCL5e, and offers superior printing quality and speed. The PCL5e printer driver is provided as standard with black-and-white printers.

  • UFR II

Canon UFRII LT printer driver enables you to print from any application software to the machine. Taking full advantage of your PC's processing power to compress the print data, this driver executes the high-speed data processing.

You can update your printer driver software and acquire information about Canon products on the Canon home page (http://www.usa.canon.com). Driver software is updated every few months.


Remark
  • The available printer drivers may vary, depending on the machine and the version of Windows that you are using.

 

 
Introduction (FAX Driver)

The fax driver gives users of Microsoft Windows 98, Windows Millennium Edition, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Vista (hereafter called Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista) operating system the ability to make full use of the fax function of the printer. If your printer is equipped with the optional fax subsystem, the fax driver enables you to access the fax function.

The fax driver is conceptually akin to a printer driver. A user would select [Print] from any Windows application software, select the Canon fax driver as the printer, and specify its destination(s) and options.

The fax driver would then convert this into an image that conforms to standard fax protocols, to be printed or stored on the recipient fax machine(s).


Remark
  • To use the fax driver with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 

 
Optional Handset

If you want to use the machine as a telephone and a fax machine, or if you want to receive faxes manually, install the optional handset available from your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.


Remark
   

Maintaining the Handset
  • Do not leave the handset exposed to direct sunlight.
  • Do not install the handset in hot or humid conditions.
  • Do not spray aerosol polish on the handset as it may cause damage.
  • Use a damp cloth to wipe clean the handset.

 

 
Department/User ID Management

If Department ID Management or User ID Management is set to <ON> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, you must enter your ID and password to be able to operate the machine.


Procedure before Using the Machine

Procedure after Using the Machine

 

 
Procedure before Using the Machine

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Enter the department ID or the user ID with the numeric keys, then press [OK] or [Log In/Out (ID)].
 
     
  1. If the password is set, enter the password with the numeric keys, then press [OK] or [Log In/Out (ID)].

The standby display appears.


 

 
Procedure after Using the Machine

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Be sure to press [Log In/Out (ID)].

 

 
Initial Settings

Initial Settings Instructions

Some functions may not be available, depending on whether the optional network printer kit is attached. (A network printer kit is standard-equipped for the LASER CLASS 830i.)

Some functions are not available even if the optional network printer kit is installed when using the LASER CLASS 810.


 

 
Set Up the Machine

Before Setting Up the Machine

Do You Have Everything?

Install Toner Cartridge

Load Paper

Set Up the Paper Cassette to Fit the Paper Size

Connect Power Cord/Telephone Cables

Install Handset (Optional)

Set the Date and Time

Set the Telephone Line Type

Set the Machine for Sending Faxes

Set the Machine for Receiving Faxes

Set the Machine for Network Usage

Connect the Machine to a Network (Set the Machine for Network Usage)


Specify the IP Address Settings (Set the Machine for Network Usage)


Installing Software

Perform the following procedure to install the printer and fax drivers. If you install these drivers, you can print and fax from your computer. Printer drivers are divided into two types: PCL and UFRII LT.

  • PCL: This is the Hewlett-Packard's PCL printer driver, which includes the PCL5c, PCL5e, and PCL6 drivers. The PCL5c printer driver is for color printers, while the PCL5e and PCL6 printer drivers are for black-and-white printers. PCL6 is an advanced version of PCL5e and offers superior printing quality and speed. This machine supports the PCL5e and PCL6 printer drivers.
  • UFRII LT: This is the Canon UFRII LT printer driver. This driver enables you to print from any application software to the machine. Taking full advantage of your PC's processing power to compress the print data, this driver executes the high-speed data processing.

Remark
  • To use a printer driver and fax driver with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.
  • You cannot use the Installer to install the fax driver through the USB connection. Double-click the [Setup.exe] icon in the FAX\us_eng folder on the User Software CD-ROM to install the driver.
  • The following procedure (Windows) is an example using the Installer on the User Software CD-ROM.

  • Before Installation:
  • Do not connect the USB cable before installing the software. If you connect the USB cable before installing the software and the Found New Hardware Wizard screen appears, click [Cancel].
  • For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, log on as Administrator to install the software.
  • Make sure the machine is turned on before connecting the USB cable.
  • On the screen shown at each step, click on the circled button to proceed.
  • The machine does not come with a USB cable.

System Requirements

Microsoft Windows 98/98SE
CPU: Intel 80486DX/66 MHz or faster
Memory: 24 MB or more

Microsoft Windows Me
CPU: Intel Pentium/150 MHz or faster
Memory: 32 MB or more

Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional/Server
CPU: Intel Pentium/133 MHz or faster
Memory: 64 MB or more (Server: 128MB or more)

Microsoft Windows XP Professional/Home Edition
CPU: Intel Pentium/233 MHz or faster
Memory: 64 MB or more

Microsoft Windows Server 2003
CPU: Intel Pentium/133 MHz or faster
Memory: 128 MB or more

Microsoft Windows Vista
CPU: Intel Pentium/800 MHz or faster
Memory: 512 MB or more


USB Connection (Installing Software)


Network Connection (Installing Software)


Confirming the installation (Installing Software)


Bundled on the User Software CD

Using Help

 

 
Before Setting Up the Machine

Return to Overview

  • Moving the Machine
  • Remove all shipping tape on the machine.
  • When moving the machine, be sure at least two people carry it using the provided hand grips on the left and right sides, as seen in the illustration right.


 

 
Do You Have Everything?

Return to Overview

  • Items Included with this Product


Machine


Paper Cassette (optional)


Handset (optional)


Handset Cradle (optional)*


Bracket (Optional)*


Screws (x2 for each type) (Optional)*


Cartridge


Power Cord


Telephone Cable


Ferrite Core**


Screw***


Screwdriver instruction label***


Destination Label

Starter Guide

User Software CD****

Registration Card

Limited Warranty Notice

Unpacking Instructions

Basic Operation Guide

User Manual CD (Reference Guide)

* Included with the optional handset. (See "Install Handset (Optional).")
** Use by attaching to a USB cable. (See "USB Connection (Installing Software).")
*** Used when the optional handset is installed.
**** Included with the LASER CLASS 830i and the optional network printer kit for the LASER CLASS 810.


Remark
  • The machine illustration may differ slightly from your machine.
  • Use the screw that is included with the machine, to secure the right cover and machine frame when attaching the handset.

  • Manuals for the Machine

  • Starter Guide
  • Basic Operation Guide: Operation features, maintenance, specifications, functions you can use without being connected to a network
  • Reference Guide (located on the Manual CD): Operation features, maintenance, specifications, all functions including those that use a network or driver
  • PCL Driver Guide (located on the User Software CD): PCL printer driver installation and instructions
  • UFR II Driver Guide (located on the User Software CD): UFRII LT printer driver installation and instructions
  • Fax Driver Guide (located on the User Software CD): Fax driver installation and instructions

Assistance:
If you have a problem with your machine and you cannot solve it by referring to the manuals listed above, please contact our Canon Authorized Service Facilities or the Canon Customer Care Center at 1-800-828-4040 between the hours of 8:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. EST Monday through Friday and 10:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. on Saturday.


 

 
Install Toner Cartridge

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Remove the toner cartridge from the bag. Keep the bag for future use.
  • Do not open the drum protective shutter (A).

 
     
  1. Gently rock the toner cartridge 5 or 6 times to distribute toner evenly.
 
     
  1. Remove the seals (2 places).
 
     
  1. Bend back the blue plastic pull tab as in the illustration above.
  • Do not remove the pull tab as it is used to pull out the toner when the cartridge needs replaced.
 
     
  1. Pull out the seal completely.
  • Do not pull out the seal at an angle.
 
     
  1. Open the left cover.
 
     
  1. Hold the toner cartridge by its handle. Insert the toner cartridge into the machine with the arrows (A) on the toner cartridge pointing toward the machine.
 
     
  1. The left edge (A) and the right side protrusions (B, C) of the toner cartridge should be aligned with the guides inside the machine. The Blue plastic pull tab should be pulled up as illustrated in step 4.
 
     
  1. Push the toner cartridge to make sure it is properly set in the machine.
  • Do not touch the fixing assembly (A) as it becomes very hot during use.
 
     
  1. Close the left cover.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  • If you cannot close the left cover, do not force it to close. Open the cover and make sure the toner cartridge is properly set in the machine.

 

 
Load Paper

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Pull out the paper cassette until it stops.
 
     
  1. Fan the paper stack and even the edges of the paper stack.
 
     
  1. Load the paper stack print side up.
  • Make sure the back edge of the paper stack touches the rear paper end guide (C), the paper stack should not exceed the load limit mark (A), and the load is under the hooks (B) on the paper guides.
 
     
  1. Gently insert the paper cassette as far as it will go.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  • For loading paper in the multi-purpose tray, see "Loading Paper."

 

 
Set Up the Paper Cassette to Fit the Paper Size

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Incline the rear paper end guide until it is unlocked, then remove it from the paper cassette.
 
     
  1. Attach the guide to the slots of the desired paper size.

 

 
Connect Power Cord/Telephone Cables

Return to Overview

Connect the supplied telephone cable to the line jack (A) and the wall jack.

Connect your external telephone to the external device jack (B) if required.


Remark

 
     
  1. Connect the power cord into the rear socket and the wall outlet and press the [I] side of the main power switch to ON.
    When restarting the machine, wait at least 10 seconds before turning the main power back on.
 
       
  1. The machine enters standby mode.

The machine enters standby mode.

  • <LEFT COVER OPEN / CLOSE COVER> is displayed:
    Make sure that the left cover is closed properly. (See "Install Toner Cartridge.")
  • <TONER IS NOT SET / INSERT TONER> is displayed:
    Make sure that the toner cartridge is installed properly. (See "Install Toner Cartridge.")
  • <TONER LOW / PREPARE NEW TONER> is displayed:
    If this message is displayed after a new toner cartridge has been set in place, reset the toner cartridge after shaking it slowly five, or six times. (See "Install Toner Cartridge.")

 

 
Install Handset (Optional)

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Use a screwdriver to remove the cover on the right side of the machine.
 
     
  1. Attach the screws included with the machine to the center screw holes, and attach the driver instruction label below.
 
     
  1. Screw the handset cradle onto the bracket with the screws (A). Make sure the groove (B) side of the cradle faces to the left.
 
     
  1. Screw the bracket onto the machine with the screws (A).
 
     
  1. Place the handset on the cradle.
  • If using the handset or an external telephone, make sure to set the fax receive mode to <FaxTel> or <Manual>. For how to set the receive mode, see Set the Machine for Receiving Faxes."
 
     
  1. Connect the curly cord terminal to the back of the modular terminal.
 
       
  1. Connect the power cord into the wall outlet, and turn the power on.
 
       
  1. Confirm that you can hear a dial tone from the handset.

 

 
Set the Date and Time

Return to Overview

You can set the current date and time. The current date and time settings are used as standard timer settings for functions that require them.

Use the keys both on the touch panel display and the control panel to enter information.

  • Numeric keys: Enter letters and numbers.
  • [] and []: Move the cursor position.
  • [Clear]: Deletes the character at the cursor position, or the entire entry if held for more than one second.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Use [] or [] to select <8. TIMER SETTINGS>, then press OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <1. DATE&TIME SETTING> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the date (month/day/year) and time (in 24-hour format), then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to standby mode.
  • You can select the date format among three types listed below at <3 DATE TYPE SELECT>.
  • <MM/DD/YYYY>
  • <DD/MM YYYY>
  • <YYYY MM/DD>
  • By default, <6 DAYLIGHT SV.TIME> in the <8 TIMER SETTINGS> menu is set to <OFF>. If you want to set <6 DAYLIGHT SV.TIME> in the <8 TIMER SETTINGS> menu to <ON>, see "Setting Daylight Saving Time."

 

 
Set the Telephone Line Type

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Use [] or [] to select <5. TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use [] or [] to select <2. FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use [] or [] to select <2. USER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use [] or [] to select <2. TEL LINE TYPE>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use [] or [] to select the telephone line type, then press [OK].
<TOUCH TONE>: Tone dialing (default)
<ROTARY PULSE>: Pulse dialing
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to standby mode.

 

 
Set the Machine for Sending Faxes

Return to Overview

The sender information you register in the machine appears in the header of each page received by your recipient.

Use the following keys to enter information in the machine.

  • Use the numeric keys to enter characters. Press the numeric key repeatedly until the required character appears.
  • Press [#] to enter symbols.
  • Press [] to switch among input modes:
  • [:A]: Letter (uppercase) mode
  • [:a]: Letter (lowercase) mode
  • [:1]: Number mode
  • Press [] or [] to move the cursor.
  • Press [Clear] to delete the character at the cursor position. Hold [Clear] to delete the entire entry.
  • Press [OK] to confirm the entry.

Your name or company name must be registered as the unit name (a department name is optional).

For example:

When you send a document, the recipient's machine displays or prints your name or company name (and department name, if applicable) as the sender information on the recording paper.

Some fax models also display sender information on the touch panel display during transmission.

  Your name: John Smith
Company name: Canon
Company name and department: Canon-Accounting Dept.

Remark
  • Before sending documents, you MUST register your fax number, user name, and the current date and time in the machine.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Use [] or [] to select <5. TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use [] or [] to select <2. FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use [] or [] to select <2. USER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <1. UNIT TELEPHONE #> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter your fax/telephone number (max. 20 digits, including spaces), then press [OK].

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions] twice.
 
     
  1. Confirm that <1. TX/RX COMMON SET.> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <1. TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <1. UNIT NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the unit name (up to 24 characters), then press [OK].

 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to standby mode.

 

 
Set the Machine for Receiving Faxes

Return to Overview

Follow the chart below to determine the correct receive mode for your needs.

Do you intend to use the machine to receive voice calls? No <FaxOnly>
Answers all calls as faxes.
↓ Yes      
Do you intend to use an answering machine with the machine? Yes <AnsMode>
Receives faxes automatically and records voice messages.
↓ No      
Do you intend to receive faxes automatically? No <Manual>
Does not answer any calls. You have to manually receive faxes.
↓ No      
Do you have two phone lines, each with it's own distinctive ring (DRPD)? No <FaxTel>
Switches between fax and voice calls automatically if a telephone is connected to the machine.
Yes <DRPD>
Distinguishes between fax and voice calls, if you want to use an external phone.

Remark
  • The answering machine must be connected directly to the machine for <AnsMode> to work.
  • The optional handset or an external telephone must be connected to the machine for <FaxTel>, <Manual> or <DRPD> to work.
  • By default, if <FaxOnly> is selected in <RX MODE> and external telephone is connected to the machine, the external telephone rings. If you want to turn off the ring, press [Additional Functions] → <TX/RX SETTINGS> → <FAX SETTINGS> → <RX SETTINGS> → <INCOMING RING> then select <OFF>.
  • Voice mail is not supported with <AnsMode>.
  • The <DRPD> mode requires subscription to a DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection) service. Contact your telephone company for availability.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Use [] or [] to select <5. TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use [] or [] to select <2. FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <1. RX MODE> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use [] or [] to select the receive mode, then press [OK].
  • For <AnsMode>, make sure an answering machine is connected to the machine.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to standby mode.
  • For details, see the Reference Guide (in User Manual CD).

 

 
Connect the Machine to a Network (Set the Machine for Network Usage)

Return to Overview

This machine has a USB connector and LAN connector. If the machine is connected to a network using a LAN cable, you can print the documents sent from a computer, send documents to a file server, i-fax and send document attached to an e-mail through a network.


Remark
  • To use a network environment with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
     
  1. Connect a Category 5 twisted pair LAN cable to the 10Base-T/100Base-TXport on the back of the machine. Connect the other end of the cable to a network router or a hub.
  • If you use the machine as a local printer, connect the machine directly to a computer using a USB cable. (See "Installing Software.")

 

 
Specify the IP Address Settings (Set the Machine for Network Usage)

Return to Overview

An IP address must be specified in order to enable communication between the machine and computer.


Remark
  • It is recommended that the network administrator perform the following procedures.
  • Before performing the following procedure, make sure that the machine is turned on and connected to a network.
  • This machine is set by default to automatically draw an IP address using DHCP. If your network server or router is configured to provide a DHCP address, all you need to do is connect a network cable and turn on the machine. The machine will draw an IP address automatically.
  • This machine also supports automatic IP addresses using BOOTP and RARP protocols. If you use these protocols, select <ON> at step 6 of the following procedures, then specify the <2. BOOTP> or <3. RARP> settings.
  • To use a network environment with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <11. SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <5. NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <1. TCP/IP SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <1. IPv4 SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <1. IP ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <1. IP ADDRESS AUTO.> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <2. IP ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the IP address, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <3. SUBNET MASK> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the subnet mask, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <4. GATEWAY ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the gateway address number, then press [OK].
 
       
  1. Turn off the main power switch, wait 10 seconds, and then turn on the power to restart the machine.
  • If you send documents via e-mail, specify the E-MAIL settings. (See "Network Settings.")

 

 
USB Connection (Installing Software)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To use a printer driver and fax driver with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 

   

If the CD-ROM Setup screen is not displayed, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [My Computer].

Windows Vista: click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Computer].

Windows 98/Me/2000: double-click [My Computer] on the Windows desktop.

Open the CD-ROM icon, then doubleclick [MInst] ([MInst.exe]).

 
 

Select the driver(s) you want to install.

  • The following indicates the procedure for installing the UFR II Printer Driver, PCL Printer Driver, and Fax Driver all together. (The PCL Printer Driver is only available for the LASER CLASS 830i.)
  • If you want to install only the PCL driver, it is necessary to change the settings of the machine. See "SYSTEM SETTINGS" for information on the settings you must change. After changing the settings, follow steps 4 to 12 to install the driver using the same procedure as for the UFR II Printer Driver.
  • If you want to install only the fax driver, refer to the procedure for installing with a USB connection included in the Fax Driver Guide (located on the User Software CD).
   

 
 

   

 
 

   

 
 

   

 
 

Attach the ferrite core (A) as close to the square B-type connector (i.e., the machine side) of the USB cable (B) as possible.

  • The ferrite core is installed in order to reduce noise emitted from the cable.
   

Connect the machine and your computer with a USB cable (C).

Connect the machine to the network correctly, and confirm that the power is on.

  • If you are using Windows XP, [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears. Select [Install Software Automaticall (Recommended)], then click [Next].
 
 

Proceed to the step indicated below that corresponds to the drivers you selected in step 3.

  • Only the UFR II Printer Driver: proceed to step 35
  • UFR II Printer Driver and PCL Printer Driver: proceed to step 14
  • UFR II Printer Driver, PCL Printer Driver, and Fax Driver: proceed to step 14
  • UFR II Printer Driver and Fax Driver: proceed to step 24
   

 
 

   

 
 

Select [Canon LC800/L3000 PCL5e] and/or [Canon LC800/L3000 PCL6].

The selected drivers are installed.

   

 
 

Select the USB port that was created when you installed the UFR II Printer Driver.

   

 
 

   

 
 

   

If you selected to install Fax Driver in step 3, proceed to step 25. If you did not select the Fax Driver in step 3, proceed to step 35.

 
 

   

 
 

   

 
 

   

Select the USB port that was created when you installed the UFR II Printer Driver.

 
 

   

 
 

   

 
 

   

 
 

You have now completed installation.

   

 

 
Network Connection (Installing Software)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • To use a printer driver and fax driver with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
 

Connect the machine to the network correctly, and confirm that the power is on.

   

 
 

If the CD-ROM Setup screen is not displayed, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [My Computer].

Windows Vista: click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Computer]

Windows 98/Me/2000: double-click [My Computer] on the Windows desktop.

Open the CD-ROM icon, then doubleclick [MInst] ([MInst.exe]).

   

Select the driver(s) you want to install.

 
 

   

 
 

   

 
 

[Process to Install Printer Driver] in this dialog box appears if drivers that can be installed with this Installer are already installed.

   

 
 

   

 
 

   

 
 

Repeat the steps from 6 if you have selected the two or three in step 3.

   

 
 

You have now completed installation.

   

 

 
Confirming the installation (Installing Software)

Return to Overview

Check if the driver is installed successfully and if this machine has been set as default printer.


Remark
  • When open the screen [printing] from application, if this machine was chosen, it is set up as default printer.
  • To use a printer driver and fax driver with the LASER CLASS 810, an optional network printer kit is required.

 
       
  1. Open the [Printers and Faxes] folder (Windows 98/2000: the [Printers] dialog box).

Windows XP/Server2003: Click [start] on the Windows task bar → select [Printers and Faxes].

Windows Vista: Click [start] on the Windows task bar → select [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → double-click [Printer].

Windows 98/Me/2000: [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel] → doubleclick [Printers].

Make sure the corresponding printer driver icon is displayed.

 
       
  1. Set as default printer.

Click the printer icon of this machine.

Click [Set as Default Printer] from [File] menu.


 

 
Bundled on the User Software CD

Return to Overview


Remark
  • The User Software CD is included with the LASER CLASS 830i and the optional network printer kit for the LASER CLASS 810.

  • NetSpot Device Installer (NSDI)

NetSpot Device Installer enables you to set up the machine for network operations. When you start this program, click on the [Additional Software Programs] button in step 2 of "installation Procedure - For USB Connection" or in step 2 of "Installation Procedure - For Network Connection - Install Software," then follow the instructions that appear on the screen. For details, see the Readme file and online help for this program.


  • Canon Font Manager

Canon Font Manager is utility software that allows you to install and uninstall fonts, etc.. For details, see the Readme file and online help for this program.


Remark
  • Install Canon Font Manager from the [Canonfm] folder located on the User Software CD-ROM. For information on the installation procedure, see the Readme file located in the [english] folder inside the [Canonfm] folder.
  • To open the [Canonfm] folder: Click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [My Computer]. (Windows 98/Me/2000: double-click [My Computer] on the Windows desktop.) Open the CD-ROM icon, then double-click [Canonfm] folder.
  • Canon Font Manager is not supported on Windows Vista.

  • Canon LPR2

Canon LPR2 is a utility software that facilitates printing over a TCP/IP network. For details, see the Readme file and User's Guide for this program.


Remark
  • Install Canon LPR2 from the [Lprport] folder located on the User Software CD-ROM. For information on the installation procedure, see the User's Guide located in the [Lprport] folder.
  • To open the [Lprport] folder: Click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [My Computer]. (Windows 98/Me/2000: double-click [My Computer] on the Windows desktop.) Open the CD-ROM icon, then double-click [Lprport] folder.
  • Canon LPR2 is not supported on Windows Vista.

 

 
Using Help

Return to Overview

The User Software CD includes programs (driver software and application software) which the supplied instruction guides do not cover. When you utilize such programs, refer to online help following the instructions below.

  • Online Help

You can locate additional help in the online help file provided with the driver software. In the [Properties] dialog box, you can click [Help] to display information about every feature and option in the drivers.

In the help dialog box, you can click [Contents], then double-click your desired title to display information.

In the help dialog box, you can click [Index], then double-click your desired keyword in the list to display information. To search the desired keyword quickly, enter a keyword in the upper text box. The nearest keyword is located in the list below.


 

 
Machine Settings

You can adjust the machine settings from the Setting Menu to customize the way the machine works. To see the list of current settings, print out USER'S DATA LIST.


Printing USER'S DATA LIST

Accessing the Setting Menu

 

 
Printing USER'S DATA LIST

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <LIST PRINT>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <USER DATA LIST>, then press [OK].

 

 
Accessing the Setting Menu

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the menu you want to access, then press [OK].
  • <COMMON SETTINGS>
  • <COPY SETTINGS>
  • <TX/RX SETTINGS>
  • <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>
  • <PRINTER SETTINGS>
  • <TIMER SETTINGS>
  • <ADJUST./CLEANING>
  • <REPORT SETTINGS>
  • <SYSTEM SETTINGS>
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select a submenu, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. To register the settings or go to a submenu item, press [OK].
 
     
  1. When finished, press [Stop] to return to standby mode.
  • If you press [Stop] before pressing [OK], the setting will not be registered.
  • Press [Additional Functions] to return to the previous display.

 

 
Setting Menu

Remark
  • Depending on the country of purchase, some settings may not be available.

PAPER SETTINGS

VOLUME CONTROL

COMMON SETTINGS

COPY SETTINGS

TX/RX SETTINGS

ADDRESS BOOK SET.

PRINTER SETTINGS

TIMER SETTINGS

ADJUST./CLEANING

REPORT SETTINGS

SYSTEM SETTINGS

 

 
PAPER SETTINGS

Return to Overview


PAPER SETTINGS
Setting Item Description
1. CASSETTE Sets the paper size and type on the paper cassette. (See "Setting Paper Size and Type.")
2. MP TRAY Sets the paper size and type on the multi-purpose tray. (See "Setting Paper Size and Type.")

 

 
VOLUME CONTROL

Return to Overview


VOLUME CONTROL
Setting Item Description
1. MONITOR VOLUME Sets the volume for monitor tone during the fax transmission.
  • ON (1-3)
  • OFF
2. RING VOLUME Sets the volume of the ring produced when the machine detects a call. (1-3)
3. ENTRY TONE Beeps when pressing the keys on the operation panel.
  • ON (1-3)
  • OFF
4. ERROR TONE Beeps when an error (e.g., TX error) occurs.
  • ON (1-3)
  • OFF
5. TX JOB DONE TONE Beeps when a document is sent.
  • ERROR ONLY (1-3)
  • OFF
  • ON (1-3)
6. RX JOB DONE TONE Beeps when a document is received.
  • ERROR ONLY (1-3)
  • OFF
  • ON (1-3)
7. SCAN DONE TONE Beeps when scanning is completed.
  • ERROR ONLY (1-3)
  • OFF
  • ON (1-3)
8. PRINT DONE TONE Beeps when printing is completed.
  • ERROR ONLY (1-3)
  • OFF
  • ON (1-3)

 

 
COMMON SETTINGS

Return to Overview


COMMON SETTINGS
Setting Item Description
1. TONER SAVER MODE Sets whether to reduce toner consumption.
  • OFF
  • ON
* This function is not effective for print jobs. (See "PRINTER SETTINGS.")
2. PRINTER DENSITY Recalibrates the density adjustment scale if differences between the image in the document and the print occur. (1-9)
* This function is not effective for print jobs. (See "PRINTER SETTINGS.")
3. AUTO CASS. SELCT Sets whether to change to another paper source of the same size if the current paper source runs out while processing a job. Sets whether to select the appropriate paper source based on the original's size and copy ratio settings (when making a copy), or the set ratio of the image (when receiving a fax).

1.COPY

Sets whether to activate Auto Cassette Select function when copying.
  • 1. CASSETTE 1 (ON/OFF)
  • 2. CASSETTE 2 (ON/OFF)*
  • 3. MP TRAY (OFF/ON)

2.PRINTER**

Sets whether to activate Auto Cassette Select function when printing.
  • 1. CASSETTE 1 (ON/OFF)
  • 2. CASSETTE 2 (ON/OFF)*

3.RECEIVE (FAX***)

Sets whether to activate the Auto Cassette Select function when receiving fax/I-fax documents.
  • 1. CASSETTE 1 (ON/OFF)
  • 2. CASSETTE 2 (ON/OFF)*
  • 3. MP TRAY (OFF/ON)

4.OTHER

Sets whether to activate Auto Cassette Select function when printing a report or list.
  • 1. CASSETTE 1 (ON/OFF)
  • 2. CASSETTE 2 (ON/OFF)*
  • 3. MP TRAY (OFF/ON).
4. ENERGY IN SLEEP Selects power consumption when the machine is in the Sleep mode between two levels.
  • LOW
  • HIGH
5. DISPLAY LANGUAGE Selects the language on the display. (See "Specifications.")
6. ADF DIRTY ERROR Sets whether the error message will appear when the ADF is dirty.
  • DO NOT DISPLAY
  • DISPLAY
7. INIT. COMMON SET. Restores all <COMMON SETTINGS> to the default except for <DISPLAY LANGUAGE>.
Press [] to select <YES>.
If you do not want to restore all settings, press [ ] to select <NO>.

* Only for users of the optional paper cassette
** For the LASER CLASS 810 an optional network printer kit is required
*** LASER CLASS 810 Only

 

 
COPY SETTINGS

Return to Overview


COPY SETTINGS
Setting Item Description
1. AUTO ZOOM Sets whether to set the zoom ratio for copying automatically.
  • OFF
  • ON
2. COPY DENSITY Sets the density for copying. (1-9)
3. COL. Sets whether to collate the copies automatically.
  • OFF
  • ON
4. STANDARD SETTINGS Sets the default setting for copying.

1. IMAGE QUALITY

Sets the document type for copying.
  • TEXT/PHOTO
  • TEXT
  • PHOTO

2. DENSITY

Sets the density for copying.
  • STANDARD
  • DARK
  • LIGHT

3. COPIES

Sets the number of copies (1-99).

4. 2-SIDED

Sets whether to make the two-sided copies automatically.
  • OFF
  • 1 > 2-SIDED
  • 2 > 2-SIDED
  • 2 > 1-SIDED

5. PAPER SELECT

Sets the paper source for copying.
  • CASSETTE 1
  • CASSETTE 2*
5. SHARPNESS Adjusts the sharpness of the copied image. (1-9)
6. PAPER SIZE GROUP Selects a paper size group for your machine.
  • INCHES
  • A
  • AB
7. INIT. COPY SET. Restores all <COPY SETTINGS> to the default.
Press [] to select <YES>.
If you do not want to restore all settings, press [ ] to select <NO>.

* Only for users of the optional paper cassette

 

 
TX/RX SETTINGS

Return to Overview


TX/RX SETTINGS
Setting Item Description
1. TX/RX COMMON SET. Sets the features common to the fax and send functions.

1. TX SETTINGS

Sets the transmission features.

1. UNIT NAME

Registers your name/company name (max. 24 characters, including spaces). (See "Set the Machine for Sending Faxes.")

2. DATA COMPRESSION*

Sets the compression ratio for color scanned data. A high compression ratio reduces the amount of memory used for the document, but results in low quality images. On the contrary, a low compression ratio increases the amount of memory used for the document, but results in high quality images.
  • NORMAL
  • HIGH RATIO
  • LOW RATIO

3. RETRY TIMES*

Sets the number of retry attempts for sending jobs to an e-mail or file server address. (0-5) (See "Setting Number of Retry Attempts (E-Mail/I-Fax/File Server) (LASER CLASS 830i Only).")

4. SCANNING DENSITY

Adjusts the scanning density for sending documents. (1-9)

5. STANDARD SETTINGS

Sets the default settings for sending documents.

1. DENSITY

Sets the default density for the document you send.
  • STANDARD
  • DK
  • LT

2. RESOLUTION

Sets the default resolution for the document you send. (200 x 200dpi, 200 x 400dpi, 300 x 300dpi, 400 x 400dpi, 600 x 600dpi, 100 x 100dpi, 150 x 150dpi, 200 x 100dpi)

3. IMAGE FORMAT*

Sets the default file format for the document you send.
  • PDF
  • TIFF (B&W)
  • PDF (COMPACT)
  • JPEG

4. ORIGINAL TYPE*

Sets the default original type for the document you send.
  • TEXT/PHOTO
  • TEXT
  • PHOTO

5. DIVIDE INTO PAGES*

Sets whether to use <DIVIDE INTO PAGES> as default.
  • OFF
  • ON

6. DIRECT TX

Sets whether to use <DIRECT TX> as default.
  • OFF
  • ON

7. STAMP DOCUMENT

Sets whether to use <STAMP DOCUMENT> as default.
  • OFF
  • ON

6. SEND SETTINGS*

Sets the options for sending documents to an e-mail address or file server.

1. TX FILE NAME

Sets the name of the document you send to an e-mail address or file server. (max. 24 characters, including spaces.)

2. SUBJECT

Sets the subject for your e-mail message. (max. 40 characters, including spaces.)

3. MESSAGE TEXT

Sets the message body text for your e-mail message. (max. 140 characters, including spaces.)

4. REPLY-TO

Sets the reply-to address for your e-mail message. (max. 120 characters, including spaces.)

5. E-MAIL PRIORITY

Selects the priority for your e-mail message.
  • NORMAL
  • LOW
  • HIGH

7. TX TERMINAL ID

Sets the options for sender information.

1. PRINTING POSITION

Selects where the sender information is printed in small type at the top of each page.
  • OUTSIDE IMAGE
  • INSIDE IMAGE

2. TELEPHONE # MARK

Prefixes your number with the abbreviations FAX or TEL in your sender information.
  • FAX
  • TEL

8. COLOR TX GAMMA*

Sets the gamma value for color scanned data. If the set value corresponds to the gamma value at the recipient's machine, the scan exposure of the output data at the recipient's machine is automatically adjusted to the level best suited to the quality of the original.
(GAMMA 1.8, GAMMA 2.2, GAMMA 1.0, GAMMA 1.4)

9. SHARPNESS*

Sets the contrast of the images you scan. (1-7)

10. ROTATE TX*

Sets whether to use the TX Rotation function. TX Rotation function automatically corrects the orientation of the document by rotating the image when sending. For example, if you set a document that has a horizontal orientation vertically on the machine, the machine rotates the image and sends it horizontally.
You can use the TX Rotation mode for an A4 and a LTR document only. The TX Rotation mode is not available if you are using the Direct Sending or Manual Sending.
This settings is only enabled when sending faxes.
  • ON
  • OFF

11. INIT STANDARD SET

Sets whether to restore <STANDARD SETTINGS> in <TX SETTINGS> to the default.
Press [] to select <YES>.
If you do not want to restore all settings, press [ ] to select <NO>.

2. RX SETTINGS

Sets the reception features.

1. SELECT CASSETTE

You can set how the machine prints documents when there is no paper matching the size of the received document.

SWITCH A

The image is printed over two sheets of paper that have the same combined size as the received document.
  • ON
  • OFF

SWITCH B

The image is printed with blank space on paper that has the same width as the received document.
  • ON
  • OFF

2. TWO-SIDED PRINT

Sets whether the machine prints received documents on both sides of the paper. (See "Two-Sided Printing.")
  • OFF
  • ON

3. RECEIVE REDUCTION

Sets whether the received images print out at a reduced size. (See "Received Image Reduction.")

ON

Image reduction is turned on.

1. RX REDUCTION

Selects the reducing type.
  • AUTO
  • FIXED REDUCTION (90%, 95%, 97%, 75%)

2. RX DIRECTION

Selects the reducing direction.
  • VERTICAL ONLY
  • HORIZ & VERTICAL

OFF

Image reduction is turned off.

4. RX PAGE FOOTER

Sets whether to insert the machine's fax number and the sender information on received faxes.
  • OFF
  • ON

5. CONT. PRINTING

Selects how the machine responds when the <TONER LOW/ PREPARE NEW TONER> message appears.

RX TO MEMORY

The machine stores all documents in memory.

KEEP PRINTING

The machine does not store documents in memory if the toner runs out. Reset to <RX TO MEMORY> after replacing the toner cartridge.
2. FAX SETTINGS Set the fax features.

1. RX MODE

Selects the receive mode. (See "Set the Machine for Receiving Faxes.")
  • FaxOnly
  • FaxTel
  • AnsMode
  • DRPD
  • Manual

2. USER SETTINGS

Specifies the basic operation settings in the fax mode.

1. UNIT TELEPHONE #

Registers your fax number (max. 20 characters, including spaces). (See "Set the Machine for Sending Faxes.")

2. TEL LINE TYPE

Selects the telephone line type. (See "Set the Machine for Sending Faxes.")
  • TOUCH TONE
  • ROTARY PULSE

3. OFFHOOK ALARM

Sets whether the alarm sounds when the handset of the external telephone is off the hook.
  • ON
  • OFF

3. TX SETTINGS

Sets the transmission features.

1. ECM TX

Sets whether the ECM (Error Correction Mode) transmission is activated.
  • ON
  • OFF

2. PAUSE TIME

Sets the pause time when you insert pause into the dialing sequence. (1SEC–15SEC)

3. AUTO REDIAL

Sets whether to redial automatically when the other line is busy or a transmission error occurs. (See "Setting Automatic Redialing (Fax).")

ON

Customizes the redial operation.

1. REDIAL TIMES

Sets the number of retries. (1TIMES-10TIMES)

2. REDIAL INTERVAL

Sets period of time before redialing. (2MIN.-99MIN.)

3. TX ERROR REDIAL

Sets whether the machine redials automatically when transmission error occurs.
  • ON
  • OFF

OFF

After the first attempt at dialing fails, redialing is not attempted.

4. TIME OUT

Sets whether to scan a document automatically after specifying destination.
* This function is not available when you dial with the numeric keys.
  • OFF
  • ON

5. STAMP DOCUMENT

Sets whether to stamp documents when sending with Direct TX or Memory TX, or to stamp documents only when sending with Direct TX.
If you are using the LASER CLASS 830i, this setting is enabled when sending to a fax, I-fax, e-mail, or file server destination.
  • DIRECT&MEMORY TX
  • DIRECT TX

6. DIALING LINE CHCK

Sets whether to check the telephone line condition.
  • OFF
  • ON

4. RX SETTINGS

Sets the reception features.

1. ECM RX

Sets whether the ECM (Error Correction Mode) reception is activated.
  • ON
  • OFF

2. FAX/TEL OPT. SET

Sets the optional items in <FaxTel> mode. (See "FaxTel: Optional Settings.")

1. RING START TIME

Sets the time the machine takes to check whether a call is a fax or a voice call. (0SEC-30SEC)

2. F/T RING TIME

Selects the ring length for voice calls. (15SEC-300SEC)

3. F/T SWITCH ACTION

Selects whether the machine switches to receive mode after the ring time has elapsed, or whether if disconnects the call.
  • RECEIVE
  • DISCONNECT

3. DRPD:SELECT FAX

Selects the ring pattern for fax calls.
  • DOUBLE RING
  • SHORT-SHORT-LONG
  • SHORT-LONG-SHORT
  • OTHER RING TYPE
  • NORMAL RING

4. INCOMING RING

Sets whether the external telephone rings when the machine receives a fax. This function is only available when <RX MODE> is set to <FaxOnly> or <FaxTel>.

ON

The telephone rings when the machine receives a fax if an external telephone is connected.

RING COUNT

Sets the number of incoming rings before the machine answers. (1TIMES-99TIMES)

OFF

The telephone does not ring when the machine receives a fax.
(In the Sleep mode, the telephone may ring one or two times.)

5. REMOTE RX

Sets whether to use remote receiving. This function is not available when <ENERGY IN SLEEP> in <COMMON SETTINGS> is set to <LOW>. (See "Registering Remote Reception ID.")

ON

The machine enables remote receiving.

REMOTE RX ID

You can dial a code on remote extension to start receiving a document.
A combination of two characters using 0 to 9, * and # is possible.

OFF

The machine disables remote receiving.

6. MANUAL/AUTO

Sets whether the machine switches to the document receive mode after the external telephone rings for a specified length of time in the manual receive mode.

OFF

The external telephone keeps ringing until someone answers the call manually.

ON

The machine switches to document receive mode after the external telephone rings for a specified time.

F/T RING TIME

Sets the length of time to elapse before the machine switches to document receiving. (1SEC-99SEC)

7. RX RESTRICTION

You can reject faxes from senders with no fax/telephone number in their sender information. (See "Advanced Sending Features.")

OFF

All receptions are conducted.

ON

Receives the fax only from the sending fax machine that sends the TSI signal.

* LASER CLASS 830i Only

 

 
ADDRESS BOOK SET.

Return to Overview


ADDRESS BOOK SET.
Setting Item Description
1. FAVORITES BUTTONS* Registers destinations together with a combination of the scan and send settings for frequent use. (M1–M4: One-touch keys 01 to 04 are used for this feature.)

FAX

Registers fax numbers.

1. TEL NUMBER ENTRY

Registers the recipient's fax number (max. 120 digits, including spaces).

2. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (max. 16 characters, including spaces).

3. IMAGEQUALITY

Sets the image quality. (See "Storing Favorites Buttons (LASER CLASS 830i Only).")
  • FINE
  • PHOTO
  • SUPER FINE
  • ULTRA FINE
  • STANDARD

4. OPTIONAL SETTING

Selects whether to use the advanced functional settings for each one-touch key registered in the machine.

OFF

The optional setting is not set for this destination.

ON

The optional setting is set for this destination.

1. ECM

Selects whether to use ECM (Error Correction Mode).
  • ON
  • OFF

2. TX SPEED

Select the transmission speed.
(33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 4800bps)

3. INTERNATIONAL

Selects a mode for documents you are sending. (See "Registering Fax Numbers.")
  • DOMESTIC
  • LONG DISTANCE 1
  • LONG DISTANCE 2
  • LONG DISTANCE 3

E-MAIL

Registers e-mail addresses.

1. E-MAIL ADDRESS

Registers the recipient's e-mail address (max. 120 digits).

2. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (max. 16 characters, including spaces).

3. IMAGE FORMAT

Sets the file format for the file attached to e-mail message.
  • PDF
  • TIFF (B&W)
  • PDF (COMPACT)
  • JPEG

4. DIVIDE INTO PAGES

Sets if multiple images are sent as separate files or as a single file.

OFF

Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them.

ON

Separates multiple images and send them as separate files.

5. IMAGEQUALITY

Sets the resolution of the document you send.
(200 x 200dpi, 200 x 400dpi, 300 x 300dpi, 400 x 400dpi,
600 x 600dpi, 100 x 100dpi, 150 x 150dpi, 200 x 100dpi)
(See "Advanced Sending Features.")

6. ORIGINAL TYPE

Sets the original type for the document you send.
  • TEXT/PHOTO
  • TEXT
  • PHOTO

IFAX

Registers I-fax addresses.

1. I-FAX ADDRESS

Registers the recipient's I-fax address (max. 120 digits).

2. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (max. 16 characters, including spaces).

3. DIVIDE INTO PAGES

Sets if multiple images are sent as separate files or as a single file.

OFF

Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them.

ON

Separates multiple images and send them as separate files.

4. IMAGEQUALITY

Sets the resolution of the document you send.
(200 x 200dpi, 200 x 400dpi, 300 x 300dpi, 400 x 400dpi, 600 x 600dpi, 100 x 100dpi, 150 x 150dpi, 200 x 100dpi)
(See "Advanced Sending Features.")

5. ORIGINAL TYPE

Sets the original type for the document you send.
  • TEXT/PHOTO
  • TEXT
  • PHOTO

FTP

Registers FTP addresses.

1. HOST NAME

Registers the name of the file server (max. 120 characters).

2. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (max. 16 characters, including spaces).

3. FILE PATH

Registers the path to the file server (max. 120 characters).

4. LOGIN NAME

Registers the login name to access the file server (max. 24 characters).

5. PASSWORD

Registers the password to access the file server (max. 24 characters).

6. IMAGE FORMAT

Sets the file format.
  • PDF
  • TIFF (B&W)
  • PDF (COMPACT)
  • JPEG

7. DIVIDE INTO PAGES

Sets if multiple images are sent as separate files or as a single file.

OFF

Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them.

ON

Separates multiple images and send them as separate files.

8. IMAGEQUALITY

Sets the resolution of the document you send.
(200 x 200dpi, 200 x 400dpi, 300 x 300dpi, 400 x 400dpi,
600 x 600dpi, 100 x 100dpi, 150 x 150dpi, 200 x 100dpi)
(See "Advanced Sending Features.")

9. ORIGINAL TYPE

Sets the original type for the document you send.
  • TEXT/PHOTO
  • TEXT
  • PHOTO

SMB

Registers SMB addresses.

1. HOST NAME

Registers the name of the file server (max. 120 characters).

2. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (max. 16 characters, including spaces).

3. FILE PATH

Registers the path to the file server (max. 120 characters).

4. LOGIN NAME

Registers the login name to access the file server (max. 24 characters).

5. PASSWORD

Registers the password to access the file server (max. 14 characters).

6. IMAGE FORMAT

Sets the file format.
  • PDF
  • TIFF (B&W)
  • PDF (COMPACT)
  • JPEG

7. DIVIDE INTO PAGES

Sets if multiple images are sent as separate files or as a single file.

OFF

Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them.

ON

Separates multiple images and send them as separate files.

8. IMAGEQUALITY

Sets the resolution of the document you send.
(200 x 200dpi, 200 x 400dpi, 300 x 300dpi, 400 x 400dpi,
600 x 600dpi, 100 x 100dpi, 150 x 150dpi, 200 x 100dpi)
(See "Advanced Sending Features.")

9. ORIGINAL TYPE

Sets the original type for the document you send.
  • TEXT/PHOTO
  • TEXT
  • PHOTO
2. 1-TOUCH SPD DIAL Registers the information on one-touch speed dialing. Up to 8 destinations can be registered. (See "Storing/Editing Address Book.")

FAX

Registers fax numbers.

1. TEL NUMBER ENTRY

Registers the recipient's fax number (max. 120 digits, including spaces).

2. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (max. 16 characters, including spaces).

3. OPTIONAL SETTING

Sets the optional settings for sending faxes.

OFF

The optional setting is not set.

ON

The optional setting is set.

1. ECM

Selects whether to use ECM (Error Correction Mode).
  • ON
  • OFF

2. TX SPEED

Selects a transmission speed.
(33600 bps, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 4800 bps)

3. LONG DISTANCE

Selects a mode for documents you are sending. (See "Registering Fax Numbers.")
  • DOMESTIC
  • LONG DISTANCE 1
  • LONG DISTANCE 2
  • LONG DISTANCE 3

E-MAIL*

Registers e-mail addresses.

1. E-MAIL ADDRESS

Registers the recipient's e-mail address (max. 120 digits).

2. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (max. 16 characters, including spaces).

IFAX*

Registers I-fax addresses.

1. I-FAX ADDRESS

Registers the recipient's I-fax address (max. 120 digits).

2. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (max. 16 characters, including spaces).

FTP*

Registers FTP addresses.

1. HOST NAME

Registers the name of the file server (max. 120 characters).

2. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (max. 16 characters, including spaces).

3. FILE PATH

Registers the path to the file server (max. 120 characters).

4. LOGIN NAME

Registers the login name to access the file server (max. 24 characters).

5. PASSWORD

Registers the password to access the file server (max. 24 characters).

SMB*

Registers SMB addresses.

1. HOST NAME

Registers the name of the file server (max. 120 characters).

2. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (max. 16 characters, including spaces).

3. FILE PATH

Registers the path to the file server (max. 120 characters).

4. LOGIN NAME

Registers the login name to access the file server (max. 24 characters).

5. PASSWORD

Registers the password to access the file server (max. 14 characters).
3. CODED SPD DIAL Registers the information on coded speed dialing. Up to 100 destinations can be registered. (See "Storing/Editing Address Book.")

FAX

Registers fax numbers.

1. TEL NUMBER ENTRY

Registers the recipient's fax number (max. 120 digits, including spaces).

2. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (max. 16 characters, including spaces).

3. OPTIONAL SETTING

Sets the optional settings for sending faxes.

OFF

The optional setting is not set.

ON

The optional setting is set.

1. ECM

Selects whether to use ECM (Error Correction Mode).
  • ON
  • OFF

2. TX SPEED

Selects a transmission speed.
(33600 bps, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 4800 bps)

3. LONG DISTANCE

Selects a mode for documents you are sending. (See "Registering Fax Numbers.")
  • DOMESTIC
  • LONG DISTANCE 1
  • LONG DISTANCE 2
  • LONG DISTANCE 3

E-MAIL*

Registers e-mail addresses.

1. E-MAIL ADDRESS

Registers the recipient's e-mail address (max. 120 digits).

2. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (max. 16 characters, including spaces).

IFAX*

Registers I-fax addresses.

1. I-FAX ADDRESS

Registers the recipient's I-fax address (max. 120 digits).

2. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (max. 16 characters, including spaces).

FTP*

Registers FTP addresses.

1. HOST NAME

Registers the name of the file server (max. 120 characters).

2. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (max. 16 characters, including spaces).

3. FILE PATH

Registers the path to the file server (max. 120 characters).

4. LOGIN NAME

Registers the login name to access the file server (max. 24 characters).

5. PASSWORD

Registers the password to access the file server (max. 24 characters).

SMB*

Registers SMB addresses.

1. HOST NAME

Registers the name of the file server (max. 120 characters).

2. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (max. 16 characters, including spaces).

3. FILE PATH

Registers the path to the file server (max. 120 characters).

4. LOGIN NAME

Registers the login name to access the file server (max. 24 characters).

5. PASSWORD

Registers the password to access the file server (max. 14 characters).
4. GROUP DIAL Registers destinations in group addresses. Up to 199 (LASER CLASS 810)/499 (LASER CLASS 830i) destinations can be registered in a group. (See "Registering Group Addresses.")

1. SELECT ADD/TEL NO

Registers the recipient's numbers and addresses by specifying the one-touch keys or coded dial codes.

2. NAME

Registers the group name (max. 16 characters, including spaces).

* LASER CLASS 830i Only

 

 
PRINTER SETTINGS

Return to Overview


PRINTER SETTINGS*
Setting Item Description
1. DEFAULT PAPERSIZE Sets the default paper size when no paper source is specified.
(A4, B5, A5, LGL, LTR, EXECUTIV, STMT, ISO-B5, ISO-C5, COM10, MONARCH, DL)
2. DEFAULT PAPERTYPE Sets the default paper type for print jobs. This machine has internally defined optimal print modes for each specified paper type.
(PLAIN PAPER, COLOR, RECYCLED, HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY PAPER 2, HEAVY PAPER 3, BOND, TRANSPARENCY, LABELS, ENVELOPE )
3. COPIES Sets the number of documents printed. (1-999)
4. 2-SIDED PRINTING Sets whether to activate two-sided printing.
  • OFF
  • ON
5. PRINT QUALITY Sets the image quality, density or toner saving mode for printing.

1. IMAGE REFINEMENT

Sets whether to print smoothly the jagged outlines of characters and graphics.
  • ON
  • OFF

2. DENSITY

Adjusts the print density. (1-9)

3. TONER SAVER

Sets whether the toner saving mode is enabled.
  • OFF
  • ON
6. PAGE LAYOUT Sets the printing layout.

1. BINDING

Sets the binding position for two-sided printing.
  • LONG EDGE
  • SHORT EDGE

2. MARGIN

Sets the page margin in inches or millimeters.
  • INCHES (-01.90INCHES-01.90INCHES)
  • MM (-50.0MM-50.0MM)
7. AUTO ERROR SKIP Sets whether to skip errors and automatically continue printing.

ON

When an error occurs, printing automatically continues if the error can be skipped.

OFF

When an error occurs, a message is displayed, and the printer function stops until the job is canceled.
8. COLLATE Sets whether to collate the printouts automatically.
  • OFF
  • COLLATE
9. ERROR TIME OUT Sets the length of time before the machine returns an error when no data is received from the computer.

ON

Sets the error time out period. (5SEC-300SEC)

OFF

The error time out is off.
10. INIT. PRINTER SET Restores all <PRINTER SETTINGS> to the default.
Press [] to select <YES>.
If you do not want to restore all settings, press [ ] to select <NO>.
11. PCL SETTINGS** Sets the PCL printer setting.

1. PAPER SAVE

Sets whether to save blank pages.
  • OFF
  • ON

2. ORIENTATION

Sets the paper orientation.
  • PORTRAIT
  • LANDSCAPE

3. FONT NUMBER

Sets the default font typeface for the printer function using the corresponding font numbers. (0-91)

4. POINT SIZE

Specifies a point size for the default font. This item appears when the number in <FONT NUMBER> is that of a proportionally spaced scalable font. (4.00-999.75)

5. PITCH

Specifies the pitch for the default font. This item appears when the number in <FONT NUMBER> is that of a fixed pitch scalable font. (0.44-99.99)

6. FORM LINES

Sets the number of lines to be printed on a page. (5-128)

7. SYMBOL SET

Selects the symbol set most suited to the needs of the host computer.

8. CUSTOM PAPER

Sets whether to use a custom paper size.

OFF

Disables you to specify a custom paper size.

ON

Enables you to specify a custom paper size.

1. UNIT OF MEASURE

Selects the unit of measurement to specify a custom paper size.
  • INCHES
  • MILLIMETERS

2. X DIMENSION

Specifies the horizontal size of the custom paper.
(05.00-14.00 inches (127-356 mm))

3. Y DIMENSION

Specifies the vertical size of the custom paper.
(03.00-08.50 inches (76-216 mm))

9. APPEND CR TO LF

Sets whether to append a carriage return (CR) when line feed code (LF) is received.

NO

The print head moves down to the next line when line feed code is received, and the margin does not change (such as the beginning of the next line).

YES

The print head moves to the beginning of the next line when line feed code is received.

10. ENLARGE A4

Sets whether to expand the printable area of A4 size paper to that of Letter size in width.
* This setting is applicable for A4 paper and portrait orientation for the PCL5 printing only. The PCL6 printing is not supported.

OFF

All the area on a page 1/8 inch (4.23 mm) from the top, bottom, left, and right edges is available for printing on A4 paper.

ON

All the area on a page 1/8 inch (4.23 mm) from the top and bottom edges and 1/8 inch (3.30 mm) from the left and right edges is available for printing on A4 paper. Only the width increases.

11. HALFTONES

Specifies the display pattern of subtle gradation (medium gradation) for black-and-white data for each text part, graphics part and image part.

1. TEXT

Enables this function to text parts.

RESOLUTION

Prints precisely so that the lines of text data appear clearly. This setting is appropriate for printing data that contains text or thin lines.

TONE

Prints with a stable texture and distinct gradation, by enhancing the contrast of tone. This setting is appropriate for printing image data such as photographic images.

GRADATION

Prints with a smooth gradation and fine outline quality combined. This setting is appropriate for printing diagrams or graphs in which gradation is used.

2. GRAPHICS

Enables this function to graphics parts such as diagrams and graphs.
  • TONE
  • GRADATION
  • RESOLUTION

3. IMAGE

Enables this function to graphics parts such as picture images.
  • TONE
  • GRADATION
  • RESOLUTION
12. RESET PRINTER Clears all print jobs in progress and resets the printer function.
Press [] to select <YES>.
If you do not want to restore all settings, press [ ] to select <NO>.

* For the LASER CLASS 810 an optional network printer kit is required
** LASER CLASS 830i Only

 

 
TIMER SETTINGS

Return to Overview


TIMER SETTINGS
Setting Item Description
1. DATE&TIME SETTING Sets the current date and time. (See "Set the Date and Time.")
2. TIME ZONE SETTING Sets the time zone of your machine's location. (See "Setting Time Zone.")
3. DATE TYPE SELECT Sets the date format.
  • MM/DD/YYYY
  • DD/MM YYYY
  • YYYY MM/DD
4. AUTO SLEEP TIME Sets auto sleep mode when the machine remains idle for a certain period of time. (3MIN.–30MIN.) (See "Setting Sleep Mode.")
  • ON
  • OFF
5. AUTO CLEAR TIME Sets auto clear mode when the machine has no operation idle for a certain period of time. (1MIN.–9MIN.) The machine returns to standby mode. (See "Setting Auto Clear Time")
  • ON
  • OFF
6. DAYLIGHT SV.TIME Sets daylight saving time mode. (See "Setting Daylight Saving Time.")

OFF

Deactivates daylight saving time mode.

ON

Activates daylight saving time mode.

1. START DATE/TIME

Sets the start date.
  • 1. MONTH
  • 2. WEEK
  • 3. DAY

2. END DATE/TIME

Sets the end date.
  • 1. MONTH
  • 2. WEEK
  • 3. DAY

 

 
ADJUST./CLEANING

Return to Overview


ADJUST./CLEANING
Setting Item Description
1. TRANS. ROLR CLEAN Cleans the transcription roller. (See "Transcription Roller.")
2. FIX.UNIT CLEANING Cleans the fuser roller. (See "Fuser Roller")
3. FEEDER CLEANING Cleans the ADF. (See "Cleaning the ADF Automatically.")
4. SPECIAL MODE M Sets to improve print quality or fix irregular print density. If print quality decreases or an irregularity in the print density appears, transcription output may not function adequately.

MID

Selects in normal conditions.

LOW

Selects to compensate for poor print quality that occurs when using paper that was stored for a long time at high temperatures and high humidity.

HIGH

Selects to compensate for poor quality that occurs when using heavyweight paper.
5. SPECIAL MODE N When the two-sided printing function is used, paper may curl severely or become jammed. Enable this setting to prevent paper curling or jamming.
  • OFF
  • ON
6. SPECIAL MODE P Sets to activate when lightweight paper or paper which is easy to get uneven print density is used for printing.
  • OFF
  • ON
7. SPECIAL MODE Q Enable this setting if black or white spots appear on the printed image.
  • OFF
  • ON
8. SPECIAL MODE R Sets whether to prevent white streaks from appearing on the printed image. When you print the halftone image or photograph after the machine has not undergone any operation for a while, the first page of printouts may have thin white streaks on the printed image.
  • OFF
  • ON
9. SPECIAL MODE S Sets whether to reduce the waiting time for the next printout. When you change the paper size after continuous printing, the machine may take a while to start the next printing.

OFF

Does not reduce the waiting time next set of printout. (default)

SPEED PRIORITY

Reduces the waiting time to start the next set of printout. Print speed has priority; however, a condition that an previously printed image also appears faintly on the next output may occur.
10. CONT. PRINT MODE Sets whether to prevent the back edge of the previous page from appearing on the following page during continuous printing of half-tone prints or photographs.
  • OFF
  • ON
11. BACK EDGE MODE Sets whether to prevent back edge of paper from smudging.
  • OFF
  • ON
12. LARGE PAPER MODE Sets whether to improve toner fix on large-sized paper.
  • OFF
  • ON
13. AUTO ADF DRTY ADJ Sets whether to activate smudge (due to dust or dirt) reduction during printing. When the ADF is dirty, copies may contain unwanted dots or lines.
  • OFF
  • ON
14. MAINTENANCE CODE This setting is not functional in this model.

 

 
REPORT SETTINGS

Return to Overview


REPORT SETTINGS
Setting Item Description
1. SETTINGS Sets the report functions. (See "Printing Reports Automatically.")

1. TX REPORT

Sets whether the transmission report prints out.

PRINT ERROR ONLY

Prints a report only when a transmission error occurs.

REPORT WITH TX IMAGE

Sets whether to print the first page of the document under the report.
  • OFF
  • ON

OUTPUT YES

Prints a report every time you send a document.

REPORT WITH TX IMAGE

Sets whether to print the first page of the document under the report.
  • OFF
  • ON

OUTPUT NO

No report is printed.

2. RX REPORT

Sets whether the reception report prints out.
  • OUTPUT NO
  • PRINT ERROR ONLY
  • OUTPUT YES

3. ACTIVITY REPORT

Sets whether to automatically print the transaction report and selects its type.

1. AUTO PRINT

Sets whether an activity report is printed automatically every 40 transactions. If TX Document Archiving is set to <ON>, the activity report is automatically set to be printed every 40 transmissions, and the settings under <AUTO PRINT> are not displayed.
  • OUTPUT YES
  • OUTPUT NO

2. TX/RX SEPARATE

Sets whether an activity report is printed separately for sending and receiving or not.
  • OFF
  • ON
2. LIST PRINT Prints reports/lists.

1. ACTIVITY REPORT

Prints the transaction report (max. last 40 transactions) manually.
Press [] to select <YES>.
If you do not want to print the list, press [ ] to select <NO>.

2. SPEED DIAL LIST

Prints the list of destinations registered in Address Book.
Press [] to select <YES>.
If you do not want to print the list, press [ ] to select <NO>.
  • 1. 1-TOUCH LIST
  • 2. CODED DIAL LIST
  • 3. GROUP DIAL LIST

3. ADD BOOK DETAILS*

Prints the details of Address Book.
Press [] to select <YES>.
If you do not want to print the list, press [ ] to select <NO>.
  • 1. 1-TOUCH(DETAILS)
  • 2. CODED (DETAILS)

4. USER DATA LIST

Prints the setting list registered in the menu. (See "Printing USER'S DATA LIST.")
Press [] to select <YES>.
If you do not want to print the list, press [ ] to select <NO>.

5. FORWARDING CONDITIONS LIST

Prints the contents of the forwarding settings that have been specified.
Press [] to select <YES>.
If you do not want to restore all settings, press [] to select <NO>.

 

 
SYSTEM SETTINGS

Return to Overview


SYSTEM SETTINGS
Setting Item Description
1. SYS. MANAGER INFO Sets the system manager information to protect the contents of <SYSTEM SETTINGS>. Once the system manager ID and system password is set, they must be entered every time you access the <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu.

1. SYS. MANAGER ID

Sets the system manager ID (seven digits).

2. SYSTEM PASSWORD

Sets the system manager password (seven digits).

3. SYSTEM MANAGER

Sets the system manager name (max. 32 characters, including spaces).
2. DEVICE INFO Sets device information.

1. DEVICE NAME

Registers the machine name (max. 32 characters, including spaces).

2. LOCATION

Registers the machine location (max. 32 characters, including spaces).
3. MANAGE DEPT. ID Sets if the department ID management is used.

OFF

The department ID management is not used.

ON

The department ID management is used.

1. REGISTER DEPT. ID

Registers the seven digit department ID (max. 30).

1. PASSWORD

Registers the department ID management password.

2. PAGE LIMIT SET.

Sets page limits for scans, prints, and copies from 0 to 999,999 pages.

1. TOTAL PRINT LIMIT

Sets if the total page limit is used.
  • OFF
  • ON (000000-999999)

2. COPY LIMIT

Sets if the copy limit is used.
  • OFF
  • ON (000000-999999)

3. BLACK SCAN LIMIT

Sets if the scan limit is used.
  • OFF
  • ON (000000-999999)

4. COLOR SCAN LIMIT

Sets if the color scan limit is used.
  • OFF
  • ON (000000-999999)

5. PRINT LIMIT

Sets if the print limit is used.
  • OFF
  • ON (000000-999999)

3. ERASE

Erases the department ID and password.
Press [] to select <YES>.
If you do not want to erase all settings, press [ ] to select <NO>.

2. PAGE TOTALS

Displays, clears, and prints counter information.

1. VIEW PAGE TOTALS

Displays how much paper was used by each department.
  • 1. TOTAL PRINT
  • 2. COPY
  • 3. SCAN
  • 4. COLOR SCAN
  • 5. PRINT

2. CLEAR ALL TOTAL

Clears counter information.
Press [] to select <YES>.
If you do not want to clear the settings, press [ ] to select <NO>.

3. PRINT LIST

Prints counter information.
Press [] to select <YES>.
If you do not want to print the list, press [ ] to select <NO>.

3. PDL JOBS W/OUT ID

Sets if print jobs from computers with unknown IDs are accepted or rejected.

ON

Accepts print jobs from computers with unknown IDs.

OFF

Rejects print jobs from computers with unknown IDs.
4. MANAGE USER ID Sets if the user ID management is used.
  • OFF
  • ON
5. NETWORK SETTINGS* Sets network setting.

1. TCP/IP SETTINGS

Sets TCP/IP network.

1. IPv4 SETTINGS

Sets TCP/IPv4 network.

1. IP ADDRESS

Sets IPv4 Address settings.
  • 1. IP ADDRESS AUTO.
  • 2. IP ADDRESS
  • 3. SUBNET MASK
  • 4. GATEWAY ADDRESS

1. IP ADDRESS AUTO.

Sets whether to automatically set an IP address.

ON

Enables an IP address to the machine automatically.
  • 1. DHCP (ON/OFF)
  • 2. BOOTP (OFF/ON)
  • 3. RARP (OFF/ON)

OFF

Allocates an IP address to the machine manually.

2. IP ADDRESS

Registers a fixed IP address to the machine. (See "Set the Machine for Network Usage.")

3. SUBNET MASK

Registers a fixed subnet mask to the machine.

4. GATEWAY ADDRESS

Registers a fixed gateway address to the machine.

2. PING COMMAND

Enter the IP address of a device on the network and press [OK] to check whether the machine can connect to that device.

3. SET IP ADD RANGE

Sets whether to restrict the range of IP addresses.

OFF

Disables restriction of IP address of computers.

ON

Enables you to set which IP addresses can send data (print/fax jobs) to the machine. You can select to permit or reject up to eight ranges of IP addresses. Set each range of IP addresses by entering an IP address in both <START IP ADDRESS> and <END IP ADDRESS>.
  • 1. IP ADDRESS 1
  • 2. IP ADDRESS 2
  • 3. IP ADDRESS 3
  • 4. IP ADDRESS 4
  • 5. IP ADDRESS 5
  • 6. IP ADDRESS 6
  • 7. IP ADDRESS 7
  • 8. IP ADDRESS 8
  • 9. IP ADDRESS 9
  • 10. IP ADDRESS 10

4. DNS SETTINGS

Sets the DNS server settings.

1. DNS SERVER SET

Registers the DNS server address.

1. PRIM. DNS SERVER

Registers the primary server address.

2. SECOND DNS SERVER

Registers the secondary server address.

2. HOST/DOMAIN NAME

Registers the host name and domain name of the DNS server.

1. HOST NAME

Registers the host name of the DNS server.

2. DOMAIN NAME

Registers the domain name of the DNS server.

3. DNS DYNAMIC SET

Sets whether to use the DNS server dynamic update setting.

1. DNS DYNA. UPDATE

Sets whether to use the DNS server dynamic update function.
  • OFF
  • ON

2. IPv6 SETTINGS

Sets IPv6 Address settings. (See "Set the Machine for Network Usage.")

1. USE IPv6

Sets whether to use IPv6 networks.

OFF

Only IPv4 is used.

ON

Both IPv4 and IPv6 are used. A link local address is also automatically set.

2. STATELESS ADD SET

Sets whether to automatically specify a stateless address upon startup.
  • OFF
  • ON

3. MANUAL ADD SET

Allocates an IPv6 address to the machine manually.

1. USE MANUAL ADD

Sets whether to set a fixed IPv6 address to the machine.

OFF

A fixed IPv6 address is not set.

ON

Sets a fixed IPv6 address to the machine.

2. MANUAL ADDRESS

Registers a fixed IPv6 address to the machine.

3. PREFIX LENGTH

Sets the prefix length of the IPv6 address. (0-128)

4. DEF. ROUTER ADD

Sets the default router address.

4. USE DHCPv6

Sets whether to set to obtain a stateful address from a DHCP server using DHCPv6.
  • ON
  • OFF

5. PING COMMAND

Enables you to check whether the machine can connect to a device on the network.

1. PING COMMAND

Enter the IPv6 address of a device on the network and press [OK] to check whether the machine can connect to that device.

2. HOST NAME

Enter the host name of a device on the network and press [OK] to check whether the machine can connect to that device.

6. SET IP ADD RANGE

Sets whether to restrict the range of IP addresses.

OFF

Disables restriction of IP address of computers.

ON

Enables you to set which IP addresses can send data (print/fax jobs) to the machine. You can select to permit or reject up to ten ranges of IP addresses. Set each range of IP addresses by entering an IP address in both <START IP ADDRESS> and <END IP ADDRESS>.
  • 1. IP ADDRESS 1
  • 2. IP ADDRESS 2
  • 3. IP ADDRESS 3
  • 4. IP ADDRESS 4
  • 5. IP ADDRESS 5
  • 6. IP ADDRESS 6
  • 7. IP ADDRESS 7
  • 8. IP ADDRESS 8
  • 9. IP ADDRESS 9
  • 10. IP ADDRESS 10

7. DNS SETTINGS

Sets the DNS server settings.

1. DNS SERVER SET

Registers the DNS server address.

1. PRIM. DNS SERVER

Registers the primary server address.

2. SECOND DNS SERVER

Registers the secondary server address.

2. HOST/DOMAIN NAME

Registers the host name and domain name of the DNS server.

1. SAME HOST/DOMAIN

  • ON
  • OFF

2. HOST NAME

Registers the host name of the DNS server.

3. DOMAIN NAME

Registers the domain name of the DNS server.

3. DNS DYNAMIC SET

Sets whether to use the DNS server dynamic update setting.

1. DNS DYNA. UPDATE

Sets whether to use the DNS server dynamic update function.

ON

Enable the DNS server dynamic update function.

1. REG. MANUAL ADD

Registers the manual address.
  • OFF
  • ON

2. REG. STATEFUL ADD

Registers the stateful address.
  • OFF
  • ON

OFF

Disable the DNS server dynamic update function.

3. CONFIGURE WINS**

Sets the WINS settings to resolve a name with WINS.

1. WINS RESOLUTION

Sets whether to resolve a name with WINS.
  • ON
  • OFF

2. WINS SERVER

Registers the IP address of a WINS server.

4. LPD PRINT

Sets whether to use LPD as the print application.
  • ON
  • OFF

5. RAW PRINT

Sets whether to use RAW as the print application.

ON

Enables to use RAW.

USE BIDIRECTIONAL

Sets whether to use bi-directional communication.
  • ON
  • OFF

OFF

Disables to use RAW.

6. USE PASV MODE**

Sets the PASV mode for FTP.
  • ON
  • OFF

7. FTP EXTENSION**

Sets the FTP Extension settings.
  • ON
  • OFF

8. USE HTTP

Sets whether to activate HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol) for the Remote UI.
  • ON
  • OFF

9. PROXY SETTINGS**

Sets whether to use a proxy server.

1. USE PROXY

Enables to use of a proxy server.

OFF

Proxy server is not used.

ON

Enables the use of a proxy server.

1. SERVER ADDRESS

Enter the IP address or FQDN (format such as "starfish.company.com") of the proxy server.

2. PORT. NO

Enter the port number of the proxy server.

3. USE SAME DOMAIN

Sets whether to use the proxy server within the same domain.
  • ON
  • OFF

4. AUTH SETTINGS

Sets whether to use proxy authentication.

OFF

Proxy authentication is not used.

ON

Proxy authentication is used. The following settings must be specified:
  • 1. USER
  • 2. PASSWORD

10. PORT NO.

Sets the port number settings.

1. LPD

0~65535 (default:515)

2. RAW

0~65535 (default:9100)

3. HTTP

0~65535 (default:80)

4. SMTP RX**

0~65535 (default:25)

5. POP3 RX**

0~65535 (default:110)

6. FTP SENDING**

0~65535 (default:21)

7. SMTP TX**

0~65535 (default:25)

8. SNMP

0~65535 (default:161)

11. PERMIT RX MAC ADD

Sets whether to activate a MAC address filter.

OFF

Disables MAC address filter.

ON

Specifies a MAC address filter to access. MAC address must be entered for each setting.
  • 1. PERMIT RX ADD1
  • 2. PERMIT RX ADD2
  • 3. PERMIT RX ADD3
  • 4. PERMIT RX ADD4
  • 5. PERMIT RX ADD5

2. SMB SERVER SET**

Sets the SMB settings to use the machine on a NetBIOS network.

OFF

SMB client is not used.

ON

SMB client is used.

1. SERVER

Enters the NetBIOS name of the machine.

2. WORKGROUP

Enters the name of the workgroup the machine belongs to.

3. COMMENT

Enters a comment about the printer.

4. LM ANNOUNCE

Sets if the machine notifies the LAN Manager of its existence.
  • OFF
  • ON

3. SNMP SETTINGS

Sets detailed information about SNMP.

1. USE SNMP

Sets whether to activate SNMP.
  • ON
  • OFF

2. COMMUNITY NAME 1

Sets SNMP community name 1 (default: public).

3. COMMUNITY NAME 2

Sets SNMP community name 2.

4. SNMP WRITABLE 1

Enables computers on the network to access the machine and modify its settings.
  • ON
  • OFF

5. SNMP WRITABLE 2

Enables computers on the network to access the machine and modify its settings.
  • OFF
  • ON

6. PRINTER MGMT INFO

Sets whether to automatically enable the SNMP port monitoring function, when a port is set to [Standard TCP/IP Port] in Windows Vista. The SNMP port monitoring function can obtain print management information such as printer applications and printer ports.
  • OFF
  • ON

4. DEDICATED PORT

Sets or browses detailed information on the machine with a Canon printer driver or utility.
  • ON
  • OFF

5. ETHERNET DRIVER

Specifies the type of network connection.

1. AUTO DETECT

Selects the detection method of Ethernet driver.

AUTO

Sets the machine to determine the communication mode (Half duplex/Full duplex) and Ethernet type (10Base-T/ 100Base-TX) automatically.

MANUAL

Sets the communication mode and Ethernet type manually.

1. DUPLEX

Selects the communication mode.
  • HALF DUPLEX
  • FULL DUPLEX

2. ETHERNET TYPE

Selects the Ethernet type.
  • 10 BASE-T
  • 100 BASE-TX

6. NETWORK INFO

Checks the current network settings.

1. IPv4

Checks the IPv4 settings.

1. IP ADDRESS

Checks the IP address.

2. SUBNET MASK

Checks the subnet mask.

3. GATEWAY ADDRESS

Checks the gateway address.

4. DOMAIN NAME

Checks the domain name.

5. HOST NAME

Checks the host name.

2. IPv6

Checks the IPv6 settings.

1. LINK LOCAL ADD

Checks the link local address.
  • 1.IP ADDRESS
  • 2.PREFIX LENGTH

2. STATELESS ADD. 1

Checks the stateless address 1.
  • 1.IP ADDRESS
  • 2.PREFIX LENGTH

3. STATELESS ADD. 2

Checks the stateless address 2.
  • 1.IP ADDRESS
  • 2.PREFIX LENGTH

4. STATELESS ADD. 3

Checks the stateless address 3.
  • 1.IP ADDRESS
  • 2.PREFIX LENGTH

5. STATELESS ADD. 4

Checks the stateless address 4.
  • 1.IP ADDRESS
  • 2.PREFIX LENGTH

6. STATELESS ADD. 5

Checks the stateless address 5.
  • 1.IP ADDRESS
  • 2.PREFIX LENGTH

7. STATELESS ADD. 6

Checks the stateless address 6.
  • 1.IP ADDRESS
  • 2.PREFIX LENGTH

8. STATEFUL ADDRESS

Checks the stateful address.
  • 1.IP ADDRESS
  • 2.PREFIX LENGTH

9. DEF. ROUTER ADD

Confirm the default router address.

10. DOMAIN NAME

Checks the domain name.

11. HOST NAME

Checks the host name.

7. E-MAIL/I-FAX**

Sets detailed settings for e-mail/I-fax.

1. SMTP RX

Sets whether to receive e-mail using the machine's own SMTP receiving function.
  • OFF
  • ON

2. SMTP SERVER

Registers the host name of the machine with the DNS server.

3. POP

Sets whether to receive e-mail using a POP server.
  • OFF
  • ON

4. AUTH/ENC SETTINGS

Specifies authenticating method before sending e-mail.

1. POP BEFORE SEND

Sets whether to use the SMTP server requires POP before SMTP (method for authenticating users who have logged in the POP server before sending e-mail).
  • OFF
  • ON

2. SMTP AUTH

Sets whether to use the SMTP server requires SMTP Authentication (method for authenticating users who have logged in the POP server before sending e-mail).

OFF

Disables SMTP Authentication.

ON

Enables SMTP Authentication.
  • 1. USER
  • 2. PASSWORD

5. E-MAIL ADDRESS

Enters the e-mail address your machine will use (max. 64 characters).

6. POP SERVER

Enters the POP server IP address or name (max. 48 characters).

7. POP ADDRESS

Enters the login name for access to the POP server (max. 32 characters).

8. POP PASSWORD

Enters the password for access to the POP server (max. 32 characters).

9. POP INTERVAL

Sets the interval you want the POP server to check for incoming e-mail. If the interval is set to 0, the POP server is not checked automatically (0MIN.–99MIN.).

8. STARTUP TIME SET.

Sets the time period required to delay the startup of network communications for the machine (0SEC–300SEC).
6. COMMUNICATIONS Sets the fax and e-mail communication.

1. E-MAIL/I-FAX SETTINGS**

Sets the e-mail/I-fax communications.

1. MAX TX DATA SIZE

Sets the maximum data size for outgoing e-mail messages. If the e-mail message exceeds this data size limit, it is split up into several e-mail messages before being sent (0MB-99MB).

2. DIVIDED OVER MAX

Sets whether to divide a document into separate files when it is sent if its size exceeds the data size you specify.
  • OFF
  • ON

2. FAX SETTINGS

Sets the facsimile communication.

1. TX START SPEED

Sets the transmission start speed for faxes.
(33600bps, 2400bps, 4800bps, 7200bps, 9600bps, 14400bps)

2. RX START SPEED

Sets the reception start speed for faxes.
(33600 bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 7200 bps, 9600 bps, 14400 bps)

3. TX DOC. ARCHIVING

Sets whether to use TX Document Archiving.
  • OFF
  • ON

3. MEMORY LOCK

Sets whether to receive and store all documents in memory and not to print automatically. (See "Memory Lock Reception.")

OFF

Disables memory lock reception.

ON

Enables memory lock reception.

1. PASSWORD

Registers the password that protects the authority for accessing to memory.

2. REPORT PRINT

Sets whether to print a report on memory lock reception.
  • OFF
  • ON

3. MEMORY RX TIME

Sets whether to set a period for memory lock reception.

OFF

Disables setting a period of memory lock reception.

ON

Enables setting a period of memory lock reception.
  • 1. MEM RX START TIME
  • 2. MEM. RX END TIME
7. FW W/OUT CNDITION Register the forwarding destination to use when the forwarding conditions are not met.

1. FAX

Sets whether to forward received faxes.

OFF

Does not perform forwarding when the forwarding conditions are not met.

ON

Performs forwarding using the settings below when the forwarding conditions are not met.

1. FORWARD

Specify a destination registered in a one-touch key or coded dial code.

2. IMAGE FORMAT

Sets the file format to use when forwarding.
  • TIFF (B&W)
  • PDF

3. DIVIDE INTO PAGES

Sets whether multiple images are sent as separate files or as a single file.
  • OFF
  • ON

2. I-FAX**

Sets whether to forward received I-faxes.

OFF

Does not perform forwarding when the forwarding conditions are not met.

ON

Performs forwarding using the settings below when the forwarding conditions are not met.

1. FORWARD

Specify a destination registered in a one-touch key or coded dial code.

2. IMAGE FORMAT

Sets the file format to use when forwarding.
  • TIFF (B&W)
  • PDF

3. DIVIDE INTO PAGES

Sets whether multiple images are sent as separate files or as a single file.
  • OFF
  • ON
8. FORWARD ERR. SET. Sets the machine to print and/or store received documents when document forwarding fails.

1. PRINT

Sets whether to print out the image if forwarding fails.
  • ON
  • OFF

2. STORE TO MEMORY

Sets whether to store the image in memory if forwarding fails.
  • OFF
  • ON
9. REMOTE UI Sets whether to activate the Remote UI function to operate the machine and change the settings from a network computer using a web browser.
  • ON
  • OFF
10. RESTRICT TX FUNC Sets restriction of the access to destinations.

1. ADD. BOOK PASSWORD

Sets a password to restrict editing the Address Book. (7 digits maximum)
  • OFF
  • ON

2. RESTRICT NEW ADD.

Sets whether to restrict registering or changing destinations for one-touch keys and coded dial codes*1. Sets whether to restrict making calls to the destinations not registered in Address Book.
  • OFF
  • ON*2
*1 Registration of group addresses is not restricted.
*2 You can still make calls using an external phone if all of the following conditions are set:
  • The machine is in the Sleep mode
  • <RX MODE> is set to <FaxOnly>
  • <ENERGY IN SLEEP> is set to <LOW>

3. FAX DRIVER TX

Sets whether to restrict sending faxes from a computer using the fax driver.
  • ON
  • OFF

4. REST. REDIAL/CALL**
(RESTRICT REDIAL***)

Sets whether to disable the redial function of the [Redial] (LASER CLASS 810) / [Recall] (LASER CLASS 830i) key.
  • OFF
  • ON

5. CONFIRM FAX NO.

Sets whether to confirm the entered fax numbers each time you send a fax.
  • OFF
  • ON

6. REST. MULTI DEST

Sets whether to disable the broadcasting function.

OFF

The restrict broadcast setting is not set.

CONFIRMATION

Sets whether to confirm to enable the broadcasting function each time you send a fax.

PROHIBIT

Disables the broadcasting function.
11. CHECKING THE LOG Sets whether to allow displaying the log.

ON

Enables confirmation of logs using [System Monitor].

OFF

Disables confirmation of logs using [System Monitor]. Activity Report will not be printed automatically.
12. USE DEVICE USB Sets whether to restrict jobs through the USB interface.
  • ON
  • OFF
13. PDL SELECT(PnP) Sets which driver to install, when installing printer drivers to your computer through the USB port. For example, after installing the PCL Printer driver, you can also install the UFR II Printer Driver via the USB port by switching this setting to <UFRII LT>.
  • FAX
  • UFRII LT
  • PCL 5e***
  • PCL 6***
Press [] or [] → select which printer driver to install → press [OK].
14. UPDATE FIRMWARE This function is used only when the printer firmware needs to be updated.

* For the LASER CLASS 810 an optional network printer kit is required
** LASER CLASS 830i Only
*** LASER CLASS 810 Only

 

 
Timer Settings

Setting Sleep Mode

Setting Auto Clear Time

Setting Time Zone

Setting Daylight Saving Time

 

 
Setting Sleep Mode

Return to Overview

When the machine remains idle for a certain period of time, it automatically enters Sleep mode.


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TIMER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <AUTO SLEEP TIME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <ON> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired interval, then press [OK].

You can set the interval from 3 to 30 minutes (in one-minute increments).

You can also enter values using numeric keys.

 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to standby mode.
  • To resume normal mode from Sleep mode, press [ON/OFF] on the operation panel.
  • To enter Sleep mode manually, press [ON/OFF] on the operation panel.
  • The machine will not enter Sleep mode when:
  • the machine is in operation
  • a system error occurs
  • the handset of the external telephone is off the hook.
  • The machine will leave Sleep mode when:
  • you press [ON/OFF] on the operation panel
  • a computer performs a scan through the machine
  • If you turn off the main power of the machine while it is in the Sleep mode, wait at least 10 seconds before turning the main power of the machine back on.

 

 
Setting Auto Clear Time

Return to Overview

If the machine remains idle for a certain period of time, the display returns to standby mode (Auto Clear function).


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TIMER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <AUTO CLEAR TIME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <ON> is displayed, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired interval, then press [OK].

You can set the interval from 1 to 9 minutes (in one-minute increments).

You can also enter values using numeric keys.

 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to standby mode.

 

 
Setting Time Zone

Return to Overview

The standard time zones of the world are expressed globally in terms of the difference hours (± up to 12 hours) from GMT (0 hours). A time zone is a region throughout which time difference is the same.


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TIMER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TIME ZONE SETTING>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the time zone, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • The specified time zone setting becomes effective after the machine is restarted.

 

 
Setting Daylight Saving Time

Return to Overview

In some countries or areas, time is advanced throughout the summer season. This is called "Daylight Saving Time."


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TIMER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DAYLIGHT SV.TIME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> , then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <START DATE/TIME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MONTH>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the month, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <WEEK>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the week, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DAY>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the day, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <END DATE/TIME>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MONTH>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the month, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <WEEK>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the week, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DAY>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the day, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to standby mode.

 

 
How to Use This Manual

How to Use This Manual Instructions


 

 
User Manual CD-ROM (Reference Guide)

The User Manual CD-ROM (Reference Guide) is software that enables you to select and view HTML Manuals included on the CD-ROM via your computer screen. Follow the instructions below to use the User Manual CD-ROM (Reference Guide).


System Requirements

Using the User Manual CD-ROM (Reference Guide)

Symbols Used in This Manual

Legal Notices

 

 
System Requirements

Return to Overview

The User Manual CD-ROM (Reference Guide) can be used in the following system environments.

  • Target Operating System
  Windows: 2000 SP4, XP, Vista (Internet Explorer 6.0 or later is required if you are using Windows 2000 SP4.)
Mac: OS X 4.x
  • Target Browser
  Windows: Internet Explorer 6.0 or later
Mac: Safari 2.0 or later
  • Flash Player
  Flash Player 8.0 or later

Remark
  • The memory and CPU required to run each operating system are also required.
  • A display resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels or higher is required.
  • The User Manual CD-ROM (Reference Guide) may not operate correctly if Flash Player is not installed or a version of Flash Player earlier than the above is installed in your computer.

 

 
Using the User Manual CD-ROM (Reference Guide)

Return to Overview

When using the Reference Guide with Windows, follow the steps below.
1. Insert the User Manual CD-ROM in your computer.
2. Select whether to install the Reference Guide in your computer, or display the Reference Guide from the CD-ROM.
3. If you selected to install the Reference Guide in your computer, specify the location to save the Reference guide, and the installation begins.
4. The Reference guide can be displayed after the installation from your computer, or after selecting to display the Reference Guide from the CD-ROM in step 2.

When using the Reference Guide with Macintosh, follow the steps below.
1. Insert the User Manual CD-ROM in your computer.
2. Drag-and-drop the [LC810_830i_Manual_us_eng] folder into the location you want to save it.
3. Open the [LC810_830i_Manual_us_eng] folder.
4. Double click index.html, and the Reference Guide is displayed.

Depending on the operating system you are using, a security protection message may be displayed. In this case, allow the contents to be displayed.

When you start the Reference Guide, the following screen (the top page) is displayed.



 
A [Glossary]
Click to display the glossary in a separate window.
B [Top]
Click to return to the top page.
C [Function List]
Click to display the topic pages for function categories.
D [Alphabetical List]
Click to display the topic pages for function categories and appendix categories.
E [Keyword Search]
Click to display a list of the topic page titles that include the phrase you enter. Click a title to display the corresponding topic page.
F Function Categories
Select a function category to display a list of image icons for the topics corresponding to that function. Click an image icon or [Display Function List] to display the topic pages for the function category.
G [Print]
Click to print all categories or a single category.
H Appendix Categories
Select an appendix category to display the topic pages not related to functions, such as the maintenance and troubleshooting topics.
I [Office Locations]
Click to display Canon contact details in a separate window.
   

Remark
  • Select to create a shortcut for the Reference Guide on your desktop.
  • If the Windows CD-ROM autoplay feature is not enabled, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [My Computer]. (Windows Vista: click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Computer]. Windows 98/Me/2000: double-click [My Computer] on the Windows desktop.) Open the User Manual CD-ROM icon, then double-click start.exe.
  • When performing a search, make sure to enter a phrase that will match a keyword. Depending on the phrase you enter, the correct search results may not be displayed.
  • Topic pages can be printed by page or by category.
  • The background color and images of the Topic Page may not be printed, depending on the web browser settings.

 

 
Symbols Used in This Manual

Return to Overview

The following symbols are used throughout the manuals for the machine and indicate the warnings, cautions and notes you should keep in mind when using the machine.

  • Indicates a warning that may lead to death or serious injury if not observed.
    Explains how to avoid actions that could injure you or damage your machine.
  • Explains operating restrictions and how to avoid minor difficulties.

In addition, this guide uses distinctive notations to identify keys and information in the LCD:

  • The keys you press appear in square brackets: [Stop].
  • Information in the LCD appears in angle brackets: <LOAD PAPER>.

The numbers that point to the keys on the operation panel diagram correspond to the order of steps to take in the procedure.


 

 
Legal Notices

Return to Overview

  • Trademarks

Canon, the Canon logo, LASER CLASS, and NetSpot are trademarks of Canon Inc. Microsoft, Windows and Windows Server are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Windows Vista is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.

All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

  • Copyright

Copyright © 2007 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Canon Inc.

  • Disclaimers

The information in this document is subject to change without notice.

CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.


 

 
Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Instructions


 

 
Error Codes

An error code is a four-digit code shown on an ERROR TX REPORT or an ERROR RX REPORT when an error occurs.

For details on reports, see "Summary of Reports and Lists."

See the table below for individual error codes.


#0001

#0003

#0005

#0009

#0012

#0018

#0037

#0703

#0705

#0751

#0752

#0753

#0755

#0801

#0802

#0804

#0806

#0808

#0810

#0812

#0813

#0818

#0819

#0820

#0821

#0827

#0828

#0829

#0839

 

#0001

Description

A document may be jammed.

Action

Remove the jammed document.

 

#0003

Description1

An attempt was made to send a document of 24 7/8" (630 mm) or longer from the ADF.

Action1

Divide the document into smaller parts and send from the platen glass.

Description2

A document takes a long time to send because it contains too much data.

Action2

Reduce the scanning resolution before sending.

Description3

A document takes a long time to receive.

Action3

Contact the other party and ask them to reduce their scanning resolution or divide the document into smaller parts for sending.

 

#0005

Description1

The other fax machine did not respond within 35 seconds.

Action1

Send the document again. Contact the other party and have them check their fax machine. If you are making an overseas call, add a pause to the number.

Description2

The other party may not be using a G3 fax machine.

Action2

Check with the other party and send the document to a G3 fax machine. If the other party does not have a G3 fax machine, try sending your document using a transmission mode the other party's fax machine supports.

 

#0009

Description

The paper has run out or the paper cassette is not set properly.

Action

Load the paper or reset the paper cassette properly.

 

#0012

Description

You could not send because the other party's fax machine is out of paper.

Action

Contact the other party and ask them to load the paper.

 

#0018

Description

There is no reply when you redial. You could not send, because your fax signal was not returned as the other party's line was engaged.

Action

Check that the other party's line is not engaged and try again from the beginning.

 

#0037

Description

The memory is full.

Action

Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

 

#0703

Description

The memory for image data is full when sending documents.

Action1

Wait a few moments, and then try sending again after other send jobs are complete.

Action2

Erase documents stored in memory. If the machine still does not operate normally, turn the main power OFF, and then back ON.

 

#0705

Description

The send operation was interrupted because the size of the image data is larger than that specified in <MAX TX DATA SIZE> in <E-MAIL/I-FAX> in <COMMUNICATIONS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>.

Action1

Change the setting for <MAX TX DATA SIZE> in <E-MAIL/I-FAX> in <COMMUNICATIONS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>.

Action2

Select a lower resolution.

Action3

Set <DIVIDE INTO PAGES> to <ON> in send settings.

 

#0751

Description1

The server is not functioning. The network is down (the server is unable to connect to the network or was disconnected).

Action1

Check the recipient's address.

Action2

Check that the network is up.

 

#0752

Description1

The SMTP server name or POP server name for e-mail is not correct, or the server is not functioning.

Action1

Check the SMTP server name, domain name, POP server name, and e-mail address in <E-MAIL/I-FAX> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>.

Description2

The domain name or e-mail address may not be set.

Action2

Check that the SMTP server is operating properly.

Description3

The network is down.

Action3

Check the network status.

 

#0753

Description

A TCP/IP error occurred while sending an e-mail message. (Socket, Select error, etc.)

Action

Check the network cables and connectors. If the machine still does not operate normally, turn the main power OFF, and then back ON.

 

#0755

Description1

You cannot send jobs because TCP/IP is not functioning correctly.

Action1

Check <TCP/IP SETTINGS> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>.

Description2

The IP address is not set.

Action2

Check <TCP/IP SETTINGS> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>.

Description3

When the machine was turned ON, an IP address was not assigned to the machine by the DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP server.

Action3

Check <TCP/IP SETTINGS> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>. Or wait a while, and then try sending again.

 

#0801

Description1

A timeout error occurred while the machine was communicating with the SMTP server to send an e-mail message.

Action1

Check that the SMTP server is functioning normally, or check the network status.

Description2

The SMTP server returned an error while trying to connect. The destination is not correct. An error occurred on the server side during transmission to a file server.

Action2

Check that the SMTP server is functioning normally. Check the network status. Check the destination setting. Check the status and setting of the file server.

 

#0802

Description1

The name of the SMTP server or POP server in <E-MAIL/I-FAX> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS> is incorrect.

Action1

Check the name of the SMTP server or POP server in <E-MAIL/IFAX> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>.

Description2

The DNS server name in <DNS SETTINGS> in <TCP/IP SETTINGS> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS> is incorrect.

Action2

Check the DNS server name in <DNS SETTINGS> in <TCP/IP SETTINGS> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>.

Description3

Connection to the DNS server failed.

Action3

Check that the DNS server is functioning normally.

 

#0804

Description

You have no permission to access the folder.

Action

Change the setting on the server to enable access to the folder.

 

#0806

Description1

An incorrect user name or password was specified for the sending of a file to a file server.

Action1

Change the user name or password.

Description2

An incorrect destination was specified for the sending of an email message.

Action2

Check the e-mail address.

 

#0808

Description1

A timeout error occurred while the machine was communicating with the FTP server.

Action1

Check that the FTP server is functioning normally. Check the network status.

Description2

The FTP server returned an error while trying to connect. The destination is not correct. An error occurred on the server side during transmission.

Action2

Check that the FTP server is functioning normally. Check the network status. Check the destination setting. Check the status and setting of the file server.

 

#0810

Description1

The POP server returned an error during the connection.

Description2

A timeout error occurred on the server while connecting to the POP server.

Action

Check the POP Server name in <E-MAIL/I-FAX> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>. Confirm that the POP server is functioning normally. Check the network status.

 

#0812

Description

The POP password setting is incorrect.

Action

Check the POP Server password in <E-MAIL/I-FAX> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>.

 

#0813

Description

The POP Server name setting is incorrect.

Action

Check the POP Server name in <E-MAIL/I-FAX> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>.

 

#0818

Description

You have received data that cannot be processed (cannot print the attached file).

Action

Check the settings and ask the sender to resend the data.

 

#0819

Description

You have received data that cannot be processed (MIME information is incorrect).

Action

Check the settings, and then ask the sender to resend the data.

 

#0820

Description

You have received data that cannot be processed (BASE 64 or uuencode is incorrect).

Action

Check the settings, and then ask the sender to resend the data.

 

#0821

Description

You have received data that cannot be processed (TIFF analysis error).

Action

Check the settings, and then ask the sender to resend the data.

 

#0827

Description

You have received data that cannot be processed (contains MIME information that is not supported).

Action

Check the settings, and then ask the sender to resend the data.

 

#0828

Description

You have received HTML data.

Action

Ask the sender to use a file format other than HTML, and then resend the data.

 

#0829

Description

Data containing more pages that the machine can hold in the memory is received.

Action

Print the received documents, and ask the sender to resend the remaining pages.

 

#0839

Description

The user name or password for the SMTP authentication in <SMTP AUTH> is incorrect.

Action

Check the user name and password for <SMTP AUTH> in <AUTH/ENC SETTINGS> in <E-MAIL/I-FAX> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>. (See"SYSTEM SETTINGS.")


 

 
If a Power Failure Occurs

If power is suddenly lost due to an outage or accidental unplugging, a built-in battery retains the user data settings and the speed dialing settings. Any sent or received documents stored in memory are backed up for about 3 hours.

During a power cut, functions are limited as follows:

  • You cannot send, receive, copy, or print documents.
  • You may not be able to make telephone calls using an external telephone, depending on the type of telephone you use.
  • You can receive telephone calls using an external telephone depending on the type of telephone you use.

Remark
  • To fully charge the built-in battery, it takes approximately 14 hours when the main power switch is on. If the built-in battery is not fully charged, the data may not be saved properly.

 

 
If You Cannot Solve a Problem

  • Customer Support (U.S.A.)

If you cannot solve the problem after having referred to the information in this chapter, contact Canon Customer Care Center at 1-800-828-4040 between the hours of 8:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. EST Monday through Friday and 10:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. on Saturday. On-line support for 24 hours is also available at the website.
http://www.canontechsupport.com/

Canon Canada Inc., offers a full range of customer technical support options*:
* Support program specifics are subject to change without notice.

  • For step-by-step troubleshooting, e-mail technical support, the latest driver or document downloads, and answers to frequently asked questions, visit
    http://www.canon.ca/
  • Free live technical support 9 A.M. to 8 P.M. EST Monday through Friday (excluding holidays) for products still under warranty 1-800-652-2666
  • For the location of the authorized service facility nearest you, visit http://www.canon.ca/ or 1-800-652-2666
  • If the problem cannot be corrected by using one of the above technical support options, repair options are available at the time of your call to the live technical support number above or via the website at http://www.canon.ca/

Please have the following information ready when you contact Canon:

  • Product name (LASER CLASS 810/LASER CLASS 830i)
  • Serial number (On the label located at the back of the machine)
  • Place of purchase
  • Nature of problem
  • Steps you have taken to solve the problem and the results

Remark
  • If the machine makes strange noises, emits smoke or odd odor, turn off the main power switch immediately, disconnect the power cord, and contact Canon Customer Care Center. Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the machine yourself.
  • Attempting to repair the machine yourself may void the limited warranty.

 

 
Clearing Jams

This section describes how to remove jammed paper. When error messages appear on the LCD display, see "LCD Messages." For other troubles, see "Troubleshooting."

When <CHECK DOCUMENT>, <FEEDER PAPER JAM/CHECK THE FEEDER> or, <DOCUMENT TOO LONG>, or <PAPER JAM> appears on the LCD display, remove jammed paper from the machine first, then from the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray if necessary. Check the following if you experience repeated paper jams:

  • Fan and tap the paper stack on a flat surface before loading it in the machine.
  • Check that the paper you are using meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")
  • Make sure you have removed any scraps of paper from the inside of the machine.

Remark
  • When removing jammed documents or paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the document or paper.
  • When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
  • If you tear the paper, remove any torn pieces to avoid further jams.
  • If loose toner comes into contact with your skin or clothing, wash with cold water. Warm water will set the toner.
  • Do not force a jammed document or paper out of the machine. Contact Canon Customer Care Center if needed.

Document Jams

Paper Jams

 

 
Document Jams

Return to Overview

When <CHECK DOCUMENT>, <FEEDER PAPER JAM/CHECK THE FEEDER>, or <DOCUMENT TOO LONG> appears on the LCD display, remove a jammed document from the ADF or the document delivery slot.


Remark
  • When removing jammed documents or paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the document or paper.
  • When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.

 
     
  1. Lift the lever, and open the ADF.
 
     
  1. Remove any jammed documents.
  • Do not pull the document forcefully as it may tear.
 
     
  1. Lift the document feeder tray.
 
     
  1. Remove any jammed documents.
 
     
  1. Lower the document feeder tray and close the ADF.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.

 

 
Paper Jams

Return to Overview

When <PAPER JAM> appears on the LCD display, remove jammed paper from inside the machine first, then from the paper cassette if necessary. Check the following if you experience repeated paper jams:

  • Even the edge of the paper stack by a flat surface before loading it in the machine.
  • Check that the paper you are using meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")
  • Make sure you have removed any scraps of paper from inside the machine.

 
     
  1. Open the left cover.
 
     
  1. Carefully pull the jammed paper out of the machine.
  • Do not touch the fixing assembly (A) as it becomes very hot during use.
  • If you tear the paper, remove any torn pieces to avoid further jams.
  • If loose toner comes into contact with your skin or clothing, wash with cold water. Warm water will set the toner.
 
     
  1. Tilt the 2-sided transport guide (A) toward the machine, then remove the jammed paper (Only for 2-sided copying).
 
     
  1. Lift and hold the transcription frame (A), then remove the jammed paper (Only for 2-sided copying).
 
     
  1. Close the left cover.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
 
     
  1. If you use the optional paper cassette, open the cover on the left side of the optional paper cassette. Remove any jammed paper, then close the cover.
 
     
  1. Pull out the paper cassette and push the corners of the stack under the tabs.
 
     
  1. Gently push the paper cassette back into the machine until it clicks.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.

 

 
If <LOAD CORRECT PAPER> is displayed

When <LOAD CORRECT PAPER> appears on the LCD display, the size of the paper in the paper cassette or multipurpose tray is different from that of the paper specified in <CASSETTE> or <MP TRAY> of the <PAPER SETTINGS> menu. You need to load the correct size paper or change the paper size in <CASSETTE> or <MP TRAY> of the <PAPER SETTINGS> menu.


Remark
  • For print jobs, you need to specify the paper size from your computer.

Re-Loading the Paper

Changing the Paper Size Setting

 

 
Re-Loading the Paper

Return to Overview


 
       
  1. Load the correct size paper as shown on LCD display.

Printing resumes when you return the paper cassette to the machine.


 

 
Changing the Paper Size Setting

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAPER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CASSETTE> or <MP TRAY>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAPER SIZE>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the paper size same as paper loaded into the machine, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

For a fax job, go to step 7.

For a copy job, or report print or list print job, go to step 8.

 
       
  1. Pull out the paper cassette, and then slowly return it to the machine until it clicks.

It is not necessary to pull the paper cassette out as far as it goes.

The machine re-starts printing.


 

 
LCD Messages

LCD Messages <A to E>

LCD Messages <F to J>

LCD Messages <K to O>

LCD Messages <P to Z >

 

 
LCD Messages <A to E>

Return to Overview


AVAILABLE MEMORY nn%

CANNOT PRINT RX DATA FIX ERROR TO PRINT

CHANGE PAPERSIZE

CHANGE REG'D SIZE → PAPER SETTINGS

CHECK DOCUMENT

DATA ERROR PRESS START KEY

DOCUMENT TOO LONG

 

AVAILABLE MEMORY nn%

Description

This message shows the percentage of the memory currently available. This message is displayed when you set the document in the ADF in Fax/Send mode.

Action

If you need more space, wait for the machine to send any documents in memory. Also print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

 

CANNOT PRINT RX DATA FIX ERROR TO PRINT

Description

The machine temporarily received the data in memory because an error of some kind has occurred in the machine. This error message appears with one of the messages below.

  • <LEFT COVER OPEN/CLOSE COVER>
  • <LOAD CORRECT PAPER>
  • <CHANGE REG'D SIZE/-> PAPER SETTINGS>
  • <TONER LOW/PREPARE NEW TONER>
  • <TONER IS NOT SET/INSERT TONER>
  • <LOAD PAPER>
  • <PAPER JAM>
  • <PAPER JAM/OPEN LEFT COVER>
Action

This error message appears with another message. When the error is resolved, the received data will be printed out. For how to solve the problem, see the action for the messages displayed with it.

 

CHANGE PAPERSIZE

Description

The paper size is not appropriate for a two-sided copy.

Action

Set the paper size to <LTR> or <A4>, then load paper of the same size.

 

CHANGE REG'D SIZE → PAPER SETTINGS

Description1

The paper size is not appropriate for printing a report or list.

Action1

Set the paper size to <LTR>, <LGL>, <A4>, <OFICIO>, <BRAZIL- OFICIO>, <MEXICO-OFICIO>, <FOLIO>, <GOVERNMENT-LETTER>, <GOVERNMENT-LEGAL> or <FLSP>, and then load paper of the same size.

Description2

The paper ran out while printing a received document, report or list.

Action2

Load paper in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray.

 

CHECK DOCUMENT

Description

A document jam may have occurred in the ADF.

Action

Remove the jammed document.

 

DATA ERROR PRESS START KEY

Description

The machine may have trouble.

Action

Press [Start] to restore all settings to the default. If the message persists, contact Canon Customer Care Center.

 

DOCUMENT TOO LONG

Description1

The document fed from the ADF is longer than 24 7/8" (630 mm), or is not feeding correctly.

Action1

Reduce the length of the document to within 24 7/8" (630 mm), then try again.

Description2

The document is longer than 17" (432 mm) when you are sending e-mail, I-fax or sending a document to a file server.

Action2

If the document is shorter than 17" (432 mm), then try the procedure again.


 

 
LCD Messages <F to J>

Return to Overview


FEEDER GLASS DIRTY CLEAN FEEDER GLASS

FEEDER PAPER JAM CHECK THE FEEDER

INITIALIZING...PLEASE WAIT

 

FEEDER GLASS DIRTY CLEAN FEEDER GLASS

Description

The ADF scanning area may be dirty.

Action

Clean the ADF scanning area (See "Cleaning the Machine."), then press [OK].

 

FEEDER PAPER JAM CHECK THE FEEDER

Description

A document jam may have occurred in the ADF.

Action

Remove the jammed document.

 

INITIALIZING...PLEASE WAIT

Description

This message appears when turning on the main power switch, or when the machine is not ready for printing.

Action

Wait until the message disappears.


 

 
LCD Messages <K to O>

Return to Overview


LEFT COVER OPEN CLOSE COVER

LOAD CORRECT PAPER

LOAD PAPER

MEMORY FULL

NOT AVAILABLE NOW

NOT REGISTERED

NO PAPER (RECIPIENT)

OUTPUT TRAY FULL

OVER PAGE LIMIT

 

LEFT COVER OPEN CLOSE COVER

Description

The left cover is open.

Action

Check the left cover and make sure that it is completely closed.

 

LOAD CORRECT PAPER

Description

The size of the paper in the paper cassette or multipurpose tray is different from that of the paper specified in <CASSETTE> or <MP TRAY> of the <PAPER SETTINGS> menu.

Action

Load the correct size paper or change the paper size in <CASSETTE> or <MP TRAY> of the <PAPER SETTINGS> menu. For more information, see "If <LOAD CORRECT PAPER> is displayed."

 

LOAD PAPER

Description1

No paper is loaded in the paper cassette or multipurpose tray when copying or printing.

Action1

Load the paper correctly by inserting it all the way to the back of the paper cassette.

Description2

If the paper size is not appropriate for printing, an error message appears with one of the messages below.
<CHANGE REG'D SIZE → PAPER SETTINGS> or <CANNOT PRINT RX DATA/FIX ERROR TO PRINT>

Action2

Set the appropriatesize paper for printing, and specify the correct size of paper in <PAPER SETTINGS>. For printing reports or lists, set the paper size to <LTR>, <LGL>, <A4>, <OFICIO>, <BRAZIL-OFICIO>, <MEXICO-OFICIO>, <FOLIO>, <GOVERNMENT-LETTER>, <GOVERNMENT-LEGAL> or <FLSP>, and then load paper of the same size.

Description3

The appropriate paper for printing is not loaded.

Action3

After setting the appropriatesize paper for printing, specify the correct size of paper in the <PAPER SETTINGS> menu.

 

MEMORY FULL

Description1

The machine is full of jobs.

Action1

Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

Action2

Divide the document stack or data into a few parts and try again one by one.

Action3

Send the document with low resolution.

Action4

When this message appears during using the ADF, the scanning document stops halfway. In this case, clear the paper jam from the ADF.

Description2

The number of TX/RX jobs that can be stored in memory reached the maximum.

Action5

The maximum numbers of jobs that can be stored in memory are as follows (Based on the condition that the other party sends the fax by the LASER CLASS 810/LASER CLASS 830i with ITU-T No. 1 Chart standard mode);
Up to 70 jobs for sending or 90 jobs for receiving, 95 fax jobs including sending and receiving, or 75 e-mail and I-fax jobs for receiving.
Wait for the machine to send any documents in memory. Also print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

 

NOT AVAILABLE NOW

Description1

You have specified the group dialing when the line is off the hook.

Action1

Specify the recipient other than group dialing.

Description2

You have specified the one-touch key or coded dial code that has registered with other than fax number when the line is off the hook.

Action2

Make sure that the line is disconnected.

Description3

The registered group is already nested for three levels of subgroups (e.g., a group registered in a group in a group in a group).

Action3

You cannot register a group to contain more than three levels of subgroups. Modify the group so that it contains three levels of groups or less.

Description4

You pressed the one-touch key or coded dial code that has already been registered, when you are registering group addresses.

Description5

You pressed the group dialing that has already been registered, when you are registering a one-touch or coded dial address.

Action4

Register the one-touch key or coded dial code that is not used.

 

NOT REGISTERED

Description

No destination is registered for the one-touch key or coded dial code you pressed.

Action

Register the destinations before using the Address Book function.

 

NO PAPER (RECIPIENT)

Description

No paper is loaded in the recipients fax machine.

Action

Have the recipient reload their fax machine with paper.

 

OUTPUT TRAY FULL

Description

The paper delivery tray is full of paper.

Action

Remove the printouts from the paper delivery tray.

 

OVER PAGE LIMIT

Description

You cannot print because the set page limit for either scans, prints, or copies in the department ID management function has been reached.

Action

Contact your system manager.


 

 
LCD Messages <P to Z>

Return to Overview


PAPER JAM OPEN LEFT COVER

PHONE OFF HOOK HANG UP PHONE

PREPARING SCANNER...PLEASE WAIT

START AGAIN

STOP KEY PRESSED PRESS OK KEY

SYSTEM ERROR

TONER IS NOT SET INSERT TONER

TONER LOW PREPARE NEW TONER

 

PAPER JAM OPEN LEFT COVER

Description

Paper jams have occurred in the machine.

Action

Open the left cover and remove the jammed paper. (See "Paper Jams.") The cover must be opened and closed to resume the current job.

 

PHONE OFF HOOK HANG UP PHONE

Description

The receiver of the external telephone or handset is off the hook.

Action

Hang up the receiver.

 

PREPARING SCANNER...PLEASE WAIT

Description

The machine is not ready for scanning.

Action

Wait until the machine is ready.

 

START AGAIN

Description

A transmission error has occurred because the line condition was poor.

Action

Check the line condition, then try again.

 

STOP KEY PRESSED PRESS OK KEY

Description

[Stop] has been pressed while scanning the document using the ADF.

Action

Press [OK], then set the document again.

 

SYSTEM ERROR

Description

Some kind of error has occurred in the machine.

Action

Turn off the main power switch, wait for more than 10 seconds, then turn it on again. If the message persists, turn off the main power switch, disconnect the power cord, and contact Canon Customer Care Center.

 

TONER IS NOT SET INSERT TONER

Description

A toner cartridge is not installed or not installed correctly.

Action

Install the toner cartridge correctly tray.

 

TONER LOW PREPARE NEW TONER

Description

The toner is running low.

Action

Prepare a new toner cartridge.


 

 
Troubleshooting

General Problems

Paper Feeding Problems

Sending/Receiving Problems

Sending Problems


Receiving Problems


Copying Problems

Printing Problems

Telephone Problems

Network Problems

 

 
General Problems

Return to Overview


The machine has no power.

The Error indicator flashes.

Nothing appears in the LCD.

 

The machine has no power.

Is the power cord plugged in securely?

Check that the power cord is securely plugged into the machine and into the wall outlet. If the machine is plugged into a power strip, make sure the power strip is plugged in and turned on.

Is the power cord supplying power?

Use a different power cord, or test the cord for continuity using a voltmeter.

Is the main power switch turned on?

Turn on the main power switch.

 

The Error indicator flashes.

Does the machine feed paper correctly, or is there paper in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray?

Clear the paper jam, or load paper in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray. (For instructions on clearing paper jam, See "Clearing Jams." For instructions on loading paper, see "Load Paper.")

If the machine has no paper jam, or paper is loaded in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray, turn off the main power switch and wait for more than 10 seconds, then turn it on again. If the problem is fixed, the Error indicator will turn off, and the LCD will return to the standby mode. If the Alarm indicator remains flashing, unplug the machine, and unplug the machine, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

 

Nothing appears in the LCD.

Is the power cord plugged in securely?

Check that the power cord is securely plugged into the machine and into the wall outlet. If the machine is plugged into a power strip, make sure the power strip is plugged in and turned on.

Is the main power switch turned on?

Turn on the main power switch.

Is the machine in Sleep mode?

Press [Energy Saver] on the operation panel to cancel the Sleep mode.


 

 
Paper Feeding Problems

Return to Overview


Paper does not feed properly.

Multiple sheets feed together into the machine.

Repeated paper jams occur.

 

Paper does not feed properly.

Is the paper loaded correctly?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded. (See "Load Paper.")

Does the machine contain too many sheets?

Make sure you load the correct quantity. (See "Paper Requirements.")

 

Multiple sheets feed together into the machine.

Is the paper loaded correctly?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded. (See "Load Paper.")

Does the machine contain too many sheets?

Make sure you load the correct quantity. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Are different types of paper loaded in the machine?

Load only one type of paper.

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Let the paper run out before refilling the machine. Avoid mixing new stock with paper already loaded.

 

Repeated paper jams occur.

Is the correct type of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")


 

 
Sending Problems

Return to Overview


Document cannot be sent to an e-mail address, I-fax address or file server.

Cannot send a fax.

Memory fills up immediately when you try to send.

Faxes sent from the machine are spotted or dirty.

The documents you sent are too light.

Sending of documents is too slow.

Cannot send using Error Correction Mode (ECM).

Errors occur frequently while sending.

Cannot redial with [Recall].

Entering the fax number is required again after pressing [Start].

Cannot send the documents to multiple recipients.

 

Document cannot be sent to an e-mail address, I-fax address or file server.

Did you just turn on the main power switch?

Wait for a while. After turning on the main power switch, the machine cannot send documents immediately.

Is the e-mail or I-fax address you entered, or the e-mail or file server address registered in the Address Book correct?

Make sure the e-mail address you entered, or the e-mail, or I-fax, or file server address registered in the Address Book is correct.

If you are sending an e-mail orI-faxmessage are the SMTP Server and DNS Server settings correct?

Check the SMTP Server and DNS Server settings.

If you are sending to a file server, are the user and password settings correct?

Check the user and password settings, and send the document again.

If you are sending to a file server, are the shared folder settings correct?

Check the shared folder settings. (See "Configuring a Shared Folder.")

 

Cannot send a fax.

Did you just turn on the main power switch?

Wait for a while. After turning on the main power switch, the machine cannot scan documents immediately.

Is the machine set for the correct telephone line type?

Make sure the machine is set for the correct telephone line type. (See "Set the Machine for Sending Faxes.")

Is your machine in the fax mode?

Press [Fax/Send] repeatedly to select <FAX>, then press [OK] to show the fax standby display.

Is the document loaded correctly?

Make sure the document is correctly loaded. (See "Loading Documents in the ADF.")

Make sure the scanning platform and rear cover are fully closed. (See "Paper Jams.")

Is the one-touch key or coded dial code you entered registered correctly?

Check that the Address Book settings are registered correctly. (See "Storing/Editing Address Book.")

Did you dial the correct number?

Check that you have the correct number.

Is the machine in the Sleep mode?

The machine does not scan documents if it is in the Sleep mode. To take the machine out of the Sleep mode, press [Energy Saver] on the operation panel.

Is the recipient's machine out of paper?

Ask the recipient to make sure paper is loaded in the machine.

Are there other documents being sent from memory?

Allow time for the documents to finish sending.

Has an error occurred during transmission?

Check the LCD for an error message. (See "LCD Messages.")

Print an Activity Report and check for an error. (See "ACTIVITY REPORT.")

Is the telephone cable connected properly?

Make sure the cable is connected properly. (See "Connect Power Cord/Telephone Cables.")

Is the telephone line working properly?

Make sure there is a dial tone when you press [Hook] or when you lift the handset of any external telephone connected to the machine. If there is no dial tone, contact your local telephone company.

Is the recipient's machine a G3 fax machine?

Make sure the recipient's machine is compatible with your machine.

Is BUSY/NO SIGNAL shown on the ERROR TX REPORT?

The fax number you dialed is busy. Try sending the document later.

The recipient's machine is not working. Ask the recipient to check the machine.

Did the recipient's machine answer within 35 seconds (after all automatic redialing attempts)?

Ask the recipient to check the machine. For an overseas call, add pauses to the registered number. (See "Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses).")

Is the Processing/Data indicator lit?

The external phone is busy. Please wait until the external phone becomes free.

Is the machine overheated?

Unplug the machine and let it cool for about 5 minutes. Then plug in the machine and try sending again.

 

Memory fills up immediately when you try to send.

Are you sending with the resolution set to <SUPER FINE> or <ULTRA FINE>?

If you want to keep your document quality, divide the document into some parts and send them separately.

If your document does not contain fine text or photographs, set the resolution to <STANDARD>.

If your document contains fine text or photographs, send it directly rather than using a memory transmission.

Is a document stored in memory, leaving little memory available?

Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

 

Faxes sent from the machine are spotted or dirty.

Is the recipient's machine working properly?

Check the machine by making a copy. If the copy is clear, the problem may be in the recipient's machine. If the copy is spotted or dirty, clean the scanner components. (See "Scanning Area.")

Is the document loaded correctly?

Make sure the document is correctly loaded. (See "Loading Documents in the ADF.")

 

The documents you sent are too light.

Is the density setting changed to be lighter?

Adjust the density for light documents to be darker. (See "Density.")

Are the scanning components of the machine clean?

If the copy is spotted or dirty, clean the scanning components. (See "Scanning Area.")

 

Sending of documents is too slow.

Is the resolution set to <FINE>, <PHOTO>, <SUPER FINE>, or <ULTRA FINE>?

Setting the resolution to <STANDARD> reduces the sending time.

Is Error Correction Mode (ECM) set to <ON>?

Because ECM corrects errors during a transmission, any problems on the line can mean that the transmission will take extra time. Set <ECM TX> to <OFF>. (See "TX/RX SETTINGS.")

 

Cannot send using Error Correction Mode (ECM).

Does the recipient's machine support ECM?

If the recipient's machine does not support ECM, the document is sent in normal mode without error checking.

 

Errors occur frequently while sending.

Are the telephone lines in poor condition, or do you have a bad connection?

Check if there is a device nearby that interferes with signal transmission (e.g., microwave oven).

Lower the transmission speed. (See "SYSTEM SETTINGS.")

 

Cannot redial with [Recall].

Is <REST. REDIAL/CALL> set to <ON>?

When <REST. REDIAL/CALL> or <RESTRICT REDIAL> is set to <ON>, Redialing is not available. (See "Restricting Job Recall (LASER CLASS 830i Only).")

 

Entering the fax number is required again after pressing [Start].

Is <CONFIRM FAX NO.> set to <ON>?

When <CONFIRM FAX NO.> is set to <ON>, you need to enter the fax number again after pressing [Start]. (See "Confirming Entered Fax Numbers.")

 

Cannot send the documents to multiple recipients.

Is <REST. MULTI DEST> set to <ON>?

When <REST. MULTI DEST.> is set to <ON>, you cannot send the documents to multiple recipients. (See "Restricting Broadcasting.")


 

 
Receiving Problems

Return to Overview


The machine does not receive documents (e-mail, or file server).

Cannot receive a fax automatically.

No automatic switching between telephone and fax calls.

Cannot receive a document manually.

Print quality is poor.

Faxes do not print.

Received faxes print blotched or unevenly.

Part of the documents you receive are cut off.

Cannot receive using Error Correction Mode (ECM).

Receiving of documents is too slow.

You cannot get documents from information services.

Errors occur frequently while receiving.

Cannot print received documents on both sides of the paper.

 

The machine does not receive documents (e-mail, or file server).

Are network settings specified?

Documents cannot be received if the appropriate network settings are not specified. Confirm this with your system administrator.

 

Cannot receive a fax automatically.

Is the machine set to receive automatically?

For the machine to receive faxes automatically, the receive mode must be set to <FaxTel>, <FaxOnly>, or <AnsMode>, <DRPD>. If you have set <AnsMode>, confirm that an answering machine is connected to the machine and that it is turned on with an outgoing message properly recorded. (See "Basic Receiving Method.")

Are documents stored in memory, leaving little or no memory available?

Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

Has an error occurred during reception?

Check the LCD for an error message. (See "LCD Messages.")

Print an Activity Report and check for an error. (See "ACTIVITY REPORT.")

Is paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded. (See "Load Paper.")

Is the telephone cable connected properly?

Make sure the cable is connected properly. (See "Connect Power Cord/Telephone Cables.")

 

No automatic switching between telephone and fax calls.

Is the machine set to switch automatically between telephone and fax calls?

For the machine to switch between fax and telephone calls automatically, the receive mode must be set to <FaxTel>, <AnsMode>, or <DRPD>. If you have set <AnsMode>, confirm that an answering machine is connected to the machine and that it is turned on with an outgoing message properly recorded. (See "Basic Receiving Method.")

Are documents stored in memory, leaving little or no memory available?

Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

Has an error occurred during reception?

Check the LCD for an error message. (See "LCD Messages.")

Print an Activity Report and check for an error. (See "ACTIVITY REPORT.")

Is paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded. (See "Load Paper.")

Can the sender's machine send the CNG signal, which tells your machine that the incoming call is a fax call?

Some machines cannot send this signal. In such cases, receive the fax manually.

 

Cannot receive a document manually.

Is the machine set to receive manually?

For the machine to receive faxes manually, the receive mode must be set to <Manual>. (See "Basic Receiving Method.")

If you set <MANUAL/AUTO> to <ON>, the machine will receive faxes automatically even when the receive mode is set to <Manual>. (See "TX/RX SETTINGS.")

Did you hang up the external telephone before pressing [Start] or dialing the remote reception ID?

Always press [Start] or dial the remote reception ID before hanging up. Otherwise you will disconnect the call.

Are documents set on the ADF?

After removing the document from the ADF, please attempt manual receiving again. If you press [Start] when documents are set on the ADF, it automatically switches to manual sending.

 

Print quality is poor.

Is the toner low or unevenly distributed?

Redistribute the toner inside the toner cartridge. If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge.")

Is the correct type of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Is the sender's machine functioning properly?

Ask the sender to check that the scanning components of the machine are clean.

Is the machine in the toner saver mode?

Set <TONER SAVER MODE> to <OFF>. (See "COMMON SETTINGS.")

 

Faxes do not print.

Have you removed the plastic seal from the toner cartridge?

Make sure you remove the seal from the cartridge. (See "Install Toner Cartridge.")

Is the toner cartridge installed properly?

Make sure the toner cartridge is installed properly. (See "Install Toner Cartridge.")

Is the cartridge out of toner?

Replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge.")

Is the correct size of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Change <PAPER SETTINGS>. (See "Setting Paper Size and Type.")

 

Received faxes print blotched or unevenly.

Is <ECM RX> set to <ON>?

ECM (Error Correction Mode) should eliminate such problems. (See "TX/RX SETTINGS.") However, if the telephone lines are in poor condition, ask the sender to send faxes again.

Is the sender's machine functioning properly?

Ask the sender to check that the scanning components of the machine are clean.

 

Part of the documents you receive are cut off.

Are the slide guides of the paper cassette set to the size of the paper?

Adjust the guides of the paper cassette to the size of the paper.

Have you specified the correct paper size for the paper cassette?

Specify the correct paper size for the paper cassette.

Is the toner low or unevenly distributed?

Redistribute the toner inside the toner cartridge. If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge.")

 

Cannot receive using Error Correction Mode (ECM).

Does the sender's machine support ECM?

If the sender's machine does not support ECM, the document is received in normal mode without error checking.

 

Receiving of documents is too slow.

Is ECM (Error Correction Mode) set to <ON>?

Because ECM corrects errors during a transmission, any problems on the line can mean that the transmission will take extra time. Set <ECM RX> to <OFF>. (See "TX/RX SETTINGS.")

Is the resolution of the sender's machine set higher?

Contact to the sender and make sure the resolution of the sender's machine has been set properly.

 

You cannot get documents from information services.

Is your machine set to the tone dialing type of the telephone line?

Press [Tone] to set the tone dialing.

Do you receive messages from the information services such as to press [Start] after the beep to receive?

When you hear the beep sound, press [Start].

 

Errors occur frequently while receiving.

Are the telephone lines in poor condition, or do you have a bad connection?

Check if there is a device nearby that interferes with signal reception (e.g., microwave oven).

Lower the reception speed. (See "SYSTEM SETTINGS.")

Is the sender's machine functioning properly?

Ask the sender to check that the machine is functioning properly.

 

Cannot print received documents on both sides of the paper.

Is <TWO-SIDED PRINT>, set to <ON>?

Make sure that <TWO-SIDED PRINT> is set to <ON>. (See "Two-Sided Printing.")


 

 
Copying Problems

Return to Overview


Blank paper comes out from the machine.

Copy is too light or has uneven density.

Copy has vertical white streaks.

Copy is spotted or dirty.

Paper jams occur.

Copy is skewed.

Copy is not clear.

Documents are copied in <CALENDER TYPE> .even if <BOOK TYPE> is selected (or vice versa).

The alarm sounds or <MEMORY FULL> appears in the LCD when making copies.

 

Blank paper comes out from the machine.

Have you removed the plastic seal from the toner cartridge?

Make sure you remove the seal from the cartridge. (See "Install Toner Cartridge.")

Is the toner cartridge installed properly?

Make sure the toner cartridge is installed properly. (See "Install Toner Cartridge.")

Is the cartridge out of toner?

Replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge.")

 

Copy is too light or has uneven density.

Is the toner low or unevenly distributed?

Redistribute the toner inside the toner cartridge. If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge.")

 

Copy has vertical white streaks.

Is the toner low or unevenly distributed?

Redistribute the toner inside the toner cartridge. If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge.")

 

Copy is spotted or dirty.

If the copy is dirty, clean the interior of the machine (components), the ADF roller, and the scanning area. (See "Cleaning the Machine.")

 

Paper jams occur.

Make sure the scanning platform and rear cover are fully closed. (See "Paper Jams.")

Is the paper loaded correctly?

Make sure the document is correctly loaded. (See "Load Paper.")

Is the correct type of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

 

Copy is skewed.

Is the paper loaded correctly?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded in the machine. (See "Load Paper.")

Make sure the paper delivery slot is free of obstructions.

 

Copy is not clear.

Is the correct type of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Are you copying on the wrong side of the paper?

Some papers have a "right" side for copying. If the copy quality is not as clear as you think it should be, try copying on the other side of the paper.

 

Documents are copied in <CALENDER TYPE> .even if <BOOK TYPE> is selected (or vice versa).

Are you copying the landscape oriented documents?

For the landscape oriented documents, the front and back sides of the copy will have the opposite topbottom orientation when <BOOK TYPE> is selected. When <CALENDER TYPE> is selected, the front and back side of the copy will have the same top-bottom orientation. (See "Two-Sided Copying.")

 

The alarm sounds or <MEMORY FULL> appears in the LCD when making copies.

Is the machine's memory full?

Check remaining memory. (See "Checking Remaining Memory.")


 

 
Printing Problems

Return to Overview


Blank paper comes out from the machine.

Printout is too light or has uneven density.

Printout has vertical white streaks.

Printout is spotted or dirty.

Paper jams occur.

Printout is skewed.

Printout is not clear.

Cannot print two-sided documents.

Cannot print documents from a computer.

 

Blank paper comes out from the machine.

Have you removed the plastic seal from the toner cartridge?

Make sure you remove the seal from the cartridge. (See "Install Toner Cartridge.")

Is the toner cartridge installed properly?

Make sure the toner cartridge is installed properly. (See "Install Toner Cartridge.")

Is the cartridge out of toner?

Replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge.")

 

Printout is too light or has uneven density.

Is the toner low or unevenly distributed?

Redistribute the toner inside the toner cartridge. If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge.")

 

Printout has vertical white streaks.

Is the toner low or unevenly distributed?

Redistribute the toner inside the toner cartridge. If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge.")

 

Printout is spotted or dirty.

If the copy is spotted or dirty, clean the scanning components and machine's interior (See "Cleaning the Machine.")

 

Paper jams occur.

Make sure the scanning platform and rear cover are fully closed. (See "Paper Jams.")

Is the document loaded correctly?

Make sure the document is correctly loaded. (See "Load Paper.")

Is the correct type of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

 

Printout is skewed.

Is the paper loaded correctly?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded in the machine. (See "Load Paper.")

Make sure the Output tray is free of obstructions. (See "Machine Components.")

 

Printout is not clear.

Is the correct type of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Are you printing on the wrong side of the paper?

Some papers have a "right" side for printing. If the printout quality is not as clear as you think it should be, try printing on the other side of the paper

 

Cannot print two-sided documents

Is the printer driver settings correctly set for twosided printing?

Make sure that the printer driver is correctly set. (See Online Help.)

 

Cannot print documents from a computer.

Is the printer driver properly installed?

Make sure that the printer driver is properly installed.

Are the printer driver settings (Paper Size, Output Size) correct?

Make sure that the printer driver settings (Paper Size, Output Size) are correct. (See Online Help.)

Is the USB cable properly connected to the machine and the computer?

Make sure that the USB cable is properly connected to the machine and the computer. Try a different USB cable.

Does the USB port you are using properly work?

Restart your computer and the machine. If the computer has other ports, connect the USB cable to others.

Are there any jobs remaining in the print queue?

A print job may be stuck in the print queue when it could not be finished due to an expected interruption. When this happens, follow this procedure to delete any remaining print jobs, and then print the documents again.

For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista:

  1. Double-click the icon of the printer you installed.
  2. For Windows Vista: Click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Printer] under [Hardware and Sound].
    For Windows 2000: Click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Settings] → [Printers].
    For Windows XP Professional/Server 2003: Click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Printers and Faxes].
    For Windows XP Home Edition: Click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].
  3. Delete the print job.
  4. For deleting all the print jobs: Click [Printer] → [Cancel All Documents]
    For the specified job: Right-click the specified print job → [Cancel]

For Windows 98/Me:

  1. Click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Settings] → [Printers] → double-click the icon of the printer you installed.
  2. Delete the print job.
  3. For deleting all the print jobs: Click [Printer] → [Purge Print Documents]
    For the specified job: Right-click the print job you want to delete → [Cancel Printing]

 

 
Telephone Problems

Return to Overview


Cannot dial.

Telephone disconnects while you are talking.

Calls do not connect, or the wrong number is dialed.

 

Cannot dial.

Is the telephone cable connected properly?

Make sure the cable is connected properly. (See "Connect Power Cord/Telephone Cables.")

Is the power cord plugged in securely?

Check that the power cord is securely plugged into the machine and into the wall outlet. If the machine is plugged into a power strip, make sure the power strip is plugged in and turned on.

Is the main power switch turned on?

Turn on the main power switch.

Is the machine set for the correct telephone line type?

Make sure the machine is set for the correct telephone line type. (See "Set the Machine for Sending Faxes.")

 

Telephone disconnects while you are talking.

Is the telephone cable connected properly?

Make sure the cable is connected properly. (See "Connect Power Cord/Telephone Cables.")

Is the telephone cable defective?

Use another cord.

 

Calls do not connect, or the wrong number is dialed.

Did you confirm the dial tone before entering the telephone number?

Make sure to confirm the dial tone before entering a telephone number. If you enter the number before the dial tone can be heard, the call may not connect, or the wrong number may be dialed.


 

 
Network Problems

Return to Overview


Unable to print from a TCP/IP network.

The printer port name is not displayed in [Print to the following port(s)].

The machine automatically connects to a destination other than the intended destination via its dial-up access (when a dial-up router is connected to your network).

Detailed information concerning the machine cannot be set or browsed using the Remote UI or utility.

Unable to send data/share files (Windows File Sharing).

 

Unable to print from a TCP/IP network.

Are the machine and cable properly connected?

Check that the machine is connected to the network using the proper cable, then restart the machine. (See "Connect the Machine to a Network (Set the Machine for Network Usage).")

Is the TCP/IP network properly set up?

Make sure the IP addresses are properly set up. If the IP addresses are set using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, make sure they are operating.

Is the computer that is printing properly set up?

Make sure the proper printer driver is installed. (See "Installing Software.")

Make sure the correct machine is set as the output destination for the computer that is printing in [Printers and Faxes] or Print Manager.

Is the name of the file being printed too long?

Rename the file with a shorter name. Normally LPR (or the Microsoft TCP/IP Printer, if you are using Windows 2000/XP) sends jobs either under the name of the application software used for printing, or the file name. However, a job name longer than 255 bytes cannot be sent to the machine.

 

The printer port name is not displayed in [Print to the following port(s)].

Are the machine and cable properly connected?

Check that the machine is connected to the network using the proper cable, then restart the machine. (See "Connect the Machine to a Network (Set the Machine for Network Usage).")

Is the computer that is printing properly set up?

Make sure the proper printer driver is installed. (See "Installing Software.")

Make sure the correct machine is set as the output destination for the computer that is printing in [Printers and Faxes] or [Printers].

 

The machine automatically connects to a destination other than the intended destination via its dial-up access (when a dial-up router is connected to your network).

Does the dial-up router send packets via broadcast?

If the dial-up router does not have to send packets via broadcast, change the router settings to ensure that it sends packets via a method other than broadcast. If dial-up router has to send packets via broadcast, check that the settings are correct.

Dose the file or mail server's host name or IP address set on the machine exist on the network?

Check that the file or mail server's host name or IP address set on the machine is correct.

Does the DNS server exist on an external network?

If you attempt to access a device on the network to which the machine is connected, with the DNS server on an external network, set the destination using an IP address, not a host name.

Is the device's information set on the DNS server on the network to which the machine is connected correct?

If information about a device on an external network is set on the DNS server on the network to which the machine is connected, check the settings.

 

Detailed information concerning the machine cannot be set or browsed using the Remote UI or utility.

Are the settings for <SET IP ADD RANGE> correct?

If the settings for [IP Address Range Settings] do not permit the IP address of a computer on which the Remote UI or utility is used, you cannot set the machine setting items or browse information on the machine. Check the settings for <SET IP ADD RANGE>. (See "IP Address Range Settings (IPv4 Settings)" or "IP Address Range Settings (IPv6 Settings).")

Are the settings for <PERMIT RX MAC ADD> correct?

If the MAC address of a computer specified in <PERMIT RX MAC ADD> is not correct, you cannot set the machine setting items or browse information on the machine. Check the settings for <PERMIT RX MAC ADD>. (See "RX MAC Address Settings.")

Is <USE SNMP> or <DEDICATED PORT> is to <OFF>?

Set <USE SNMP> and <DEDICATED PORT> to <ON>. (See "SNMP.")

Does the SNMP community name match?

If you use an SNMP community name different from the one stored in the machine to access the machine from a utility, the utility will not detect the machine. In this case, check the SNMP community name. (See "SNMP.")

 

Unable to send data/share files (Windows File Sharing).

Are File sharing settings for the shared folder correct?

Check the following settings:

  • On the computer you are using, go into Windows Explorer → double-click [Entire Network] → check that the computer you want to share is listed there. You can also check for the computer as follows: On the [Start] menu, point to [Find] → [Computer] → enter the name of the computer you want to share → check that the computer is on the network.
  • If the computer you want to share is listed, doubleclick its icon to see whether the shared name of the folder you want to share is listed.

Is an error message or code displayed on the LCD of the machine?

After confirming the error message, see "LCD Messages." and perform the necessary operations according to the error message displayed.


 

 
Uninstalling Software

If the printer driver or fax driver become unnecessary, follow the procedure below to uninstall them.


Remark
  • Confirm the following before performing the uninstallation
  • That you have the installation software (if you want to re-install the drivers)
  • No applications are running on your computer
  • For uninstallation in Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, you must be the user with administrative privileges.

 
 

On the [Start] menu, point to [Programs] (Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Server 2003) or [All Programs] (Windows Vista) → [Canon Printer Uninstaller] → select the uninstaller for the driver you want to uninstall.

   

In the [Delete Printer] dialog box, select the printer driver you want to delete.

  • If you click [Cleanup], all the files and registry information related to the selected driver are deleted. Click [Delete] to perform a normal uninstallation of the driver.
 
 

Click [Delete].

   

Click [Yes] to confirm the deletion.

 
 

Click [Exit] in the [Delete Printer] dialog box.

   

 

 
Maintenance

Maintenance Instructions


 

 
Cleaning the Machine

Note the following before cleaning your machine:

  • Make sure no document is stored in memory, then turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.
  • Use a soft cloth to avoid scratching the components.
  • Do not use tissue paper, paper towels, or similar materials for cleaning; they can stick to the components or generate static charges.

Remark
  • Never use volatile liquids such as thinners, benzene, acetone, or any other chemical cleaner to clean the machine. These can damage the machine components.

Exterior

Interior

Fuser Roller

Scanning area

Keep the scanning area clean to avoid dirty copies or faxes to be sent.


Cleaning the Feeder (ADF)


Cleaning the ADF Automatically

Transcription Roller

 

 
Exterior

Return to Overview


 
       
  1. Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.
 
       
  1. Wipe the machine's exterior with a clean, soft, lint-free cloth dampened with water or diluted dishwashing detergent solution.
 
       
  1. Wait for the machine to dry, then reconnect the power cord and turn on the main power switch.

 

 
Interior

Return to Overview

Clean the machine's print area periodically to prevent toner powder and paper dust from accumulating inside.


 
       
  1. Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.
 
     
  1. Open the left cover.
 
     
  1. Grasp the blue plastic pull tab (A) on the toner cartridge.
 
     
  1. Pull the blue plastic pull tab until you can easily hold the handle of the toner cartridge.
 
     
  1. Remove the toner cartridge.
  • Always hold the toner cartridge by its handle.
  • To avoid exposing the toner cartridge to light, place it in its protective bag or wrap it in a thick cloth.
  • Do not open the drum protective shutter on the toner cartridge. Print quality may deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to light or is damaged.
 
     
  1. Use a clean, soft, dry, lint-free cloth to remove any toner or paper debris from the machine's interior.
  • Do not touch the fixing assembly (A) as it becomes very hot during use.
  • Do not touch the transfer roller (B) as this can damage the machine.
  • If loose toner comes into contact with your skin or clothing, wash with cold water. Warm water will set the toner.
 
     
  1. Hold the toner cartridge by its handle.

The arrows (A) on the toner cartridge should be pointing toward the machine.

 
     
  1. Insert the toner cartridge into the machine as far as it will go.

The left edge (A) and the right side protrusions (B, C) of the toner cartridge should be aligned with on the guides inside the machine.

 
     
  1. Push the toner cartridge to make sure it is properly set in the machine.
  • Do not touch the fixing assembly (A) as it becomes very hot during use.
 
     
  1. Close the left cover.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  • If you cannot close the left cover, do not force it to close. Open the cover and make sure the toner cartridge is properly set in the machine.
 
       
  1. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the main power switch.

 

 
Fuser Roller

Return to Overview

If black spots appear with printing, the fuser roller in the main unit may be dirty. Should this occur, clean the fusing roller in the following procedure. The roller should also be cleaned each time the toner cartridge is replaced. Load a sheet of blank LTR paper into the multi-purpose tray and start cleaning.


Remark
  • Cleaning the roller takes approximately 130 seconds.
  • When some jobs are stored in memory, this function is not available.

 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADJUST./CLEANING,>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Open the multi-purpose tray.
 
     
  1. Pull out the multi-purpose tray extension until it clicks, then open it.
 
     
  1. Load a sheet of blank LTR paper.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FIX. UNIT CLEANING>, then press [OK].

Cleaning starts. When finished, the display returns to standby mode.

  • Use standard paper as the cleaning paper.
  • Throw away the cleaning paper after use.
 
     
  1. Press [] to select <YES>.

Cleaning starts. When finished, the display returns to standby mode.
To not perform cleaning press [] to select <NO>.

  • Use standard paper as the cleaning paper.
  • Throw away the cleaning paper after use.

 

 
Cleaning the Feeder (ADF)

Return to Overview

Keep the scanning area clean to avoid dirty copies or faxes to be sent.

If your documents have black streaks or appear dirty after copying them using the ADF, this may be caused by pencil lead rubbing off the documents and onto the roller. Clean the ADF scanning area, film, and roller.


 
       
  1. Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.
 
     
  1. Lift the lever, and open the ADF cover.
 
     
  1. Open the feeder front cover.
 
     
  1. Clean the rollers (A) inside the ADF with a cloth dampened with water. Then wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.
  • Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may tear the document or damage the machine.
 
     
  1. Clean the narrow glass plate (B) and the white plate (C) with a cloth dampened with water. Then wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.
  • Do not push on the white plate hard. The white plate is a soft, delicate area.
  • Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may tear the document or damage the machine.
 
     
  1. Lift the document feeder tray.
 
     
  1. Clean the rollers (D) below the document feeder tray with a cloth dampened with water. Then wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.
 
     
  1. Lower the document feeder tray.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
 
     
  1. Close the ADF.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
 
     
  1. Reconnect the power cord and turn on the main power switch. Cleaning the ADF Automatically.

 

 
Cleaning the ADF Automatically

Return to Overview

If your documents have black streaks or appear dirty after scanning them through the ADF, clean the ADF roller by repeatedly feeding blank sheets of paper through it.


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADJUST./CLEANING>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FEEDER CLEANING>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Load 5 sheets of blank paper into the ADF, then press [OK].

ADF cleaning starts. When finished, the display returns to standby mode.

  • Use LTR paper.

 

 
Transcription Roller

Return to Overview

If the back of the paper is smudged after printing, the transcription roller may be dirty. Clean the transcription roller in the following procedure.


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADJUST./CLEANING>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Confirm that <TRANS. ROLR CLEAN> is displayed, then press [OK].

Cleaning starts. When finished, the display returns to standby mode.


 

 
Replacing the Toner Cartridge

When the LCD displays <TONER LOW/PREPARE NEW TONER>, the machine will not print and stores all documents in memory if it receives data.In this case, redistribute toner in the toner cartridge. If the message persists, replace the toner cartridge.

If you want to print out the documents without replacing the toner cartridge, set <CONT. PRINTING> to <KEEP PRINTING> in <RX SETTINGS> of <TX/RX COMMON SET.> in <TX/RX SETTINGS>. (See "Setting Menu.")


Remark
  • When <CONT. PRINTING> is set to <KEEP PRINTING>, the printed documents may be light or blurred because of lack of toner. The data is erased when the documents are printed out, so you can not print the same documents again.
  • Do not touch the rollers and parts which have labels "CAUTION! Hot surface avoid contact" on. They become very hot during use.

Redistributing Toner

Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One

 

 
Redistributing Toner

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Open the left cover.
 
     
  1. Grasp the blue plastic pull tab (A) on the toner cartridge.
 
     
  1. Pull the blue plastic pull tab until you can easily hold the handle of the toner cartridge.
 
     
  1. Remove the toner cartridge.
  • Always hold the toner cartridge by its handle.
  • Do not open the drum protective shutter on the toner cartridge. Print quality may deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to light or is damaged.
 
     
  1. Gently rock the toner cartridge 5 or 6 times to distribute toner evenly.
 
     
  1. Hold the toner cartridge by its handle.

The arrows (A) on the toner cartridge should be pointing toward the machine.

 
     
  1. Insert the toner cartridge into the machine as far as it will go.

The left edge (A) and the right side protrusions (B, C) of the toner cartridge should be aligned with the guides inside the machine.

 
     
  1. Push the toner cartridge to make sure it is properly set in the machine.
  • Do not touch the fixing assembly (A) as it becomes very hot during use.
 
     
  1. Close the left cover.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  • If you cannot close the left cover, do not force it to close. Open the cover and make sure the toner cartridge is properly set in the machine.

 

 
Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Open the left cover.
 
     
  1. Grasp the blue plastic pull tab (A) on the toner cartridge.
 
     
  1. Pull the blue plastic pull tab until you can easily hold the handle of the toner cartridge.
 
     
  1. Remove the toner cartridge.
  • Always hold the toner cartridge by its handle.
  • Do not open the drum protective shutter on the toner cartridge. Print quality may deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to light or is damaged.
 
     
  1. Remove the new toner cartridge from the protective material.
 
     
  1. Gently rock the toner cartridge 5 or 6 times to distribute toner evenly.
 
     
  1. Remove the seals (2 places).
 
     
  1. Bend back the blue plastic pull tab.
  • Do not remove the pull tab as it is used to pull out the toner when the cartridge needs replaced.
 
     
  1. Pull out the seal completely.
  • Do not pull out the seal at an angle.
 
     
  1. Hold the toner cartridge by its handle.

The arrows (A) on the toner cartridge should be pointing toward the machine.

 
     
  1. Insert the toner cartridge into the machine as far as it will go.

The left edge (A) and the right side protrusions (B, C) of the toner cartridge should be aligned with the guides inside the machine.

 
     
  1. Push the toner cartridge to make sure it is properly set in the machine.
  • Do not touch the fixing assembly (A) as it becomes very hot during use.
 
     
  1. Close the left cover.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  • If you cannot close the left cover, do not force it to close. Open the cover and make sure the toner cartridge is properly set in the machine.

 

 
Replacing the Stamp Cartridge

Sent originals can be stamped to indicate that they have been sent. Replace the stamp cartridge when this mark is faint or no longer visible.


Remark
  • When replacing the stamp cartridge, take care not to allow ink to come into contact with your hands or clothing. If ink gets onto your hands or clothing, wash it off immediately with cold water.

 
     
  1. Open the feeder cover half way.
 
 

Ring arm

   
  1. With the feeder cover open half way, push the link arm as you open the feeder cover completely.
 

  • Push the link arm (A) before it catches onto the hook (B).
  • The feeder cover opens as above, and the stamp cartridge (C) can be replaced. If the feeder cover does not open properly, close the feeder slightly. Then open the feeder cover again, as you push the link arm.
 
     
  1. Remove the old stamp cartridge, using tweezers.
 
     
  1. Push in the new stamp cartridge until it clicks, using tweezers.
  • Make sure that the stamp cartridge is not protruding from the surface.
  • Insert the stamp cartridge properly, or it may cause paper jams.
 
     
  1. Gently close the feeder cover.
  • When closing the covers, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.

 

 
Transporting the Machine

Follow this procedure to avoid vibration damage to the machine when transporting it over a long distance.


Remark
  • Be sure at least two people carry the machine.

 
       
  1. Disconnect the power cord and all the cables from the back of the machine.
 
     
  1. Open the left cover.
 
     
  1. Grasp the blue plastic pull tab (A) on the toner cartridge.
 
     
  1. Pull the blue plastic pull tab until you can easily hold the handle of the toner cartridge.
 
     
  1. Remove the toner cartridge.
  • Always hold the toner cartridge by its handle.
  • To avoid exposing the toner cartridge to light, place it in its protective bag or wrap it in a thick cloth.
  • Do not open the drum protective shutter on the toner cartridge. Print quality may deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to light or is damaged.
 
     
  1. Close the left cover.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
 
       
  1. Make sure the multi-purpose tray and the paper stopper are back in their original position.
 
     
  1. Pick up the machine using the provided hand grips on the left and right sides.
  • Be sure at least two people carry the machine.
  • Do not lift the machine by any of its attachments. Dropping the machine can cause personal injury.
  • If you have a back problem, make sure to check the weight of this machine before carrying. (See "Specifications.")

 

 
Recycling Used Cartridges

Canon has instituted a worldwide recycling program for cartridges called "The Clean Earth Campaign." This program preserves precious natural resources by utilizing a variety of materials found in the used cartridges that are of no further use, to remanufacture new cartridges which, at the same time, keeps the environment cleaner by reducing landfill waste. Complete details concerning this program are enclosed in each Cartridge box.

The Clean Earth Campaign

THE Canon CARTRIDGE RECYCLING PROGRAM (The Clean Earth Campaign)


U.S.A. PROGRAM

Packaging (U.S.A. PROGRAM)


Shipping (U.S.A. PROGRAM)


CANADA PROGRAM-CANADA PROGRAMME

 

 
THE Canon CARTRIDGE RECYCLING PROGRAM (The Clean Earth Campaign)

Return to Overview

The Canon Cartridge Recycling Program fulfills the first initiative of Canon's Clean Earth Campaign, which supports four critical environmental areas:


  • Recycling in the Workplace
  • Conserving Environmental Resources
  • Scientific Research and Education
  • Encouraging Outdoors Appreciation

The remaining "Clean Earth" initiatives are supported in the U.S. through sponsorships of the National Park Foundation, the National Wildlife Federation, and The Nature Conservancy and in Canada through donations to the World Wildlife Fund Canada and The Nature Conservancy of Canada.

Since its inception, The Canon Cartridge Recycling Program has collected huge amount of cartridges that otherwise would have been discarded into landfills or similar facilities. Instead, this rapidly growing program returns used cartridges to the manufacturing process, thus conserving an array of resources.
Becoming a part of this worthwhile program is easy. When your cartridge is of no further use, simply follow the instructions detailed for U.S. or Canadian residents.
We appreciate your support of The Canon Cartridge Recycling Program.
Working together we can make a significant contribution to a cleaner planet.


  • Cartridges collected through this program are not refilled.
  • You are not entitled to a tax deduction or rebate for the return of empty cartridges.
  • This program may be modified or discontinued without notice.


 

 
Packaging (U.S.A. PROGRAM)

Return to Overview

  • Option A-1: Single Box Return
  • Repackage the empty cartridge utilizing the wrapper and pulp mould end-blocks from the new cartridge's box.
  • Place the empty cartridge in the box of your new cartridge. Seal the box.

  • Option B: Volume Box Return

We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges.

  • Place as many cartridges as possible into one box.
    Carefully seal the box with tape;
    or
  • Call 1-800-OK-Canon to receive your free eight cartridge collection box.

  • Option A-2: Multiple Box Return

We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges.

  • Complete Option A-1.
  • Bundle multiple cartridge boxes together securely with tape.

Please be sure that the shipment does not exceed UPS specifications.
Maximum weight = 70 lb. (31.8 kg)
Maximum length = 108 in. (2,743 mm)
Maximum girth (length + 2 x width + 2 x height) = 130 in. (3,302 mm)
If your shipment exceeds the above limits, please call 1-800-OK-Canon for special shipping information.

Please Note:
Do not send defective cartridges for replacement.
Defective cartridges under warranty should be exchanged by an authorized dealer or service facility as provided in the warranty.


 

 
Shipping (U.S.A. PROGRAM)

Return to Overview

Apply the UPS authorized returning label provided in this guide.
Residents of Alaska and Hawaii: Do not use the UPS authorized returning label. For Alaska and Hawaii Canon set up alternative mail service with the U.S. Postal Service.
Please call 1-800-OK-Canon to receive U.S. Postal Service merchandise returning label.

  • Option: UPS Pick-up
  • Give the shipment to your UPS driver when you receive your next regular delivery;
    or
  • Take the shipment to your local UPS receiving point.


 

 
CANADA PROGRAM-CANADA PROGRAMME

Return to Overview

  • Option A: Single Box Return
  • Repackage the empty cartridge utilizing the wrapper and pulp mould end-blocks from the new cartridge's box.
  • Place the empty cartridge in the box of your new cartridge. Seal the box.
  • Apply the Canon Canada Inc./Canada Post label provided in this brochure. Canon's labels are specially marked so that Canon pays the postage.
  • Deposit your empty cartridge in any full size street mailbox or take it to your local Canada Post outlet or franchise.

  • Option B: Volume Box Return (eight or more cartridges)

We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges.

  • Call 1-800-667-2666 to receive your free Canon collection box kit.
  • The collection box can accommodate eight individual cartridge boxes.
  • Place your eight individually packaged boxes of empty cartridges into the Canon collection box. Seal the box.
  • Apply the Canon Canada Inc./Canada Post label provided in this brochure.
  • Canon's labels are specially marked so that Canon pays the postage.
  • Deliver to any local Canada Post outlet or franchise. Customers who hold a Commercial pick-up agreement with Canada Post may have their collection box picked up.

    

Working to preserve endangered species is a long-standing Canon interest.
To this end, for every cartridge collected, Canon Canada donates $1, shared equally between World Wildlife Fund Canada and the Nature Conservancy of Canada. This donation is utilized in Canada.

  • For further information about The Clean Earth Campaign in Canada, please call or write to Canon.
    1-800-667-2666
    Canon Canada Inc.
    Corporate Customer Relations
    6390 Dixie Road
    Mississauga, ON L5T 1P7

 

 
Summary of Reports and Lists

The machine can generate the following reports and lists.

Report/List Description
1-TOUCH LIST Lists the recipient addresses registered to all the one-touch keys.
1-TOUCH LIST 2 Lists the detailed data of [1-TOUCH LIST].
CODED DIAL LIST Lists the recipient addresses registered to all the coded codes.
CODED DIAL LIST 2 Lists the detailed data of [CODED DIAL LIST].
GROUP DIAL LIST Lists groups registered for group addresses.
USER'S DATA LIST Lists all the current settings and registered sender information.
DEPT. INFO LIST Lists the Department IDs, page totals of scans, prints, and copies that have been processed by each department, and page limits of scans, prints, and copies that can be processed.
ACTIVITY REPORT Shows the last 40 transactions performed by the machine.
TX REPORT Shows the transmission result. Can be set to print automatically.
RX REPORT Shows the reception result. Can be set to print automatically.
FORWARDING CONDITIONS LIST Lists the forwarding conditions.

 

 
Printing Reports Automatically

TX REPORT, RX REPORT, and ACTIVITY REPORT can be set to print automatically.


TX REPORT

TX REPORT (Report Items)


RX REPORT

RX REPORT (Report Items)


ACTIVITY REPORT

ACTIVITY REPORT (Report Items)


 

 
TX REPORT

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Use [] or [] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use [] or [] to select <SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Use [] or [] to select <TX REPORT>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting you want, then press [OK].
<PRINT ERROR ONLY>: Prints a report only when a transmission error occurs.
<OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report every time you send a document.
<OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report. Skip to step 7.
 
     
  1. Confirm that <REPORT WITH TX IMAGE> is displayed, use [] or [] to select <ON> to print the first page of the documents under the report, then press [OK].
<OFF>: Does not print the first page.
<ON>: Prints the first page.
  • When forwarding the received documents, the machine does not print the first page of the documents under the report even if <REPORT WITH TX IMAGE> is set to <ON>.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
TX REPORT (Report Items)

Return to Overview

The following items are displayed in the Transmission Report:

  • Transaction description
  • TX/RX NO: Transaction number
  • DEPT. ID: If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed.
  • RECIPIENT ADDRESS: Destination fax/telephone number
  • DESTINATION ID: Destination name registered in Address Book
  • ST. TIME: Transmission time
  • TIME USE: Transmission duration
  • PAGES SENT: Number of pages sent
  • RESULT: Result of transaction
  • OK: Transmission successful
  • NG: Transmission failed
  • STOP: Transmission manually canceled before completion
  • BUSY/NO SIGNAL: The line is busy or the recipient does not answer your call
  • Error code: For descriptions of error codes, See "Error Codes."

 

 
RX REPORT

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX REPORT>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting you want, then press [OK].
<OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report.
<PRINT ERROR ONLY>: Prints a report only when a reception error occurs.
<OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report every time you receive a document.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
RX REPORT (Report Items)

Return to Overview

The following items are displayed in the Reception Report:

  • Transaction description
  • TX/RX NO: Transaction number
  • RECIPIENT ADDRESS: Recipient's fax/telephone number address
  • DESTINATION ID:Sender's name registered in Address Book
  • ST. TIME: Transmission time
  • TIME USE: Transmission duration
  • PGS.: Number of pages received
  • RESULT: Result of transaction
  • OK: Reception successful
  • NG: Reception failed
  • STOP: Reception manually canceled before completion
  • Error code: For descriptions of error codes, see "Error Codes."

 

 
ACTIVITY REPORT

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ACTIVITY REPORT>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <AUTO PRINT>, then press [OK].

If TX Document Archiving is set to <ON>, the activity report is automatically set to be printed every 40 transmissions, and the settings under <AUTO PRINT> are not displayed. Proceed to step 7.

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting you want, then press [OK].
<OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report after every 40 transactions.
<OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report. Skip to step 9.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SEPARATE>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting you want, then press [OK].
<OFF>: Prints a report with the transmission and reception results listed chronologically.
<ON>: Prints a report with the transmission and reception results separated in a report.
 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
ACTIVITY REPORT (Report Items)

Return to Overview

The following items are displayed in the Activity Report:

  • DEPT. ID: If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed. Transmission logs are listed according to Department ID.
  • ST. TIME: Transmission time
  • DESTINATION TEL/ID: Destination name and fax number/address
  • NO: Transaction number
  • MODE: Transaction, Error correction mode
  • PGS.: Number of pages sent
  • RESULT: Result of transaction, transaction duration
  • OK: Transaction successful
  • NG: Transaction failed

 

 
Printing Reports and Lists Manually

You can print the following report and lists manually.

  • ACTIVITY REPORT
  • 1-TOUCH LIST
  • CODED DIAL LIST
  • GROUP DIAL LIST
  • 1-TOUCH LIST 2
  • CODED DIAL LIST 2
  • USER'S DATA LIST
  • DEPT. INFO LIST
  • FORWARDING CONDITIONS LIST
Remark
  • Reports can be printed on LGL or LTR paper. (plain or recycled paper)

Printing ACTIVITY REPORT

Printing 1-TOUCH LIST, CODED DIAL LIST, and GROUP DIAL LIST

Printing 1-TOUCH LIST 2, CODED DIAL LIST 2

 

 
Printing ACTIVITY REPORT

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <LIST PRINT>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ACTIVITY REPORT>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] to select <YES>.

Printing starts, and the screen automatically returns to the standby mode.
If you do not want to print the report, press [] to select <NO>.


 

 
Printing 1-TOUCH LIST, CODED DIAL LIST, and GROUP DIAL LIST

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <LIST PRINT>, then press [OK].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SPEED DIAL LIST>, then press [OK].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired list, then press [OK].
<1-TOUCH LIST>: Prints 1-TOUCH LIST.
<CODED DIAL LIST>: Prints CODED DIAL LIST.
<GROUP DIAL LIST>: Prints GROUP DIAL LIST.

 
     
  1. Press [] to select <YES>.

Printing starts, and the screen automatically returns to the standby mode.
If you do not want to print the list, press [] to select <NO>.


 

 
Printing 1-TOUCH LIST 2, CODED DIAL LIST 2

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <LIST PRINT>, then press [OK].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADD BOOK DETAILS>, then press [OK].

 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired list, then press [OK].
<1-TOUCH (DETAILS)>: Prints 1-TOUCH LIST 2.
<CODED (DETAILS)>: Prints CODED DIAL LIST 2.

 
     
  1. Press [] to select <YES>.

Printing starts, and the screen automatically returns to the standby mode.
If you do not want to print the list, press [] to select <NO>.


 

 
Checking and Deleting Jobs

System monitor enables you to monitor the status of the report jobs currently being processed.


Checking and Deleting Report Jobs

 

 
Checking and Deleting Report Jobs

Return to Overview


 
     
  1. Press [System Monitor] repeatedly to select <REPORT STATUS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to scroll through the job list.

When you delete the report job, press [OK] twice, then press [] to select <YES>.

 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Checking Remaining Memory

You can check the remaining memory according to the status of the machine.


 
     
  1. Press [System Monitor] repeatedly to select <AVAILABLE MEMORY>, then press [OK] to confirm the remaining memory.

Ex.

 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

 

 
Document Requirements

  ADF
Type Plain paper (Multipage documents of the same size, thickness and weight or one page documents.)
Size (W x L) LASER CLASS 830i:
Max. 11 3/4" x 17"(Max. 24 7/8")
(Max. 297 x 432 mm(Max. 630 mm))
Min. 5 7/8" x 5 7/8"
(Min. 148 x 148 mm)
LASER CLASS 810:
Max. 8 1/2" x 14"(Max. 24 7/8")
(Max. 216 x 355.6 mm(Max. 630 mm))
Min. 5 7/8" x 5 7/8"
(Min. 148 x 148 mm)
Weight One-Sided Scanning: 13 to 34 1b bond (50 to 128 g/m²)
Tow-Sided Scanning: 13 to 28 1b bond (50 to 105 g/m²)
Quantity Max. 50 sheets*1
(Max. 20 sheets for LGL documents)*1*2

*1 21 lb bond (80 g/m²) paper
*2 LASER CLASS 830i Only

  • Do not place the document in the ADF until the glue, ink or correction fluid on the document is completely dry.
  • Remove all fasteners (staples, paper clips, etc.) before loading the document in the ADF.
  • To prevent document jams in the ADF, do not use any of the following:
  • Wrinkled or creased paper
  • Carbon paper or carbon-backed paper
  • Curled or rolled paper
  • Coated paper
  • Torn paper
  • Onion skin or thin paper
  • Documents with staples or paper clips attached
  • Paper printed with a thermal transfer printer
  • Transparencies

 

 
Scanning Area

Make sure your document's text and graphics fall within the shaded area in the following diagram. Note that the margin widths listed are approximate and there may be slight variations in actual use.


 

 
Paper Requirements

  Paper cassette Multi-purpose tray
Size (W x L) Legal, Letter 3" × 5" to Legal (8 1/2" × 14")
(76 × 127 to 216 × 356 mm)
Weight 17 to 24 lb bond
(64 to 90 g/m²)
15 to 34 lb bond
(56 to 128 g/m²)
Quantity Max. 500 sheets *1 Max. 100 sheets *1
Type Plain *2
Color *2
Recycled *3
Heavy 1 *3
Heavy 2 *4  -
Heavy 3 *5  -
Bond *6
3hole punch paper *7
Transparency *8  -
Labels  -
Envelopes  -

(○: available -: not available)
*1 21 lb bond (80 g/m²) paper
*2 From 17 to 21 lb bond (64 to 80 g/m²)
*3 From 22 to 24 lb bond (81 to 90 g/m²)
*4 From 24 to 28 lb bond (91 to 105 g/m²)
*5 From 28 to 34 lb bond (106 to 128 g/m²)
*6 20 lb bond (75 g/m²)
*7 LTR size only
*8 Use only LTR transparencies made especially for this machine.

Remark
  • The default paper size is LTR. If you use a different paper size, you must change the paper size settings. (See "Setting Paper Type and Size.")

  • To prevent paper jams, do not use any of the following:
  • Wrinkled or creased paper
  • Curled or rolled paper
  • Coated paper
  • Torn paper
  • Damp paper
  • Very thin paper
  • Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (Do not copy on the reverse side.)
  • The following types of paper do not print well:
  • Highly textured paper
  • Very smooth paper
  • Shiny paper
  • Make sure the paper is free from dust, lint, and oil stains.
  • Be sure to test paper before purchasing large quantities.
  • Store all paper wrapped and on a flat surface until ready for use. Keep opened packs in their original packaging in a cool, dry location.
  • Store paper at 64.4°F–75.2°F (18°C–24°C), 40%–60% relative humidity.
  • Use only the transparencies designed for laser printers. Canon recommends you to use Canon type transparencies with this machine.

 

 
Printable Area

The shaded area indicates the approximate printable area of LTR paper and envelope. Note that the margin widths listed are approximate and there may be slight variations in actual use.


 

 
Loading Paper

To load paper in the paper cassette, see "Load Paper."


In the Multi-Purpose Tray (e.g., Envelopes)

 

 
In the Multi-Purpose Tray (e.g., Envelopes)

Return to Overview

If you are making prints on transparencies, labels, nonstandard-sized paper, or envelopes, load them into the multi-purpose tray.


Remark
  • Use standard envelopes with diagonal seams and flaps.
  • To prevent jams, do not use the following:
  • Envelopes with windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or double flaps
  • Envelopes made with special coated paper or deeply embossed paper
  • Envelopes with peel-off sealing strips
  • Envelopes with letters enclosed
  • Make sure to set the correct envelope size in the printer driver. (See online help.)

 
     
  1. Open the multi-purpose tray.
 
     
  1. Pull out the multi-purpose tray extension until it clicks, then open it.
  • Do not load the paper without using the multi-purpose tray extension.
 
     
  1. Gently load the stack of envelopes with the address side facing down and the flap side to the left. Be sure to insert the envelopes as far as they will go.
When you load the envelopes, arrange the stack of envelopes on a firm, clean surface first, then press down firmly on the edges to make the folds crisp.

 
     
  1. Adjust the slide guides to the width of the paper stack.
  • Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the paper limit guide.
  • Some types of paper may not feed properly into the multi-purpose tray. For high quality copies, be sure to use the paper and transparencies recommended by Canon.
  • When making copies of a small document or thick paper, etc., the copy speed may be slightly slower than usual.

 

 
Setting Paper Size and Type

The default settings is <LTR> and <PLAIN PAPER>. When you place other sizes and/or types of paper, follow this procedure to change the settings.
The procedure is same for the paper cassette and multi-purpose tray except for selecting the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray in step 3 and 6.


 
     
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAPER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CASSETTE1> or <MP TRAY>, then press [OK].
  • If an optional paper cassette is attached, you can also select <CASETTE2>.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAPER SIZE>, then press [OK].
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the paper size, then press [OK].

You can select from the following paper sizes:

If you select <CASETTE 1> or <CASETTE 2> in step3:
<LTR>, <LGL>, <A4> ,<OFICIO>, <BRAZIL-OFICIO>, <MEXICO-OFICIO>, <FLSP>

If you select <MP TRAY> in step3:
<LTR>, <LGL>, <A4>, <B5>, <A5R>, <STMTR>, <EXECUTIV>, <COM10>, <MONARCH>, <DL>, <ISO-C5>, <ISO-B5>, <OFICIO>, <BRAZIL-OFICIO>, <MEXICO-OFICIO>, <FOLIO>, <G-LTR>, <G-LGL>, <FLSP>, <CUSTOM SIZE>*

*When selecting this size, enter the height, and press [OK].
Enter the width, and press [OK].

  • The paper sizes available will vary depending on the country where the unit was purchased.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SELECT PAPER TYPE>, then press [OK].
  • If you have selected <EXECUTIV>, <COM10>, <MONARCH>, <DL> or <ISO-C5> for the paper size in step 5, <SELECT PAPER TYPE> is not displayed. Skip to step 8.
 
     
  1. Press [] or [] to select the paper type, then press [OK].

You can select from the following paper types:

If you select <CASETTE 1> or <CASETTE 2> in step3:
<PLAIN PAPER>, <COLOR>, <RECYCLED>, <HEAVY PAPER1>, <BOND>, <3 HOLE PUNCH PAPER>

If you select <MP TRAY> in step3:
<PLAIN PAPER>, <COLOR>, <RECYCLED>, <HEAVY PAPER 1>, <HEAVY PAPER 2>, <HEAVY PAPER 3>, <BOND>, <3 HOLE PUNCH PAPER>, <TRANSPARENCY>, <LABELS>, <ENVELOPE>

 
     
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.